Sprinter Operating Instructions É9065849205{ËÍ 9065849205

Order no. 6462 7539 13 Part no. 906 584 92 05 Edition MY 2015 MB Sprinter Symbols Vehicle distributor Publication details G WARNING Internet Warning notes make you aware of dangers In the USA: which could pose a threat to your health or Further information on Mercedes-Benz vehi- life, or to the health and life of others. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC cles can be obtained on the Internet at One Mercedes Drive http://www.mercedes-benz.com H Environmental note Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) Environmental notes provide you with infor- www.mbusa.com http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada mation on environmentally aware actions or www.mbsprinterusa.com only) disposal. Customer Assistance Center: 1-877-762-8267 ! Notes on material damage alert you to Editorial office dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. In Canada: You are welcome to forward any queries or i suggestions you may have regarding this These symbols indicate useful instruc- Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. tions or further information that could be Operator's Manual to the technical documen- helpful to you. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue tation team at the address on the inside of the Toronto, ON M4G 4C9 front cover. X This symbol designates an instruc- © tion you must follow. www.mercedes-benz.ca Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC X Several consecutive symbols indi- Customer Relations Department: © Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. cate an instruction with several 1-800-387-0100 Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes- steps. Benz Canada Inc. are Daimler companies. (Y page) This symbol tells you where you Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes- Not to be reprinted, translated, or otherwise can find further information on a Benz Canada Inc. are Daimler companies. reproduced, in whole or in part, without writ- topic. Canada only: ten permission. YY This symbol indicates a warning or "Authorized Sprinter Dealer" is defined as an an instruction that is continued on authorized Mercedes-Benz Sprinter Dealer. the next page. Vehicle manufacturer Display This text indicates a message on the display and the rear view cam- Daimler AG era monitor. Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart, Germany Germany Registered trademarks

ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.

As at 03.03.2014 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read these Operat- ing Instructions carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. Please adhere to the information and warning notes in these Oper- ating Instructions for your own safety and to ensure a longer operating duration of the vehicle. Failure to observe the instructions may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. Vehicle damage caused by a failure to observe the instructions is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may differ according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry specification Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a left- hand-drive vehicle. The location of vehicle parts and controls for right-hand drive vehicles differ accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to intro- duce changes in: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnology Therefore, the descriptions provided may occasionally differ from your own vehicle. The following are integral parts of the vehicle: ROperating Instructions RMaintenance/Service Booklet Rservice and warranty information Requipment-dependent operating instructions We wish you pleasant motoring at all times.

9065849205 É9065849205{ËÍ

Contents 3

Index ...... 4 At a glance ...... 31

Introduction ...... 22 Safety ...... 41

Opening and closing ...... 65

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 81

Lights and windshield wipers ...... 91

Climate control ...... 111

Driving and parking ...... 135

On-board computer and displays .... 179

Stowing and features ...... 229

Transporting loads ...... 239

Maintenance and care ...... 247

Roadside Assistance ...... 273

Wheels and tires ...... 283

Technical data ...... 315 4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Air-conditioning system Refrigerant ...... 326 12 V socket ...... 236 see Climate control Air-recirculation mode A Important safety notes ...... 120 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Switching on/off ...... 120 Display message ...... 204 Anti-lock Braking System Function/notes ...... 57 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes ...... 57 Anti-theft system Indicator lamp ...... 218 Interior motion sensor ...... 62 Access step in the bumper Armrests ...... 87 Cleaning ...... 269 Ashtray ...... 235 Activating/deactivating cooling ASR (acceleration skid control) with air dehumidification ...... 117 Activating/deactivating ...... 58 Activating/deactivating the roof Display message ...... 205 ventilator ...... 133 Function/notes ...... 58 Adaptive Brake Assist Important safety notes ...... 58 Function/notes ...... 162 Indicator lamp ...... 218 ADAPTIVE ESP® ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating ...... 61 Add-on equipment ...... 26 Switching off the alarm ...... 61 Authorized workshop Additional indicators see Qualified specialist workshop Replacing bulbs (roof) ...... 104 Additives Automatic car wash (care) ...... 265 Automatic climate control Diesel ...... 320 Engine oil ...... 323 see Climate control Automatic headlamp mode ADR (working speed governor) ...... 172 ...... 93 Air bags Automatic locking ...... 71 Automatic transmission Deployment ...... 49 Front air bag (driver, front Accelerator pedal position ...... 144 passenger) ...... 48 Changing gear ...... 143 Important safety notes ...... 47 Changing gear yourself ...... 143 Introduction ...... 47 Driving tips ...... 144 Thoraxbag ...... 48 Emergency running mode ...... 145 Window curtain air bag ...... 49 Important safety notes ...... 142 Air filter Kickdown ...... 144 Indicator lamp ...... 225 Maneuvering ...... 144 Air pressure Overview ...... 142 see Tire pressure Problem (malfunction) ...... 145 Air vents Releasing the parking lock man- Adjusting for the passenger com- ually ...... 145 partment ...... 121 Selector lever ...... 142 Adjusting on the roof ...... 121 Selector lever positions ...... 143 Important safety notes ...... 120 Shift ranges ...... 144 Setting the center air vents ...... 121 Starting the engine ...... 139 Setting the side air vents ...... 121 Touchshift ...... 143 Trailer towing ...... 144 Index 5

Transmission oil change ...... 324 Disconnecting and connecting Automatic transmission emer- (engine compartment) ...... 262 gency mode ...... 145 Display message ...... 216 AUX port ...... 237 Important safety notes ...... 258 Auxiliary heating Installing/removing (driver's foot- Activating/deactivating heater well) ...... 262 booster mode ...... 130 Installing/removing (engine com- Adjusting ...... 194 partment) ...... 263 Conditions for switching on ...... 123 Jump starting ...... 276 Heating time ...... 123 Location ...... 260 Important safety notes ...... 122 Removing/installing the floor cov- Operating with the button (control ering (driver's footwell) ...... 260 panel) ...... 123 Before driving off Operation with the remote con- Important safety notes ...... 138 trol ...... 125 Belt Operation with the timer ...... 127 see Seat belts Problem (malfunction) ...... 132 Bleeding the fuel system ...... 141 Selecting a switch-on time ...... 124 Blind Spot Assist Setting the switch-on time ...... 125 Activating/deactivating ...... 165, 194 see Auxiliary heating Notes/function ...... 163 Axle load, permissible (trailer tow- Trailer towing ...... 165 ing) ...... 330 BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment B Notes ...... 25 Bottle holder Backup lamps see Cup holder Replacing bulbs ...... 103 Brake Assist Backup lamps (Chassis Cab) see BAS (Brake Assist System) Replacing bulbs ...... 104 Brake Assist System BAS (Brake Assist System) see BAS (Brake Assist System) Display message ...... 205 Brake fluid Function/notes ...... 59 Checking the level ...... 254 Indicator lamp ...... 218 Display message ...... 206 Basic settings Notes ...... 324 see Settings Warning lamp ...... 219 Battery Brake force distribution, elec- Isolating switch ...... 137 tronic Replacing (SmartKey) ...... 69 see EBD (electronic brake force Battery (SmartKey) distribution) Checking ...... 68 Brake lamps Important safety notes ...... 68 Replacing bulbs ...... 103 Replacing ...... 69 Brake lamps (Chassis Cab) Battery (vehicle) Replacing bulbs ...... 104 Care ...... 264 Brake linings Charge indicator lamp ...... 222 Display message ...... 205 Charging ...... 263 Indicator lamp ...... 222 Disconnecting and connecting Brake system (driver's footwell) ...... 260 Malfunction ...... 205 6 Index

Warning lamp ...... 218 Sliding door ...... 269 Brakes Steering wheel ...... 270 ABS ...... 57 Step (electrical) ...... 269 Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 162 Trim pieces ...... 270 Applying the parking brake ...... 150 Washing by hand ...... 266 BAS ...... 59 Washing the engine ...... 266 Brake fluid (notes) ...... 324 Wheels ...... 267 Checking brake fluid level ...... 254 Windows ...... 267 Display messages ...... 205 Wiper blades ...... 268 EBD ...... 59 Cargo compartment Important safety notes ...... 154 Activating/deactivating ventila- Maintenance ...... 218 tion ...... 133 Parking brake (notes) ...... 155 Cargo compartment floor ...... 27 Riding tips ...... 154 Cargo tie-down points and tie Breakdown downs Fire extinguisher ...... 276 Important safety notes ...... 242 First-aid kit ...... 275 Cargo tie-down rings Jump-starting ...... 276 Installing ...... 244 Reflective safety jacket ...... 275 Permissible tensile load ...... 327 Vehicle tool kit ...... 274 Carrier system Warning lamp ...... 275 Ladder rack ...... 245 Warning triangle ...... 275 CD player/CD changer ...... 188 see Flat tire Cell phone see Towing away see Mobile phone Bulb Center console overview ...... 37 see Changing bulbs Central locking Bulb failure indicator ...... 92 Automatic locking ...... 71 Important safety notes ...... 71 C Locking/unlocking (buttons) ...... 71 Car Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 66 Locking/unlocking manually ...... 71 see Vehicle Central locking system Care see Central locking Access step in the bumper ...... 269 Changing bulbs Car wash ...... 265 Additional indicators (roof) ...... 104 Display ...... 270 Backup lamp (Chassis Cab) ...... 104 Exterior lights ...... 268 Backup lamps ...... 103 Interior ...... 270 Bi-Xenon bulbs ...... 99 Notes ...... 265 Brake lamps ...... 103 Paint ...... 267 Brake lamps (Chassis Cab) ...... 104 Plastic trim ...... 270 Cornering lamps ...... 101 Power washer ...... 266 Courtesy lights ...... 105 Rear view camera ...... 269 Daytime running lamps (halogen Roof lining ...... 271 headlamps) ...... 101 Seat belt ...... 271 Display message ...... 208 Seat cover ...... 271 Front interior light ...... 105 Selector lever ...... 270 High-beam headlamps ...... 100 Sensors ...... 268 Interior light ...... 105 Index 7

Interior lighting ...... 105 Cleaning License plate lamp ...... 103 Mirror turn signal ...... 268 License plate lamp (Chassis Cab) .. 104 Trailer tow hitch ...... 270 Low-beam headlamps ...... 100 Climate control Overview of lamp types (front Air-conditioning system ...... 114 bulbs) ...... 100 Auxiliary heating ...... 122 Overview of lamp types (rear Checking/cleaning the air filter bulbs, Cargo Van/Passenger (rear-compartment air condition- Van) ...... 102 ing) ...... 256 Overview of lamp types (rear Cooling with air dehumidification .. 117 bulbs, Chassis Cab) ...... 104 Defrosting the windows ...... 118 Parking lamps ...... 100 Heating ...... 113 Perimeter lamp ...... 104, 105 Important safety notes ...... 112 Rear fog lamp ...... 103 Operating the cargo compartment Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab) ...... 104 air vents ...... 133 Rear interior light ...... 106 Overview of systems ...... 112 Standing lamps (rear, Chassis Problem with the rear window Cab) ...... 104 defroster ...... 119 Standing lamps (rear) ...... 103 Problems with the windshield Tail lamps ...... 103 heating ...... 119 Tail lamps (Chassis Cab) ...... 104 Rear-compartment air condition- Turn signals (front) ...... 102 ing ...... 116 Turn signals (rear, Chassis Cab) ..... 104 Rear-compartment heating ...... 115 Turn signals (rear) ...... 103 Reheat function (air dehumidifica- Warning and indicator lamps ...... 227 tion) ...... 118 see Replacing bulbs Setting the air distribution ...... 117 Changing bulbs Setting the air vents ...... 120 see Replacing bulbs Setting the airflow ...... 118 Checklist Setting the temperature ...... 117 Before driving off-road ...... 157 Switching air-recirculation mode Child seat on/off ...... 120 Forward-facing restraint system ...... 55 Switching on/off ...... 116 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Switching the rear window anchors ...... 53 defroster on/off ...... 119 On the front-passenger seat ...... 55 Switching windshield heating on/ Rearward-facing restraint system .... 55 off ...... 119 Top Tether ...... 54 Cockpit Child-proof locks Overview ...... 32 Important safety notes ...... 55 see Instrument cluster Rear door ...... 56 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Sliding door ...... 56 Activating/deactivating the dis- Children tance warning function ...... 162 In the vehicle ...... 51 COMAND display Restraint systems ...... 52 Cleaning ...... 270 Special seat belt retractor ...... 52 Combination switch ...... 94 Chock ...... 151 Communications equipment Cigarette lighter ...... 235 Operation ...... 237 PND fittings ...... 237 8 Index

Ports ...... 237 Customer Assistance Center Type approval/frequency ...... 316 (CAC) ...... 28 Consumption statistics (on-board Customer Relations Department ...... 28 computer) ...... 195 Control panel D Above the windshield ...... 38 Dashboard Center console ...... 37 Climate control ...... 37 see Cockpit Dashboard lighting Driver's door ...... 39 Left and right side of the steering see Instrument cluster lighting Data wheel ...... 39 Conversions/equipment ...... 26 see Technical data Daytime running lamps Coolant (engine) Activating/deactivating (vehicles Adding ...... 254 with steering wheel buttons) ...... 192 Checking the level ...... 253 Changing bulbs (halogen head- Display message ...... 212 lamps) ...... 101 Displaying the temperature (on- Switching on/off (switch) ...... 92 board computer) ...... 187 Switching on/off (vehicles with- Filling capacity ...... 326 out steering wheel buttons) ...... 183 Important safety notes ...... 253 Dealership Cooling see Qualified specialist workshop see Climate control Cornering lamps Declarations of conformity ...... 24 DEF Replacing bulbs ...... 101 Cornering light function Exhaust gas aftertreatment ...... 25 DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid ) Function/notes ...... 95 Courtesy lights Refilling ...... 147 Delayed switch-off Replacing bulbs ...... 105 ...... 193 Diagnostics connection Crosswind driving assistance ...... 59 Cruise control Operating safety and vehicle Activating ...... 160 approval ...... 25 Diesel Activation conditions ...... 160 ...... 319 Diesel engine Cruise control lever ...... 159 Deactivating ...... 160 Preglow indicator lamp ...... 225 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display message ...... 214 Driving system ...... 159 Display messages (vehicles with Function/notes ...... 159 steering wheel buttons) ...... 211 Important safety notes ...... 159 Display messages (vehicles with- Problem (malfunction) ...... 161 out steering wheel buttons) ...... 200 Setting a speed ...... 160 Indicator lamp ...... 221 Storing and maintaining current Information on consumption ...... 321 speed ...... 160 Level indicator ...... 182 Cup holder ...... 235 Notes ...... 320 Cup holder Storage ...... 321 see Cup holders Tank content ...... 321 Diesel particle filter Cup holders ...... 234 Display message ...... 211 Curtains (cleaning instructions) ...... 271 Short-distance driving ...... 153 Index 9

Digital speedometer Driving off-road Setting the unit (vehicles with see Off-road driving steering wheel buttons) ...... 190 Driving on flooded roads ...... 155 Display Driving on rough terrain Display messages ...... 197 Checklist before driving off-road .... 157 Outside temperature (vehicles Driving safety systems with steering wheel buttons) ...... 187 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 57 Outside temperature display Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 162 (vehicles without steering wheel ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) ...... 58 buttons) ...... 182 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 59 Standard display (vehicles with Distance warning function ...... 161 steering wheel buttons) ...... 187 EBD (electronic brake force distri- Standard display (vehicles with- bution) ...... 59 out steering wheel buttons) ...... 182 Important safety information ...... 57 see Warning and indicator lamps Overview ...... 57 Display messages Driving systems Calling up the message memory .... 198 Blind Spot Assist ...... 163 Driving systems ...... 214 Cruise control ...... 159 Engine ...... 211 Display message ...... 214 Important safety notes ...... 197 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 165 Lights ...... 208 PARKTRONIC ...... 167 Safety systems ...... 204 Driving tips SmartKey ...... 217 Automatic transmission ...... 144 Tires ...... 215 Brakes ...... 154 Vehicle ...... 216 Break-in period ...... 136 Distance recorder ...... 187 Downhill gradient ...... 154 see Odometer Drinking and driving ...... 152 see Trip odometer Driving abroad ...... 153 Distance warning function Driving in winter ...... 156 Activating/deactivating ...... 162 Driving on flooded roads ...... 155 Function/notes ...... 161 Driving on wet roads ...... 155 Warning lamp ...... 162 Exhaust check ...... 152 Door lock Fuel ...... 152 see Central locking General ...... 151 Doors Hydroplaning ...... 155 Central locking/unlocking Icy road surfaces ...... 156 (SmartKey) ...... 66 Important safety notes ...... 136 Control panel ...... 39 Limited braking efficiency on sal- Display message ...... 217 ted roads ...... 155 Indicator lamp ...... 227 Off-road driving ...... 156 Drinking and driving ...... 152 Overrun cut-off ...... 152 Drinks holder Snow chains ...... 287 see Bottle holder Speed limitation ...... 153 Driver's seat Towing a trailer ...... 173 see Seats Transport by rail ...... 154 Driver's/co-driver's door Wet road surface ...... 154 Unlocking ...... 72 Driving abroad ...... 153 10 Index

E Problem (malfunction) ...... 141 Engine oil EBD (electronic brake force distri- Adding ...... 252 bution) Additives ...... 323 Display message ...... 206 Checking the oil level (on-board Function/notes ...... 59 computer) ...... 250 Indicator lamps ...... 218 Checking the oil level using the Electrical closing assist ...... 73 dipstick ...... 251 Electrical fuses Display message ...... 213 see Fuses Filling capacity ...... 323 Electrical step Information about oil consump- Cleaning ...... 269 tion ...... 324 Display message ...... 216 Mixing ...... 323 Emergency release ...... 74 Notes about oil grades ...... 322 Function ...... 74 Oil change ...... 323 Important safety notes ...... 73 Oil level (note) ...... 250 Indicator lamp ...... 227 Viscosity ...... 322 Manual retraction ...... 74 Warning lamp ...... 222 Obstacle detection ...... 74 Engine speed setting (working Electrical system mode) ...... 172 Battery main switch ...... 137 Engine, jump-starting ...... 276 Electronic brake force distribution Equipment/conversions ...... 26 see EBD (electronic brake force ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- distribution) gram) Electronic Stability Program Display message ...... 207 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Important safety information ...... 59 Emergency exit ...... 60 Indicator lamp ...... 221 Emergency exit window ...... 60 Warning lamp ...... 218 Emergency Tensioning Devices Exhaust check ...... 152 Activation ...... 49 Exhaust gas aftertreatment Emissions control DEF level indicator ...... 182 Service and warranty information .... 28 DEF reducing agent ...... 320 Engine Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ...... 320 ADR (working speed governor) ...... 172 Display messages (vehicles with Changing the power output ...... 25 steering wheel buttons) ...... 211 Check Engine warning lamp ...... 224 Display messages (vehicles with- Cleaning instructions ...... 266 out steering wheel buttons) ...... 200 Engine number ...... 317 Indicator lamp ...... 221, 225 Engine speed setting (working Malfunction ...... 211 mode) ...... 173 Refilling DEF ...... 147 Irregular running ...... 141 Exterior lighting Jump-starting ...... 276 see Lights Starting ...... 139 Exterior mirrors Starting problems ...... 141 Adjusting ...... 89 Switching off ...... 150 Important safety notes ...... 89 Tow-starting (vehicle) ...... 280 Eyeglasses compartment ...... 231 Engine electronics Notes ...... 316 Index 11

F Fuel tank Problem (malfunction) ...... 147 Fire extinguisher ...... 276 Fuel tank content First-aid kit ...... 275 Reserve, display message ...... 212 Flat tire Fuses ...... 280 Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ...... 306 G General notes ...... 305 Fog lamps Gasoline Switching on/off ...... 93 Reserve fuel warning lamp ...... 224 Fogged-up windows General driving tips see Climate control Driving short distances ...... 153 Folding seat ...... 85 Genuine parts ...... 27 Folding table Glove box ...... 230 In the twin co-driver's seat ...... 234 GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini- Frequencies tion) ...... 303 Mobile phone ...... 316 Guarantee ...... 28 Two-way radio ...... 316 Front fog lamps H Switching on/off ...... 93 Handbrake Front interior light see Parking brake Replacing bulbs ...... 105 Front windshield Hazard warning lamps ...... 95 Head restraints see Windshield Fuel Adjusting ...... 86 Additives (diesel) ...... 320 Adjusting (rear) ...... 86 Headlamps Consumption information ...... 320 Consumption statistics ...... 195 Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 255 Diesel at very low outside temper- Cleaning system (function) ...... 95 atures ...... 319 Fogging up ...... 97 Display message ...... 212 see Automatic headlamp mode Headliner (cleaning instructions) Driving tips ...... 152 .... 271 Heating Fuel gauge ...... 181 Important safety notes ...... 318 see Climate control High-beam headlamps Problem (malfunction) ...... 147 Quality (diesel) ...... 319 Highbeam Assist ...... 96 Refueling ...... 145 Replacing bulbs ...... 100 Showing the range (on-board Switching on/off ...... 94 Highbeam Assist computer with steering wheel buttons) ...... 195 Function/notes ...... 96 Showing the range (vehicles with Switching Highbeam Assist on/ steering wheel buttons) ...... 195 off ...... 192 Hood Tank content/reserve fuel ...... 319 Fuel filter with water separator Closing ...... 249 draining ...... 255 Display message ...... 217 Indicator lamp ...... 226 Important safety notes ...... 248 Fuel gauge ...... 181 Indicator lamp ...... 227 Opening ...... 248 12 Index

Hydroplaning ...... 155 K Key I Position in the ignition lock ...... 138 Immobilizer ...... 61 Key positions ...... 138 Indicator lamp Kickdown ...... 144 see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators L see Turn signals Lamps Insect protection on the radiator ...... 27 Installing a wheel see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Installing the adapter (spare wheel) ...... 309 Activating/deactivating ...... 166 Instrument cluster Function/notes ...... 165 Language Fuel gage ...... 181 Important safety notes ...... 180 Display (vehicles with steering Instrument cluster lighting ...... 181 wheel buttons) ...... 190 Lashing points and tie downs Outside temperature display ...... 181 Overview ...... 34 Permissible tensile load ...... 327 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Speedometer ...... 181 anchors Tachometer ...... 181 ...... 53 License plate lamp Warning and indicator lamps ...... 35 Instrument cluster lighting ...... 181 Replacing bulbs ...... 103 Instrument lighting License plate lamp (Chassis Cab) see Instrument cluster lighting Replacing bulbs ...... 104 Light sensor Interior lighting ...... 97 ...... 93 Lighting Front ...... 97 Motion detectors ...... 99 see Lights Lighting Notes on replacing bulbs ...... 105 Replacing bulbs ...... 105 see Lights Lights Switching the rear compartment lighting on centrally ...... 98 Activating/deactivating daytime Interior motion sensor running lamps (on-board com- Arming ...... 62 puter with steering wheel but- Deactivating ...... 62 tons) ...... 192 Function ...... 62 Activating/deactivating surround Switching off ...... 62 lighting (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) ...... 193 J Automatic headlamp mode ...... 93 Bulb failure indicator ...... 92 Jack Cornering light function ...... 95 Jacking points ...... 307 Driving abroad ...... 153 Preparation ...... 307 Fog lamps ...... 93 Storage location ...... 274 Hazard warning lamps ...... 95 Using ...... 307 High beam flasher ...... 94 Jump-starting ...... 276 High-beam headlamps ...... 94 Highbeam Assist ...... 96 Important safety notes ...... 92 Index 13

Light switch ...... 92 Menu (vehicles with steering Low-beam headlamps ...... 92 wheel buttons) Parking lamps ...... 92 Audio ...... 187 Rear fog lamp ...... 93 Operation ...... 186 Setting the exterior lighting Settings ...... 188 delayed switch-off (vehicles with Telephone ...... 196 steering wheel buttons) ...... 193 Message Switching the daytime running see Display message lamps on/off (switch) ...... 92 Message memory (on-board com- Turn signals ...... 94 puter) ...... 198 see Changing a bulb Mirrors see Interior lighting Exterior mirrors ...... 89 Limited Warranty ...... 22 Rear-view mirror ...... 89 Load distribution ...... 242 Mobile navigation devices ...... 237 Load securing aids Mobile phone ...... 237 Carrier systems ...... 245 Important safety notes ...... 236 Loading guidelines Pre-installation ...... 237 Important safety notes ...... 240 Type approval/frequency ...... 316 Loading rails Mounting wheels Installing cargo tie-down rings ...... 244 Lowering the vehicle ...... 310 Maximum tensile strength ...... 328 Mounting a new wheel ...... 309 Loads Preparing the vehicle ...... 306 Securing ...... 242 Raising the vehicle ...... 307 Transporting ...... 240 Removing a wheel ...... 309 Locator lighting Removing and mounting the spare Setting (vehicles with steering wheel ...... 313 wheel buttons) ...... 193 Securing the vehicle against roll- Locking ing away ...... 306 see Central locking Locking and unlocking manually ...... 71 N Locking centrally Navigation see Central locking Low-beam headlamps Fittings for PND mobile navigation devices ...... 237 Display message ...... 208 Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Driving abroad ...... 153 cle ...... 136 Replacing bulbs ...... 100 Switching on/off ...... 92 Lumbar support ...... 83 O Occupant safety M Children in the vehicle ...... 51 Important safety notes ...... 42 M+S tires ...... 286 Pets in the vehicle ...... 56 Maintenance ...... 256 Odometer Malfunctions Display (vehicles with steering Message memory (on-board com- wheel buttons) ...... 187 puter) ...... 198 Display (vehicles without steering Maximum speed wheel buttons) ...... 182 Speed limitation ...... 153 14 Index

Off-road driving Operating system Checklist after driving off-road ...... 158 see On-board computer Important safety notes ...... 156 Operator's Manual Rules for driving off-road ...... 158 General notes ...... 22 Oil Vehicle equipment ...... 22 see Engine oil Outline lamp On-board computer Replacing bulbs ...... 105 Display message ...... 197 Outside temperature display ...... 181 Lighting submenu ...... 192 Overhead control panel ...... 38 On-board computer (vehicles with Overrevving range ...... 181 steering wheel buttons) Overrun cutoff ...... 152 Audio menu ...... 187 Display message ...... 184 P Menu overview ...... 186 Operating ...... 184 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 267 Operation menu ...... 186 Paper holder ...... 233 Settings menu ...... 188 Parking ...... 149 Standard display ...... 187 Important safety notes ...... 149 Telephone menu ...... 196 Parking brake ...... 150 Trip computer menu ...... 195 Wheel chock ...... 151 On-board computer (vehicles with- see PARKTRONIC out steering wheel buttons) Parking aid Display message ...... 198 see PARKTRONIC General notes ...... 182 Parking assistance Setting the clock ...... 183 see PARKTRONIC Standard display ...... 182 Parking brake Operating Instructions Display message ...... 207 Before the first journey ...... 22 Notes/function ...... 150 Limited Warranty ...... 22 Parking lamps Operating safety Replacing bulbs ...... 100 Vehicle registration ...... 28 PARKTRONIC Operating safety and vehicle Deactivating/activating ...... 169 approval Driving system ...... 167 Attachments and bodies ...... 26 Function/notes ...... 167 BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat- Important safety notes ...... 167 ment ...... 25 Problem (malfunction) ...... 171 Changing the engine power out- Range of the sensors ...... 168 put ...... 25 Roll-back warning ...... 169 Correct use ...... 22 Trailer towing ...... 170 Declaration of conformity ...... 24 Warning display ...... 169 Equipment and conversions ...... 26 Partition sliding door Important safety notes ...... 24 Important safety notes ...... 77 Information about body/equip- Opening/closing ...... 77 ment mounting directives ...... 26 Passenger compartment air-condi- Notes on operating the vehicle ...... 24 tioning system Qualified specialist workshop ...... 25 see Climate control Registering your vehicle ...... 25 Passenger compartment heating see Climate control Index 15

Perimeter lamp Rear compartment Replacing bulbs ...... 104 Activating/deactivating climate Pets in the vehicle ...... 56 control ...... 116 Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Setting the air vents ...... 121 tions) ...... 270 Rear door Power supply Child-proof locks ...... 56 Battery isolating switch ...... 137 Important safety notes ...... 75 Switching off ...... 137 Opening/closing ...... 75 Switching on ...... 137 Rear fog lamp Power take-off Replacing bulbs ...... 103 Engine speed setting ...... 172 Switching on/off ...... 93 Power washers ...... 266 Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab) Power windows Replacing bulbs ...... 104 see Side windows Rear interior light Preparing for a journey Replacing bulbs ...... 106 Checks in the vehicle ...... 138 Rear lamps Visual check of the vehicle exte- see Lights rior ...... 138 Rear rack Protection of the environment Notes ...... 245 General notes ...... 23 Rear view camera Pulling away ...... 140 Cleaning instructions ...... 269 Important safety notes ...... 171 Q Switching on ...... 171 Rear window defroster Qualified specialist workshop ...... 25 Problem (malfunction) ...... 119 Switching on/off ...... 119 R Rear window wiper ...... 108 Radiator cover ...... 27 Switching on/off ...... 108 Radio Rear-compartment air-condition- Changing stations (vehicles with ing system steering wheel buttons) ...... 187 see Climate control see separate operating instructions Rear-compartment heating Radio-wave reception/transmis- see Climate control sion in the vehicle Rear-view mirror Declaration of conformity ...... 24 Anti-glare mode ...... 89 Rain and light sensor Refilling Setting the sensitivity (vehicles DEF filler neck ...... 148 with steering wheel buttons) ...... 193 Important safety notes (Diesel Windshield wiper ...... 107 Exhaust Fluid – DEF) ...... 147 Range (vehicles with steering Refilling procedure (Diesel wheel buttons) ...... 195 Exhaust Fluid – DEF) ...... 148 Rear bench seat Refrigerant ...... 326 Installing/removing (Passenger Refueling Van) ...... 85 Fuel filler flap ...... 146 Stowage compartment (crewcab) .. 233 Fuel gauge ...... 181 Important safety notes (fuel) ...... 145 Refueling procedure (fuel) ...... 146 see Fuel 16 Index

Releasing the parking lock man- Correct driver's seat position ...... 82 ually (automatic transmission) ...... 145 Folding seat ...... 85 Remote control Important safety notes ...... 82 Changing the operating duration Rear bench seat ...... 85 (auxiliary heating) ...... 126 Seat heating ...... 87 Replacing the battery (auxiliary Setting the driver's seat ...... 83 heating ) ...... 130 Swivel seat ...... 84 Switching on/off (auxiliary heat- Twin co-driver's seat ...... 85 ing) ...... 126 Securing loads Synchronizing (auxiliary heating) ... 126 Important safety notes ...... 242 Replacing bulbs Selector lever Important safety notes ...... 99 Cleaning ...... 270 Replacing the battery (auxiliary Sensors (cleaning instructions) ...... 268 heating remote control) ...... 130 Service center Restraint system see Qualified specialist workshop Introduction ...... 42 Service interval display Warning lamp (function) ...... 42, 222 Calling up the service due date ...... 258 Reverse warning feature ...... 140 Exceeding a service due date ...... 258 Roof carrier Notes ...... 257 Maximum payload ...... 328 Service due date (automatic dis- Notes ...... 245 play) ...... 257 Roof load (roof carrier) ...... 328 Service products Brake fluid ...... 324 S Coolant (engine) ...... 325 Diesel ...... 318 Safety Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ...... 320 Child restraint systems ...... 52 Engine oil ...... 322 Children in the vehicle ...... 51 Fuel ...... 318 Safety system Important safety notes ...... 318 see Driving safety systems Power steering fluid ...... 324 Seat belts Refrigerant ...... 326 Adjusting the height ...... 45 Transmission oil ...... 324 Cleaning ...... 271 Washer fluid ...... 326 Correct usage ...... 45 Setting the air distribution ...... 117 Display message ...... 207 Setting the airflow ...... 118 Fastening ...... 45 Setting the clock Important safety guidelines ...... 44 Vehicles with steering wheel but- Introduction ...... 43 tons ...... 191 Releasing ...... 46 Vehicles without steering wheel Warning lamp ...... 227 buttons ...... 183 Warning lamp (function) ...... 46 Settings Seat heating ...... 87 Resetting all (vehicles with steer- Seats ing wheel buttons) ...... 188 Adjusting lumbar support ...... 83 Resetting submenus (vehicles Adjusting the co-driver's seat ...... 83 with steering wheel buttons) ...... 189 Adjusting the head restraint ...... 86 Short journeys (diesel particle fil- Armrest ...... 87 ter) ...... 153 Cleaning the cover ...... 271 Index 17

Side windows Sprinter Dealer Cleaning ...... 267 see Qualified specialist workshop Hinged side windows ...... 78 Standing lamps Important safety information ...... 78 Replacing bulbs ...... 100 Opening/closing ...... 78 Replacing bulbs (rear) ...... 103 Overview ...... 78 Standing lamps (Chassis Cab) Problem (malfunction) ...... 79 Replacing bulbs (rear) ...... 104 Resetting ...... 79 Start-off assist Sliding door Display message ...... 205 Child-proof locks ...... 56 Starting (engine) ...... 139 Cleaning ...... 269 Station Closing assist ...... 73 see Radio Important safety notes ...... 72 Steering wheel Opening/closing ...... 72 Adjusting ...... 88 Opening/closing from the inside ..... 73 Button overview ...... 37 Opening/closing from the out- Cleaning ...... 270 side ...... 73 Step SmartKey see Electrical step Changing the battery ...... 69 Stickers Changing the locking system set- General safety notes ...... 22 tings ...... 194 Stowage spaces Checking the battery ...... 68 see Stowage spaces and stowage Display message ...... 217 compartments Door central locking/unlocking ...... 66 Stowage spaces and stowage com- Important safety notes ...... 66 partments Loss ...... 70 Eyeglasses compartment ...... 231 Problem (malfunction) ...... 70 Glove box ...... 230 SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 138 Important safety notes ...... 230 Snow chains ...... 287 Paper holder ...... 233 Sockets ...... 236 Stowage compartment above the Spare wheel windshield ...... 232 General notes ...... 312 Stowage compartment in the cen- Important safety notes ...... 312 ter console ...... 232 Removing/mounting ...... 313 Stowage compartment in the Special seat belt retractor ...... 52 dashboard ...... 231 Specialist workshop ...... 25 Stowage space above the head- Speed, controlling liner ...... 232 see Cruise control Stowage space under the rear Speedometer bench seat ...... 233 Digital (vehicles with steering Stowage space under the twin co- wheel buttons) ...... 191 driver's seat ...... 232 Digital (vehicles without steering Summer tires ...... 286 wheel buttons) ...... 182 Switch unit Selecting display unit (vehicles see Control panel with steering- wheel buttons) ...... 190 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ...... 61 see Instrument cluster Switching the heater booster function on/off ...... 130 18 Index

Switching the surround lighting Time on/off (on-board computer) ...... 193 Setting the time (vehicles with Swivel seat ...... 84 steering wheel buttons) ...... 191 Setting the time (vehicles without T steering wheel buttons) ...... 183 Timer Tachometer ...... 181 Activating ...... 128 Tail lamps Important safety notes ...... 127 Changing ...... 104 Overview ...... 127 Replacing bulbs ...... 103 Setting the heating level (auxiliary see Lights heating) ...... 129 Tail lamps (Chassis Cab) Setting the preselection time Replacing bulbs ...... 104 (auxiliary heating) ...... 129 Tank content Setting weekday, time and oper- Fuel gauge ...... 181 ating duration (auxiliary heating) ... 128 Range (vehicles with steering Switching immediate heating wheel buttons) ...... 195 mode on/off (auxiliary heating) ..... 128 Reserve fuel warning lamp ...... 224 Tire pressure Technical data Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 291 Capacities ...... 318 Checking manually ...... 290 Cargo tie-down points ...... 327 Display messages (vehicles with Cargo tie-down rings ...... 327 steering wheel buttons) ...... 215 Loading rails ...... 328 Display messages (vehicles with- Roof carrier ...... 328 out steering wheel buttons) ...... 199 Tires/wheels ...... 294, 311 Maximum ...... 290 Trailer tow hitch ...... 328 Notes ...... 289 Vehicle data ...... 327 Recommended ...... 288 Telephone ...... 236 Setting the unit (vehicles with Telephone (on-board computer) steering wheel buttons) ...... 191 Accepting an incoming call ...... 196 Tire label ...... 288, 289 Display messages ...... 217 Tire pressure loss warning system .. 292 Numbers from the phone book ...... 196 Tire pressure monitor Operating ...... 196 Checking the tire pressure elec- Redialing ...... 197 tronically ...... 292 Rejecting or ending a call ...... 196 Display message ...... 215 Temperature Function/notes ...... 291 Outside temperature ...... 181 Indicator lamp ...... 226 Setting (climate control) ...... 117 Restarting ...... 293 Setting the unit (vehicles with Warning lamp ...... 292 steering wheel buttons) ...... 189 Tire pressure table ...... 294 Theft deterrent systems Tires ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ...... 61 Aspect ratio (definition) ...... 304 Immobilizer ...... 61 Average weight of the vehicle Tow-away alarm ...... 62 occupants (definition) ...... 303 Thoraxbag ...... 48 Bar (definition) ...... 302 Tightening torques for wheel nuts/ Changing a wheel ...... 305 wheel bolts ...... 310 Characteristics ...... 302 Checking ...... 285 Index 19

Curb weight (definition) ...... 304 TIN (Tire Identification Number) Definition of terms ...... 302 (definition) ...... 304 Direction of rotation ...... 306 Tire bead (definition) ...... 304 Distribution of the vehicle occu- Tire pressure (definition) ...... 304 pants (definition) ...... 305 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 303 DOT (Department of Transporta- Tire size (data) ...... 294, 311 tion) (definition) ...... 303 Tire size designation, load-bearing DOT, Tire Identification Number capacity, speed rating ...... 300 (TIN) ...... 302 Tire tread ...... 285 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Tire tread (definition) ...... 304 (definition) ...... 303 Total load limit (definition) ...... 305 GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi- Traction (definition) ...... 304 nition) ...... 303 TWR (permissible trailer drawbar GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- noseweight) (definition) ...... 305 inition) ...... 303 Uniform Tire Quality Grading GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Standards (definition) ...... 303 ing) (definition) ...... 303 valve, Snap-In ...... 290 Important safety notes ...... 284 Wear indicator (definition) ...... 305 Increased vehicle weight due to Wheel rim (definition) ...... 303 optional equipment (definition) ...... 303 Top Tether ...... 54 Information on driving ...... 284 Touchshift (automatic transmis- Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...... 303 sion) ...... 143 Labeling (overview) ...... 299 Tow-away alarm Load bearing index (definition) ...... 304 Arming/deactivating ...... 62 Load index ...... 301 Deactivating ...... 62 Load index (definition) ...... 304 Operation ...... 62 M+S tires ...... 286 Tow-starting Maximum load on a tire (defini- Emergency engine starting ...... 280 tion) ...... 304 Important safety notes ...... 277 Maximum loaded vehicle weight Towing (definition) ...... 303 If the vehicle is stuck ...... 280 Maximum permissible tire pres- Installing/removing the towing sure (definition) ...... 304 eye ...... 278 Maximum tire load ...... 301 With a raised front or rear axle ...... 279 Maximum tire load (definition) ...... 304 Towing a trailer Optional equipment weight (defi- Axle load, permissible ...... 330 nition) ...... 304 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ...... 270 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- Coupling up a trailer ...... 175 inition) ...... 304 Decoupling a trailer ...... 177 Replacing ...... 305 Driving tips ...... 173 Service life ...... 286 Important safety notes ...... 173 Sidewall (definition) ...... 304 Notes on retrofitting ...... 328 Snow chains ...... 287 Power supply ...... 178 Speed rating (definition) ...... 303 Trailer loads ...... 330 Storing ...... 306 Towing away Structure and characteristics Important safety guidelines ...... 277 (definition) ...... 302 In the event of malfunctions ...... 279 Summer tires ...... 286 With both axles on the ground ...... 279 20 Index

Trailer TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi- Brake force booster malfunction ... 219 nition) ...... 305 Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer U Trailer loads and drawbar nose- Unlocking weights ...... 177 Trailer towing From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ...... 71 Blind Spot Assist ...... 165 USB port ...... 238 PARKTRONIC ...... 170 Permissible trailer loads and drawbar noseweights ...... 177 V Transmission Vehicle see Automatic transmission Data acquisition ...... 29 Transmission oil ...... 324 Display message ...... 216 Transport Electronics ...... 316 Loading guidelines ...... 240 Equipment ...... 22 Vehicle ...... 280 Individual settings (vehicles with Transport by rail ...... 154 steering wheel buttons) ...... 188 Transportation Limited Warranty ...... 22 Rail ...... 154 Loading ...... 295 Transporting Locking (SmartKey) ...... 66 Load distribution ...... 242 Lowering ...... 310 Securing a load ...... 242 Maintenance ...... 28 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Parking for a long period ...... 151 tions) ...... 270 Pulling away ...... 140 Trip computer (on-board com- Raising ...... 307 puter) ...... 195 Registration ...... 25, 28 Trip meter Reporting problems ...... 28 see Trip odometer Securing from rolling away ...... 149 Trip odometer Towing away ...... 277 Display (vehicles with steering Transporting ...... 280 wheel buttons) ...... 187 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 66 Display (vehicles without steering Vehicle battery wheel buttons) ...... 182 see Battery (vehicle) Resetting ...... 181 Vehicle bodies see Trip computer (on-board computer) Body/equipment mounting direc- Turn signals tives for trucks ...... 26 Replacing bulbs (front) ...... 102 Vehicle data ...... 327 Replacing bulbs (rear) ...... 103 Vehicle identification number ...... 316 Switching on/off ...... 94 Vehicle identification plate ...... 316 Turn signals (Chassis Cab) Vehicle tool kit ...... 274 Replacing bulbs (rear) ...... 104 Vents Twin co-driver's seat see Air vents Folding table ...... 234 Voltage supply Stowage compartment ...... 232 Fuses ...... 280 Two-way radios Type approval/frequency ...... 316 Index 21

W Removing a wheel ...... 309 Removing and mounting the spare Warning wheel ...... 313 Stickers ...... 22 Snow chains ...... 287 Warning and indicator lamps Storing ...... 306 Brakes ...... 219 Tightening torque ...... 310 Check Engine ...... 224 Wheel size/tire size ...... 311 Coolant ...... 223 Window curtain air bag ...... 49 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ...... 221 Windows Electrical step ...... 227 see Side windows ® ESP ...... 218 Windshield ® ESP function ...... 221 Defrosting ...... 118 Overview ...... 35 Windshield heating Seat belt ...... 227 Problem (malfunction) ...... 119 Warning lamp ...... 275 Switching on/off ...... 119 Warning triangle ...... 275 Windshield washer fluid Warning- and indicator lamps Adding ...... 255 ABS ...... 218 Indicator lamp ...... 226 Air filter ...... 225 Windshield wipers ASR ...... 218 Problem (malfunction) ...... 109 BAS ...... 218 Rain and light sensor ...... 107 Battery charge ...... 222 Rear window wiper ...... 108 Brake wear ...... 222 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 108 Bulbs ...... 227 Setting the sensitivity (vehicles Doors ...... 227 with steering wheel buttons and Engine oil level ...... 222 rain/light sensor) ...... 193 Preglow ...... 225 Switching on/off ...... 107 Reserve fuel ...... 224 Wiping with windshield washer Tire pressure monitor ...... 226 fluid ...... 107 Water separator ...... 226 Winter diesel ...... 319 Windshield washer fluid ...... 226 Winter driving Washer fluid Slippery road surfaces ...... 156 Adding ...... 255 Snow chains ...... 287 Capacities ...... 327 Winter operation Display message ...... 217 General notes ...... 286 Indicator lamp ...... 226 Radiator cover ...... 27 Notes ...... 326 Winter tires Wiping with ...... 107 M+S tires ...... 286 Wheels Setting a limit speed ...... 153 Changing a wheel ...... 305 Wiper blades Checking ...... 285 Cleaning ...... 268 Cleaning ...... 267 Replacing ...... 108 Important safety notes ...... 284 Workshop Installing the adapter (spare see Qualified specialist workshop wheel) ...... 309 Interchanging/changing ...... 305 Mounting a new wheel ...... 309 Mounting a wheel ...... 306 22 Introduction

Operating Instructions The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the Before the first journey systems in your vehicle. These instructions, the Maintenance Booklet If you have questions about equipment and and the additional equipment-related instruc- operation, consult any authorized Sprinter tions are integral parts of the vehicle. Keep Dealer. these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass on all documents to the new owner. Proper use Before you first drive off, read these documents carefully and familiarize yourself with Observe the following information when oper- your vehicle. ating your vehicle: For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, Rthe safety notes in these operating instruc- follow the instructions and warning notices in tions these Operating Instructions. Failure to Rthe technical data in these Operating observe the instructions may lead to damage Instructions to the vehicle or personal injury. Rtraffic laws and regulations Vehicle damage caused by a failure to Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards observe the instructions is not covered by the There are various warning stickers affixed to New Vehicle Limited Warranty. the vehicle. If you remove warning stickers, you and others may fail to recognize the dan- Limited Warranty gers. Leave the warning stickers in their original position. ! Follow the instructions in this Operator's G WARNING Manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle Modifications to electronic components, their damage. Damage to your vehicle that ari- software as well as wiring can impair their ses from culpable contravention of these function and/or the function of other net- instructions is not covered by the Limited worked components. In particular, systems Warranty of the distributor named on the relevant to safety could also be affected. As a inside of the front cover. result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an Vehicle equipment accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- The Operating Instructions describe all mod- tronic components or their software. You els and standard and optional equipment of should have all work to electrical and elec- your vehicle that were available at the time of tronic equipment carried out at a qualified going to print. Country-specific variations are specialist workshop. possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the described functions. The general operating permit for your vehicle This also applies to systems and functions could be rendered invalid if you carry out relevant to safety. The equipment in your modifications to electronic components, vehicle may therefore differ from that shown their software as well as wiring. in the descriptions and illustrations. Introduction 23

G WARNING Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, Gases and fluids from substances that con- transmission, brake and tire wear are affected stitute a health hazard or react aggressively by these factors: can escape even from securely closed con- Roperating conditions of your vehicle tainers. When transporting such substances Ryour personal driving style in the vehicle interior, your ability to concen- You can influence both factors. You should trate or your health could be affected during bear the following in mind: the journey. Malfunctions, short circuits or electrical component system failures may Operating conditions: also result. There is a risk of an accident and Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- fire. sumption. Do not store or transport any substances in Ralways make sure that the tire pressures the vehicle interior which are hazardous to are correct. health or react aggressively. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. R These instructions must also be observed for remove roof racks once you no longer need vehicles where the cargo compartment is not them. fully separated from the driver's cab. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Partition with door/window: always keep the to environmental protection. You should door/window in the partition closed during therefore adhere to the service intervals. transport. Ralways have service work carried out at a Examples of substances that are hazardous qualified specialist workshop. to health and/or react aggressively: Personal driving style: RSolvents Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when RFuel starting the engine. R ROil and grease do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. RCleaning agents Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance RAcids from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Protection of the environment braking. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear Economic and environmentally aware only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. driving Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion. hensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental issues and recommen- planet to be used sparingly and in a manner dations that takes the requirements of both nature When prompted by this Operator's Manual to and humanity into account. dispose of materials, please try to regenerate You too can help to protect the environment and recycle these materials. Observe all rel- by operating your vehicle in an environmen- evant environmental guidelines and regula- tally responsible manner.

Z 24 Introduction

tions when disposing of materials. This helps contact with hot components of the exhaust to protect the environment. system for an extended period. G WARNING Operating safety and vehicle approval Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with Important safety notes hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. G WARNING When driving off road or on unpaved roads, If you do not have the prescribed service/ check the vehicle's underside regularly. In maintenance work or any required repairs particular, remove parts of plants or other carried out, this can result in malfunctions or flammable materials which have become system failures. There is a risk of an accident. trapped. In the case of damage, contact a Always have the prescribed service/mainte- qualified specialist workshop. nance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- you become aware when continuing the jour- ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate- ney that driving safety has been effected, rial, which may require special handling and stop as soon as possible in accordance with regard for the environment. The guidelines the traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a must be observed during disposal. qualified specialist workshop. In California, you can find more information on the Internet at www.dtsc.ca.gov. Declaration of conformity

Notes on operating the vehicle Radio-based vehicle components There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle R comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- the vehicle makes contact with the ground, ation is subject to the following two condi- e.g. on a high curb or a loose road surface tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm- R you drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g. ful interference. 2. This device must accept a curb or a pothole any interference received, including interfer- Ra heavy object hits the underbody or chas- ence that may cause undesired operation. sis component Changes or modifications not expressly In these or similar situations, the vehicle approved by the party responsible for com- body/frame, the underbody, chassis compo- pliance could void the user’s authority to nents, wheels or tires could be damaged even operate the equipment." if this is not visible from the outside. Compo- Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle nents that have been damaged in this way can comply with Industry Canada license-exempt unexpectedly fail or no longer be able to RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the assimilate the loads occurring in the event of following two conditions: 1) These devices an accident. If the underbody paneling is may not cause interference, and 2) these damaged, flammable material, such as devices must accept any interference leaves, grass or twigs, could collect between received, including interference that may the underbody and underbody paneling. cause undesired operation of the device". These materials could ignite if they remain in Introduction 25

Diagnostics connection The following work should always be carried out at qualified specialist workshop: The diagnostics connection is only intended R for the connection of diagnostic equipment at work relevant to safety a qualified specialist workshop. Rservice and maintenance work R G WARNING repair work Rmodifications as well as installations and If you connect equipment to the diagnostics alterations connection in the vehicle, it may affect the R operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, work on electronic components the operating safety of the vehicle could be For this reason, we recommend an authorized affected. There is a risk of an accident. Sprinter Dealer. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- ! Only have work carried out on the engine tics connection in the vehicle. electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified Changing the engine power output specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the ! Increases in engine power can: vehicle's operating permit may be invalida- Rchange the emission values ted. Rcause malfunctions Rcause consequential damage Registering your vehicle The operating reliability of the engine is not guaranteed in all cases. We may ask our authorized Sprinter Dealers Any tampering with the engine management to carry out technical inspections on certain system in order to increase the engine power vehicles to improve their quality or safety. We output will lead to the loss of the New Vehicle can only inform you about vehicle checks if Limited Warranty and other warranty entitle- we have your registration data. ments. Your registration data is not stored if: If you sell the vehicle, inform the purchaser Ryou did not purchase your vehicle at an about the changes to the engine power out- authorized Sprinter Dealer. put of the vehicle. If you do not inform the Ryour vehicle has never been inspected at an buyer, this may constitute a punishable authorized Sprinter Dealer. offense under national legislation. It is advisable to register your vehicle with an authorized Sprinter Dealer. Please inform us Qualified specialist workshops as soon as possible about any change of address or vehicle ownership. An authorized Sprinter Dealer is a qualified specialist workshop. A qualified specialist workshop has the nec- Exhaust gas aftertreatment essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali- To function properly, exhaust gas aftertreat- fications to correctly carry out the work ment must be operated with Diesel Exhaust required on the vehicle. Fluid (DEF) reducing agent . The DEF range is This is especially the case for work relevant to dependent on operating and driving condi- safety. Observe the information in the Main- tions. Therefore, add to the DEF supply tank tenance Booklet. regularly during vehicle operation or, at the

Z 26 Introduction

latest, after receiving the first warning mes- Attachments, bodies, equipment and sage via the on-board computer. conversions To conform to emission regulations, you must Information about body/equipment operate the vehicle with DEF and refill the mounting directives supply regularly. The engine management recognizes attempts to operate the vehicle ! For safety reasons, have add-on equip- without DEF, with thinned DEF or with ment manufactured and installed accord- another reducing agent. After previous warning to the Sprinter body/equipment mounting messages, the engine management then ing directives in force. These body/equip- prevents a further engine start. ment mounting directives ensure that the If the DEF level drops below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l), chassis and the body form one unit and that the first warning message is issued and a maximum operating and road safety is ach- warning tone sounds. After the message ieved. appears for the first time, and under normal We recommend for safety reasons that: driving conditions, the remaining DEF supply Ryou carry out no other modifications to will last for approximately 1000 miles the vehicle. (1600 km). Ryou obtain the agreement of the distrib- If a reserve mark of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) is utor named on the inside of the front reached, a second warning message is issued cover for any deviations from the and a warning tone sequence sounds. After approved body/equipment mounting the first message, the DEF supply will last for directives. approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). Subse- quently, you will only be able to start the Approval from certified inspection agen- engine a further 16 times. cies or official approvals cannot rule out risks to your safety. You should immediately add 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 147) or have the DEF supply Please observe the information concerning reservoir filled at a qualified specialist work- Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts (Y page 27). shop. Further information can be obtained at any When the number of remaining engine starts authorized Sprinter Dealer. is 0 and the engine is restarted, the engine G WARNING management prevents the vehicle from being driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h). The function of systems or components can be affected by conversions or modifications If the ; Check Engine indicator lamp lights to the vehicle. They might not function prop- up, the exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty or erly any more and/or jeopardize the opera- an emission-related malfunction has occur- tional safety of the vehicle. There is an red (Y page 211). You will then only be able to increased risk of an accident and injury. drive a maximum 50 mi (80 km) before the engine management restricts the number of Conversions or modifications should always starts remaining. be carried out at qualified specialist workshop. If the exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty, have it checked and repaired at a qualified If you intend to make modifications to your specialist workshop. vehicle, we strongly recommend that you Further information on DEF can be found in contact the distributor named on the inside of the "Refueling" (Y page 147) and "Service the front cover. There you will receive all the products and capacities" (Y page 320) sec- necessary information and a charge may be tions. levied. Introduction 27

You alone accept the responsibility if body Information on the cargo compartment manufacturers or dealers make modifications floor that affect the final certification of the engine, ! The wooden or plastic cargo area floor fit- the vehicle or the equipment. This also ted at the factory is an integral component applies to the identification and documenta- of the vehicle structure. The vehicle body tion of modifications to the affected vehicle could be damaged if you have the load area components. floor removed. This then affects the secur- You are responsible for certification and con- ing of loads and the maximum loading firmation that: capacity of the lashing points is no longer Rall the applicable standards and regulations guaranteed. that are affected by the vehicle modifica- Therefore, do not have the load area floor tion are met removed. Rthe modified vehicle fulfills the vehicle safety standards and emissions laws and regulations Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Rthe modifications or installation of accessories does not affect the safety of the ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- vehicle ces, as well as control units and sensors for We are not responsible for the final certifica- these restraint systems, may be installed in tion, product liability or warranty claims the following areas of your vehicle: which result from the modifications. This Rdoors applies to: Rdoor pillars Rthe modified components, assemblies or Rdoor sills systems Rseats R any resulting noncompliance with any of Rcockpit the emissions laws and regulations or the Rinstrument cluster motor vehicle safety standards Rcenter console Rany consequences arising from the changes that make the vehicle less safe or Do not install accessories such as audio even render it defective systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the We do not assume responsibility as the final- operating efficiency of the restraint sys- stage manufacturer or for the consequential tems. product liability. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a Notes on the radiator qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Even seemingly small changes to the vehicle, such as attaching a radiator trim for winter We supply reconditioned assemblies and driving, is not permitted. Do not cover up the parts which are of the same quality as new radiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect pro- parts. The same New Vehicle Limited War- tection covers or anything similar. ranty applies as for new parts. Otherwise, the values of the diagnostic sys- The operating safety of the vehicle could be tem may be affected. Some of these values jeopardized if you use parts, tires and wheels are legally prescribed and must always be as well as accessories relevant to safety correct. which have not been approved by Mercedes- Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in Z 28 Introduction

safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake sys- Replacement parts and accessories are sub- tem. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ject to the Replacement Part and Accessory or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, Warranty of the dealer mentioned on the wheels and accessories that have been spe- inside cover. You can obtain these from any cifically approved for your vehicle. authorized Sprinter dealer. We test genuine Sprinter parts, as well as conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for the type of Maintenance vehicle, for: The Maintenance Booklet and the Service and Rreliability Warranty Information Booklet describe all Rsafety necessary maintenance work that should be carried out at regular intervals. Rsuitability When you take the vehicle to an authorized Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes- Sprinter dealer, always be sure to bring the Benz is unable to assess other parts. There- Maintenance/Service/Warranty Information fore, we accept no responsibility for the use of Booklet. Your customer service advisor such parts in Sprinter vehicles, even if they enters each maintenance service into the have been officially approved or independ- Maintenance Booklet for you. ently approved by a testing center. In some countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification Registering your vehicle if they comply with legal requirements. All genuine Sprinter parts satisfy these require- We may ask our authorized Sprinter Dealers ments. Make sure that all parts are suitable to carry out technical inspections on certain for your vehicle. vehicles to improve their quality or safety. Always specify the vehicle identification num- We can only inform you about vehicle checks ber (VIN) and engine number when ordering if we have your registration data. genuine Sprinter parts (Y page 316). Your registration data is not stored if: Ryou did not purchase your vehicle at an authorized Sprinter Dealer. Service and vehicle operation Ryour vehicle has never been inspected at an Maintenance and literature authorized Sprinter Dealer. The Service and Warranty Information Book- It is advisable to register your vehicle with an let contains detailed information on the types authorized Sprinter Dealer. Please inform us of warranty that your Sprinter is covered by, as soon as possible about any change of including: address or vehicle ownership. RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty RDiesel Engine Limited Warranty Problems with your vehicle RAnti-Perforation Warranty RLimited Warranty for Restraint Systems If you should experience a problem with your (only vehicles that have been sold and reg- vehicle, particularly one that you believe may istered in the state of Kansas) affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Sprinter Dealer immedi- RLegally required Emission Performance ately to have the problem diagnosed and rec- Warranty tified. Introduction 29

If the problem cannot be rectified to your sat- The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's isfaction there: movements. Rplease discuss the problem with a manage- When you use one of the available services, ment representative from the authorized technical information may be read from the Sprinter Dealer. event data memory and malfunction data Rif necessary, contact the distributor named memory. on the inside of the front cover. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Data stored in the vehicle Rwarranty claims R A wide range of electronic components in quality assurance your vehicle contain data memories. The information is read out by employees of These data memories temporarily or perma- the service network (including manufactur- nently store technical information about: ers) using special diagnostic testers. Further information is available there if required. Rthe vehicle's operating status After a malfunction has been rectified, the R events information is deleted from the malfunction Rmalfunctions memory or is continually overwritten. In general, this technical information docu- When operating the vehicle, situations are ments the state of a component, a module, a conceivable in which this technical data, in system or the surroundings. connection with other information - if neces- This includes, for example: sary, under consultation with an authorized Roperating conditions of system compo- expert - could be traced to a person. nents, e.g. fluid levels. Examples include: Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of Raccident reports its individual components, e.g. number of Rdamage to the vehicle wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in Rwitness statements movement, lateral acceleration, accelera- Further additional functions which are con- tor pedal position. tractually agreed with the customer likewise R malfunctions and defects in important sys- allow specific vehicle data to be obtained tem components, e.g. lights, brakes. from the vehicle. Such additional functions Rthe vehicle's reactions and operating sta- include vehicle locating in an emergency, for tuses in special driving situations. e.g. air example. bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems. Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature. This data is exclusively technical in nature and can be used to: Rassist in the detection and rectification of malfunctions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimize vehicle functions

Z 30 31

Cockpit ...... 32 Instrument cluster ...... 34 Steering wheel buttons ...... 37 Center console ...... 37 Overhead control panel ...... 38 Door control panel ...... 39

Further control panels ...... 39 At a glance 32 Cockpit

Cockpit At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Door control panel 39 E • Stowage compartment with interior light 97 ; Light switch 92 • Overhead control panel 38 = Combination switch F Rear-view mirror 89 • turn signals 94 • high-beam headlamps 94 G PARKTRONIC warning dis- • windshield wipers 107 play 167 • rear window wiper 108 H Opens/closes the right- hand side window 78 ? Cruise control lever 159 I Stowage compartment A Steering wheel without/ (jack and vehicle tool kit) 274 with buttons 37 J Glove box 230 B Instrument cluster 34 K Center console 37 C Stowage compartment • 3.5 mm audio jack 237 L Selector lever (automatic • USB port 238 transmission) 142 D Timer for the auxiliary M Ignition lock 138 warm-air heater (auxiliary N Further control panels 39 heating) 127 O Steering wheel buttons 37 P Applies/releases the parking brake 155 Cockpit 33

Function Page Q Horn R Opens the hood 248 S Steering wheel buttons 37 At a glance 34 Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster Displays and controls At a glance

Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons Function Page Function Page : Speedometer 181 B Reset button 9 34 ; Tachometer 181 C Menu button 4 = f, g Brightens/dims the • changes standard display 182 instrument cluster lighting 181 • selects menus 183 ? Fuel gage with fuel filler flap D Service button Ë location indicator 181 Checks the engine oil level 250 A Display Vehicles without steering wheel buttons 182 Vehicles with steering wheel buttons 184 Instrument cluster 35

Indicator and warning lamps At a glance

Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons Function Page Function Page : Speedometer with warn- ; Check Engine indicator ing and indicator lamps lamp 224 d ESP® warning lamp 218 % Preglow 139 ASR warning lamp 218 Preglow system malfunction 225 % Coolant level too low 223 ; Indicator and warning ? Coolant temperature too lamps high 223 G Left-hand turn signal 94 6 Restraint systems malfunction 42 ! ABS malfunction 218 b Brake fluid level too low 219 h Tire pressure loss or the tire EBD malfunctioning 218 pressure monitor is malfunctioning (USA only) 226 Trailer brake force booster malfunction 219 Tire pressure loss (Canada only) 292 4 Engine oil level warning 222 36 Instrument cluster

Function Page Function Page ¦ Fluid level too low in wind- È Dirt accumulation in air fil- shield washer/headlamp ter 225 cleaning system 226 6 Reserve fuel 181 å DEF supply low or contami- Fuel filler cap open 224 nated/thinned 182 : At a glance Exhaust gas aftertreatment Water in the fuel 226 malfunction 221 # Battery charging malfunc- Ä Warning and indicator tion 222 lamps, distance warning b Bulb defective 227 system 162 = Tachometer with warn- Ã Warning and indicator ing and indicator lamps lamps, Lane Keeping Assist 166 c Parking brake applied 155 1 Door or hood open 227 L Electrically operated step Low-beam headlamps on 92 malfunction 227 K Working speed governor # Brake pads/linings worn 222 (ADR) on 172 K K High-beam headlamps on High-beam headlamps on (vehicle with steering wheel (vehicle without steering buttons) 94 wheel buttons) 94 | J Right-hand turn signal 94 Reserve fuel 224 Fuel filler cap open 224 : ASR malfunction 58 h ® BAS malfunction 218 ESP malfunction 218 7 h ESP® malfunction 218 Fasten seat belts 227

i Corresponding messages may also be shown in the display (Y page 197). Center console 37

Steering wheel buttons Center console At a glance

Function Page : Display 184 On-board computer operation Function Page ; Selects a submenu or adjusts the volume 184 : Stowage compartment 231 W Up/increases the vol- ; Audio 10 or Audio 15 (see ume the separate operating X Down/reduces the instructions) volume = Using the telephone 196 Air-conditioning control panel 112 6 Accepts a call/starts 1 dialing Paper holder 233 ~ Ends a call/rejects an ? Center console control incoming call panel = Scrolls from one menu to c Switches the left/right- another 184 hand seat heating on/off 87 V Forwards z Switches the windshield U Back heating on/off 119 Scrolls within a menu 184 | Switches the rear window 9 Forwards defroster on/off 119 : Back f Activates/deactivates PARKTRONIC 169

1 Only on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control. 38 Overhead control panel

Function Page Overhead control panel £ Switches the hazard warning lamps on/off 95 à Activates/deactivates ASR 58 Ã Central locking, interior/ Ä rear compartment 71 At a glance æ Activates/deactivates the distance warning function 162 j Activates/deactivates Lane Keeping Assist 166 Function Page Activates/deacti- : Microphone for the mobile vates Blind Spot Assist 163 phone 236 A • Stowage compartment or ; Switches the reading lamp • CD changer; see the sep- on/off, right 97 arate operating instructions, or = Switches the automatic interior lighting on/off 97 B Cup holder with: 234 ? • Eyeglasses compartment • ashtray 235 or 231 • cigarette lighter 235 • Anti-Theft Alarm system C 12 V socket 236 (ATA) 61 A Switches the interior lighting on/off 97 B Switches the reading lamp on/off, left 97 Further control panels 39

Door control panel Further control panels Control panel between the light switch and the steering wheel At a glance

Function Page : Adjusts the exterior mirrors 89 Function Page ; Selects an exterior mirror 89 y Switches the auxiliary heat- = Opens/closes the left-hand ing on/off 123 side window 78 ± Switches the heater boos- ? Opens/closes the right- ter function on/off 130 hand side window 78 E Sets the working speed F 172 E Switches the working speed governor (ADR) on/off 172 ´ Ventilates the cargo com- · partment 133 40 Further control panels

Control panel between the steering wheel and the ignition lock At a glance

Function Page l Switches the central rear k compartment lighting on/off 97 41

Useful information ...... 42 Occupant safety ...... 42 Children in the vehicle ...... 51 Pets in the vehicle ...... 56 Driving safety systems ...... 57 Emergency exit ...... 60

Theft deterrent locking system ...... 61 Safety 42 Occupant safety

Useful information cle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the This Operator's Manual describes all models protection offered by the seat belt is suffi- as well as standard and optional equipment of cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an your vehicle that were available at the time of accident occurs, only the air bags that going to print. Country-specific variations are increase protection in that particular accident possible. Note that your vehicle may not be situation are deployed. However, seat belts equipped with all of the described functions. and air bags generally do not protect against Safety This also applies to systems and functions objects penetrating the vehicle from the out- relevant to safety. side. Read the information on qualified specialist Information on restraint system operation workshops (Y page 25). can be found under "Deployment of Emer- gency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 49). Occupant safety For more information about children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint Restraint system introduction systems, see "Children in the vehicle" The restraint system reduces the risk of vehi- (Y page 51). cle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also Important safety notes reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants G WARNING are subjected during an accident. Modifications to the restraint system, may The restraint system comprises: cause it to no longer work as intended. The RSeat belt system restraint system may then not perform its RAir bags intended protective function and may fail in an RChild restraint system accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. RChild seat securing systems This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only Never modify parts of the restraint system. deploy their protective function if, at all times, Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic all vehicle occupants: components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an airbag system to Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly accommodate a person with disabilities, con- (Y page 45) tact an authorized Sprinter dealership for R have adjusted their seat and head restraint details. USA only: contact our Customer properly (Y page 82). Assistance Center at 1‑877‑762‑8267 for As the driver, you also have to make sure that details. the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 82). Restraint system warning lamp You also have to make sure that an air bag can The restraint systems functions are checked inflate properly if deployed (Y page 47). after the ignition is switched on and at regular An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat intervals when the engine is running. This belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehi- Occupant safety 43 allows malfunctions to be detected in good The seat belt system comprises: time. RSeat belts 6 When the ignition is switched on, the REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat restraint system warning lamp in the instru- belt force limiters for the driver's and front- ment cluster lights up. It goes out no later passenger seat belts than a few seconds after the vehicle is star- On vehicles with two seats on the front- ted. The components of the restraint system passenger side, both seat belts on the are on standby. front-passenger side have an Emergency Safety A malfunction has occurred if the 6 Tensioning Device. Only the seat belt on the restraint system warning lamp: outer front-passenger seat has a seat belt Rdoes not light up after the ignition is force limiter. switched on. The seat belt system only includes Emer- Rdoes not switch off after a few seconds. gency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force Rgoes out, but then lights up again, e.g. when limiters for the driver and front passenger if the engine is running. the vehicle is equipped with a driver's air bag. If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet G WARNING quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be system components may be triggered unin- extracted any further. tentionally or might not be triggered at all in The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the event of an accident with a high rate of the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer- close against the body. However it does not gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam- pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or of the backrest. even fatal injury. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not Have the restraint system checked and correct an incorrect seat position or the rout- repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. soon as possible. When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on Seat belts the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters are synchronized Introduction with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the Seat belts are the most effective means of force exerted on the vehicle occupants during restricting the movement of vehicle occu- an accident. pants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi- ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, cle occupants coming into contact with parts do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the vehicle interior or being ejected from of the front-passenger seat. This may oth- the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer- to keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi- gency Tensioning Device in the event of an tion in relation to the air bag. accident, which will then need to be replaced. Vehicles with two seats on the front- passenger side: the Emergency Tensioning Device of the inner front-passenger seat is

Z 44 Occupant safety

triggered independently of the lock status of belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect the seat belt. as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for Important safety notes example, in an accident, during braking or an The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- abrupt change of direction. This poses an tems is required by law in: increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under R all 50 states 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint Safety Rthe U.S. territories systems. Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten Ralways secure the child in a child restraint their seat belts before starting the journey. system suitable for this vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the G WARNING age, weight and size of the child If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can- Ralways observe the instructions and safety not protect as intended. Furthermore, an notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec- incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addition of this Operator's Manual tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- (Y page 51) in addition to the child ing braking or when abruptly changing direc- restraint system manufacturer's installation. This poses an increased risk of injury or tion instructions even fatal injury. G WARNING Make sure that all vehicle occupants are seated properly with a correctly fastened seat The seat belts may not perform their intended belt. protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely G WARNING dirty, bleach or dyed The seat belt does not offer the intended level Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or of protection if you have not moved the back- extremely dirty rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt ing or in the event of an accident, you could anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- slide underneath the seat belt and sustain fied abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi- injury. fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, Adjust the seat properly before beginning e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten- your journey. Always ensure that the backrest sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or is in an almost vertical position and that the fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an shoulder section of your seat belt is routed increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. across the center of your shoulder. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- G WARNING sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- ing an accident, have the seat belts checked tional suitable restraint system. If the seat Occupant safety 45

immediately at a qualified specialist work- If you have such items located on or in your shop. clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Only use seat belts that have been approved Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a for your vehicle by the sales organization time. named on the inside cover. Any such modifi- Infants and children must never travel sit- cations could invalidate the vehicle's general ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the operating permit. event of an accident, they could be crushed Safety between the vehicle occupant and seat Proper use of the seat belts belt. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if (Y page 44). the seat belt is also being used by one of the All vehicle occupants must be wearing the vehicle's occupants. seat belt correctly before beginning the jour- Seat belts are only intended to secure and ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu- restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe pants are always wearing the seat belt cor- the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, rectly while the vehicle is in motion. luggage or loads (Y page 240). When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Fastening and adjusting seat belts Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the Please take note of the safety notes on seat belt buckle belonging to that seat. belts (Y page 44) and the notes on their cor- Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. rect use (Y page 45). Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdo- Illustration men. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects.

Z 46 Occupant safety

X Adjust the seat (Y page 82). protective function and must be replaced. The seat backrest must be in an almost Visit a qualified specialist workshop. upright position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sash guide = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt Safety across your body.

X Press release button :, hold belt tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards = The shoulder section of the belt must always belt outlet . run over the center of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. Belt warning for drivers and co-drivers X To raise: slide belt guide = upwards. The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- The belt outlet engages in various posi- ment cluster is a reminder for all occupants to tions. fasten their seat belts. It may light up contin- X To lower: press belt guide release ? and uously or flash. A warning tone may also slide belt guide = downwards. sound. X Let go of belt guide release ? in the Regardless of whether the driver has already desired position and make sure that the fastened their seat belt, the 7 seat belt belt guide engages. warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds each time the ignition is switched on. After the All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv- engine is started, it goes out as soon as the er's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat driver's seat belt had been fastened. belt retractor to secure child restraint systems properly. Further information can be If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after found under "Special seat belt retractor" the engine is started, an additional warning (Y page 52). tone will sound. This warning tone switches off after a maximum of 6 seconds or once the Releasing seat belts driver's seat belt is fastened. If a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled exceeded and the driver has still not fastened up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue their seat belt, a warning tone sounds again. will be trapped in the door or in the seat The warning tone sounds for 60 seconds or mechanism. This could damage the door, until the driver has fastened their seat belt. the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their Occupant safety 47

If the driver unfastens their seat belt during Always make sure that there are no objects the journey, the belt warning is automatically between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- activated again. pants. i For more information on the 7 seat RAdjust the seats properly before beginning belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi- your journey. Always make sure that the cator lamps in the instrument cluster" seat is in an almost upright position. The (Y page 227). center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. Safety Air bags RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's Introduction seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The installation point of an air bag can be rec- R ognized by the SRS/AIR BAG or AIR BAG sym- Only hold the steering wheel on the out- bol. side. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. An air bag complements the correctly fas- R tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat Always lean against the backrest while driv- belt. The air bag provides additional protec- ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against tion in applicable accident situations. the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. bags. The different air bag systems function inde- R pendently from one another (Y page 49). Always keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the However, no system available today can com- dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. erwise be in the deployment area of the air It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury bag. caused by an air bag due to the high speed at RFor this reason, always secure persons less which the air bag must be deployed. than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt Important safety notes cannot be worn correctly. G WARNING If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also If you do not sit in the correct seat position, observe the following notes: the air bag cannot protect as intended and RAlways secure children under 12 years of could even cause additional injury when age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in deployed. This poses an increased risk of suitable child restraint systems. injury or even fatal injury. RChild restraint systems should be installed To avoid hazardous situations, always make on the rear seats. sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: RAlways secure a child in a rearward-facing Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, child restraint system on a suitable rear including pregnant women seat. The front-passenger front air bag can- Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great- not be deactivated. est possible distance to the air bags RAlways observe the instructions and safety Rfollow the following instructions notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 51) and on the "Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 55) in addition to the child

Z 48 Occupant safety

restraint system manufacturer's installa- Front air bags tion instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: R

Safety there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. : Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on Driver's air bag deploys in front of the the grab handles or coat hooks. steering wheel. Front-passenger front air ; R bag deploys in front of and above the glove no accessories, such as cup holders, are box and the center console. attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- windows. tional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store Thorax bags such objects in a suitable place. G G WARNING WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer prevent deployment of the air bags integrated function correctly. There is an increased risk into the seats. The air bags may then fail to of injury. protect the vehicle occupants as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects even fatal. to it. Only use seat cushions that are approved for G WARNING your vehicle by the distributor named on the inside cover page. Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist work- Thorax bags : deploy next to the outer seat shop. cushions. Occupant safety 49

Thorax bags are only available in combination Deployment of Emergency Tensioning with individual seats on the driver's and co- Devices and air bags driver's side. Important safety notes When deployed, thorax bag : offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not G WARNING protect the: The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has Rhead been deployed. There is a risk of injury. R neck Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a Safety Rarms deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- The thorax bag is deployed on the side of the cialist workshop as soon as possible. impact. G WARNING Window curtain air bags A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective : Window curtain air bags are integrated function for the vehicle occupants in the into the side of the roof frame above the front event of a crash. doors. G When deployed, the window curtain air bag WARNING enhances the level of protection for the head. Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices However, it does not protect the chest or that have been deployed are no longer opera- arms. tional and are unable to perform their inten- In the event of a side impact, the window cur- ded protective function. This poses an tain air bag is deployed on the side on which increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. the impact occurs. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- If the system determines that they can offer sioning Devices which have been triggered additional protection to that provided by the immediately replaced at a qualified specialist seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be workshop. deployed in other accident situations If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig- (Y page 49). gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it

Z 50 Occupant safety

may cause short-term breathing difficulties in If the restraint system control unit detects a people with asthma or other respiratory prob- more severe accident, further components of lems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the restraint system are activated independ- the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it ently of each other in certain frontal collision is safe to do so. situations: Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- RFront air bags ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate- RWindow curtain air bag on the side of rial, which may require special handling and

Safety impact regard for the environment. National guide- The activation threshold of the Emergency lines must be observed during disposal. In Tensioning Devices and the air bag are deter- California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at vari- index.cfm. ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre- emptive in nature. Deployment should take Method of operation place in good time at the start of the collision. During the first stage of a collision, the The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- restraint system control unit evaluates impor- tion and the direction of the force are essen- tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler- tially determined by: ation or acceleration, such as: Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- Rduration sion Rdirection Rthe collision angle Rintensity Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- Based on the evaluation of this data, the cle restraint system control unit triggers the Rthe characteristics of the object with which Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron- the vehicle has collided tal or rear collision. Factors which can only be seen and measured An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be after a collision has occurred do not play a triggered, if: decisive role in the deployment of an air bag. Rthe ignition is switched on. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. Rthe components of the restraint system are operational; see "Restraint system warning The vehicle can be deformed considerably, lamp" (Y page 42) without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on deformed are affected and the rate of decel- the respective front-passenger seat eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may Vehicles with two seats on the front- be deployed even though the vehicle suffers passenger side: the Emergency Tensioning only minor deformation. This is the case if, for Device on the inner front-passenger seat is example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon- triggered independently of the lock status of gitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient the seat belt. deceleration occurs as a result. Children in the vehicle 51

If the restraint system control unit detects a the child restraint system manufacturer's side impact or that the vehicle is rolling over, installation instructions the relevant restraint system components are G WARNING activated independently of one another depending on the apparent type of accident. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- If the system determines a need for additional cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: protection for the vehicle occupants, the Rrelease the parking brake. Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the Safety RThorax bag on the side of impact, inde- parking position P. pendently of the Emergency Tensioning Rstart the engine. Device and the use of the seat belt In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- RWindow curtain air bag on the side of ment and become trapped. There is a risk of impact, independently of the use of the an accident and injury. seat belt and independently of whether the When leaving the vehicle, always take the front-passenger seat is occupied SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. dent. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. G WARNING How the air bag system works is deter- If persons, particularly children are subjected mined by the severity of the accident detec- to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even acceleration and the apparent type of acci- fatal. Never leave children unattended in the dent: vehicle. R frontal collision G WARNING Rside impact If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- Children in the vehicle dren may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child Important safety notes restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with Accident statistics show that children you, always ensure that the child restraint secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child this reason, we strongly advise that you install restraint system has been exposed to direct a child restraint system on a rear seat. Chil- sunlight, let it cool down before securing the dren are generally better protected there. child in it. Never leave children unattended in If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft the vehicle. (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have system suitable for this vehicle. The child their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- restraint system must be appropriate to the ting properly. Particular attention must be age, weight and size of the child paid to children. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and Observe the safety notes on the seat belt safety notes in this section in addition to (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 45).

Z 52 Children in the vehicle

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve Removing a child restraint system/deactivat- proper seat belt positioning for children over ing the special seat belt retractor: 41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height X Make sure you observe the child restraint where a lap/shoulder belt can be fastened system manufacturer's installation instruc- properly without a booster seat. tions. X Press the belt buckle release button, hold Special seat belt retractor the belt tongue and guide it back towards

Safety the belt outlet. G WARNING The special seat belt retractor is deactiva- If the seat belt is released while driving, the ted. child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a Child restraint system portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- be immediately refastened. There is an tems is required by law in: increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Rall 50 states Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- R tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the U.S. territories the special seat belt retractor and secure the Rthe District of Columbia child restraint system properly. Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv- correct child restraint system from any er's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat authorized Sprinter Dealer. belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt G WARNING cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. If the child restraint system is installed incor- Installing a child restraint system: rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained X Make sure you observe the child restraint in the event of an accident, heavy braking or system manufacturer's installation instruc- sudden changes of direction. There is an tions. increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt Make sure that you observe the child restraint outlet. system manufacturer's installation instruc- X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle. tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, Activating the special seat belt retractor: that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cush- X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under reel retract it again. or behind the child restraint system. Only use While the seat belt is retracting, you should child restraint systems with the original cover hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat designed for them. Only replace damaged belt retractor is enabled. covers with genuine covers. X Push the child restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not G WARNING loosen. If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a Children in the vehicle 53

sudden change in direction. The child Confirmation that the child restraint system restraint system could be thrown about, strik- corresponds to the standards can be found ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased on an instruction label on the child restraint risk of injury, possibly even fatal. system. This confirmation can also be found Always install child restraint systems prop- in the installation instructions that are inclu- erly, even if they are not being used. Make ded with the child restraint system. sure that you observe the child restraint sys- Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- tem manufacturer's installation instructions. rior and on the child restraint system. Safety You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- guidelines" (Y page 240). ing system G WARNING G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing sys- LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems tems which have been damaged or subjected do not offer sufficient protective effect for to a load in an accident can no longer protect children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs as intended. The child cannot then be (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt restrained in the event of an accident, heavy integrated in the child restraint system. In the braking or sudden changes of direction. There event of an accident, a child might not be is an increased risk of injury, possibly even restrained correctly. This poses an increased fatal. risk of injury or even fatal injury. Replace child restraint systems which have If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), been damaged or subjected to a load in an only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- systems with which the child is also secured ing systems on the child restraint system with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the checked at a qualified specialist workshop, child restraint system with the Top Tether before you install a child restraint system belt, if available. again. Always comply with the manufacturer's The securing systems of child restraint sys- installation and operating instructions for the tems are: child restraint system used. Rthe seat belt system Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO- Rthe Top Tether anchorages FIX) securing rings i If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child ! When installing the child restraint system, on the front-passenger seat, be sure to make sure that the seat belt for the middle observe the information on "Child restraint seat does not get trapped. The seat belt systems on the front-passenger seat" could otherwise be damaged. (Y page 55). All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- ards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2

Z 54 Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the Top Tether belt has been incorrectly secured, e.g. to an eyelet in the cargo compartment, the child restraint system is not correctly kept in place. It therefore cannot perform its intended protective function in the

Safety event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Only secure the Top Tether hook to the Top : LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Tether anchorage intended for this purpose. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO- Top Tether anchorages FIX) securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings : for a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system are installed between the seat cushion and the seat backrest: Ron the outer left and right seat on rear bench seats with 3 seats Ron the outer left seat on rear bench seats with 2 seats Example: rear bench seat with 3 seats Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the Top Tether anchorages ; are on the bench vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat legs on the rear side of the respective seat according to the manufacturer's instruc- rear bench seat. tions.

Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this X Move head restraint : upwards. should always be used. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Children in the vehicle 55

X Route Top Tether belt ? under head restraint system must lie as flat as possible restraint : between the two head restraint against the backrest of the front-passenger bars. seat. The child restraint system must not be X Hook Top Tether hook = into Top Tether subjected to a load by the head restraint. anchorage ;. Adjust the head restraint position accord- Make sure that: ingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt R Top Tether hook = is hooked into Top outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child Tether anchorage ; as shown. restraint system. The shoulder belt strap Safety RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted. must be routed forwards and downwards X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, with the child restraint system manufactur- adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front- er's installation instructions when doing so. passenger seat accordingly. X If necessary, move the head restraint back Always observe the child restraint system down again slightly (Y page 86). Make manufacturer's installation and operating sure that you do not interfere with the cor- instructions. rect routing of Top Tether belt ?. Child-proof locks Child restraint system on the co-driv- Important safety notes er's seat G WARNING General notes If children are traveling in the vehicle, they Accident statistics show that children could: secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- Ropen doors, thus endangering other people dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For or road users this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises R that you install the child restraint system on a exit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming rear seat. traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become Rearward-facing child restraint system trapped There is a risk of an accident and injury. The front-passenger front air bag cannot be Always activate the child-proof locks and deactivated. Always install a rearward-facing override feature if children are traveling in the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take Always observe the child restraint system the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never manufacturer's installation and operating leave children unattended in the vehicle. instructions. Child-proof lock/override feature for: Forward-facing child restraint system RSliding door (Y page 56) If it is absolutely necessary to install a RRear door (Y page 56) forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front- passenger seat as far back as possible. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the child

Z 56 Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING Child-proof locks for the sliding door and rear door If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. Safety In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Sliding door

G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- Rear door dren may burn themselves on these parts, : particularly on the metal parts of the child Child safety bolt restraint system. There is a risk of injury. 2 Door secured – then make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint 3 Door released system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- The child-proof lock on the doors enable you tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child to secure each door individually. restraint system has been exposed to direct A door with an activated child-proof lock can- sunlight, let it cool down before securing the not be opened from the inside. If the vehicle is child in it. Never leave children unattended in unlocked, the door can be opened from the the vehicle. outside.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. Driving safety systems 57

As a result, they could: and the road can. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommen- Ractivate vehicle equipment and become ded minimum tire tread depth etc. under trapped, for example "Wheels and tires" (Y page 284). Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby In wintry driving conditions, always use winter endangering other road users tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow Unsecured animals could also be flung around chains. This is the only way to get the full the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- benefit from the driving safety systems den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- described. Safety cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) cle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- Important safety notes port box. Observe the important safety guidelines for the driving safety system (Y page 57). G Driving safety systems WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when Overview braking. The steerability and braking charac- In this section, you will find information about teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- the following driving safety systems: ally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skid- R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ding and accidents. R ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- RBAS (Brake Assist System) diately at a qualified specialist workshop. REBD (Electronic Brake Force Distribution) If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems will R ® ESP (Electronic Stability Program) also fail, including driving safety systems. Observe the information relating to the ! warning lamp (Y page 218). Important safety notes ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you that the wheels do not lock when you brake. are inattentive, the driving safety systems can This allows you to continue steering the vehi- neither reduce the risk of accident nor over- cle when braking. ride the laws of physics. Driving safety sys- ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph tems are merely aids designed to assist driv- (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi- ing. You are responsible for the distance to tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking when you only brake gently. in good time and for staying in your lane. The yellow ! warning lamp in the instru- Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- ment cluster lights up when the ignition is ing road and weather conditions and maintain switched on. The lamp goes out when the a sufficient, safe distance from other road engine starts running. users. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described can only attain their maximum effectiveness when there is optimum contact between the tires

Z 58 Driving safety systems

Braking If ASR intervenes, the d warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsating in the brake pedal. Activating/deactivating ASR The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and func- G WARNING tions as a reminder to take extra care while If deactivated, ASR will not attempt to stabi- driving. lize the vehicle during pulling away and accel- Safety X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the eration. There is an increased risk of skidding brake pedal with force until the braking sit- and of an accident. uation is over. Only deactivate ASR in the situations descri- X To make a full brake application: bed in the following. depress the brake pedal with full force. ! If you deactivate ASR, ESP® will still intervene to stabilize the vehicle. Frequent brak- ASR (acceleration skid control) ing automatically triggered by ESP® can damage the brake system. General notes For this reason, deactivate ASR only briefly Important safety notes and when absolutely necessary. Observe the important safety guidelines for the driving safety system (Y page 57). ASR can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor suspend the laws of physics if the driver does not pay attention when pulling away or accelerating. ASR is only an aid. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if ASR is malfunctioning, the : indicator lamp lights up while the engine is running and When ESP® is intervening and the d warn- the engine power may be reduced ing lamp in the instrument cluster is flashing, Y ( page 218). leave ASR on. In this case, only depress the ASR significantly improves traction, i.e. the accelerator pedal as far as required when transmission of power from the tires to the pulling away. road surface, and thus increases the vehicle's X Press the à button. driving stability. If the driving wheels start to If ASR is deactivated, the d warning spin, ASR brakes individual drive wheels and lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. limits the engine torque. ASR thus significantly assists you when pulling away and ASR is automatically activated when the accelerating, especially on wet or slippery engine is started. roads. It may be best to deactivate ASR briefly in the If traction on the road surface is not sufficient, following situations: even ASR will not allow you to pull away with- Rwhen using snow chains out difficulty. The type of tires and total Rin deep snow weight of the vehicle as well as the gradient of R the road also play a crucial role. on sand or gravel Driving safety systems 59

If you deactivate ASR: You should therefore adapt your driving style Rengine torque is not limited and the drive to the different handling characteristics. Have wheels are able to spin. The spinning the brake system checked at a qualified spe- wheels will then achieve a cutting effect for cialist workshop. better traction. EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- Rtraction control remains active through sure to the rear wheels. This enables EBD to brake intervention. If a drive wheel attains improve handling during braking.

its tire traction limit because one side of the Safety road is slippery, for example, that wheel is Observe the information on warning and indi- Y braked. The traction is then increased in cator lamps ( page 218). this situation. R ® active brake intervention by ESP to ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) increase driving stability remains active. The d warning lamp in the instrument Important safety notes cluster flashes when ESP® is intervening. Observe the important safety guidelines for the driving safety system (Y page 57). BAS (Brake Assist System) G WARNING ® G WARNING If ESP is malfunctioning it will not provide any vehicle stabilization. There is an increased If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance risk of skidding or of an accident. in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. Exercise caution when continuing to drive. ® In an emergency braking situation, depress Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents workshop. the wheels from locking. ! Do not run the vehicle on a roller dyna- Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if mometer (e.g. for performance tests). If the BAS driving safety system is malfunction- you must operate the vehicle on a roller ing, the : warning lamp lights up while the dynamometer, please consult a qualified engine is running (Y page 218). specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the BAS operates in emergency braking situa- brake system. tions. If you depress the brake quickly, BAS automatically increases the brake pressure, If ESP® is malfunctioning, the h warning thereby reducing the stopping distance. lamp lights up while the engine is running and The brakes will function as usual once you the engine power may be reduced release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. (Y page 218). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Crosswind Assist G WARNING Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can deactivated or disabled because of a mal- lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the function. risk of skidding and an accident.

Z 60 Emergency exit

Crosswind Assist does not react: Pay attention to traffic conditions. Rin the event of severe jolts and vibrations, e.g. as a result of uneven surfaces or pot- G WARNING holes If the emergency exit window is unlocked Rif the vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow or while driving, it could open and slam shut and ice or when aquaplaning consequently fall down. There is a risk of an Rto large and sudden steering movements accident and injury.

Safety by the driver Before starting off, make sure that the emer- Crosswind Assist is operational again as soon gency exit window is locked and the locking as the driving conditions return to normal. pins are undamaged. Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswind ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance gusts that can impair the road holding of your when opening the emergency exit window. vehicle when driving straight ahead. Cross- Hold the open window in position. You wind Assist intervenes depending on the could otherwise damage the emergency direction and strength of the crosswind. exit window. A stabilizing brake application helps you to keep the vehicle on track. Information appears in the instrument cluster In the event that Crosswind Assist intervenes noticeably. On vehicles without steering wheel buttons: the d indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. On vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the d indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes and the message Crosswind Assist Active appears in the multifunction The emergency exit window is intended for display. use in an emergency only and must not be Crosswind Assist is active above a vehicle opened unless the vehicle is stationary. The speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when the vehicle emergency exit window is the first window is driving straight ahead or cornering gently. behind the driver's seat on the driver's side. It is marked by the "Emergency Exit" label. X To open: position both handles : verti- Emergency exit cally. This will break locking pins ;. The window is unlocked. Emergency exit window X Swing the window outward by the handles G WARNING and hold it in this position. Make sure there The emergency exit window cannot be locked is sufficient clearance when doing so. in place. You risk injury if you exit the vehicle X To close: close the window. through the emergency exit window. RMake sure that nobody becomes trapped, both when closing and when opening the emergency exit window. RThe opened emergency exit window must be held in place by another person. Theft deterrent locking system 61

X Position both handles : horizontally. Always take the key with you and lock the Make sure that the locks = are inside in vehicle when leaving the vehicle. If you leave front of the window frame. the key in the vehicle, anyone can start the The window is locked. engine. X Replace locking pins ; at the latest before i The immobilizer is always deactivated starting on a new journey. when you start the engine. You can obtain information on this at any In the event that the engine cannot be star- qualified specialist workshop.

ted when the starter battery is fully Safety In an emergency, or after an accident, the charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. vehicle occupants can exit the vehicle Contact an authorized Sprinter dealer or through the emergency exit window. call 1-877-762-8267 (in USA) or Observe the following notes to make sure that 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). the emergency exit window can be used safely in the event of an emergency: ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) RBefore beginning a journey, inform the vehicle occupants of the emergency exit win- X To arm: close all doors. dow and explain how to use it. Make sure to X Lock the vehicle with the key. explicitly point out the risks described here. The indicator lamp in the central locking ROnly vehicle occupants who know how to button (Y page 71) flashes. use the emergency exit window are permit- X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the ted to sit next to it. key. RAccess to the emergency exit window must The indicator lamp in the central locking remain unobstructed. Do not place any button (Y page 71) goes out. large or heavy objects on or in front of the i Cargo Van and Passenger Van only: seats next to the emergency exit window. Unless you open a door within 40 seconds R The window handles must not be used as after unlocking the vehicle: hooks, e.g. to hang up light objects, bags or R items of clothing. the vehicle will be locked again R RWhen exiting the vehicle through the emer- the anti-theft alarm system will be armed gency exit window, pay attention to the again vehicle height and the local conditions. Par- If the alarm system is armed, a visual and ticularly children and smaller adults may audible alarm is triggered by the following: require assistance when exiting the vehi- RUnlocking the vehicle from inside cle. ROpening a door ROpening the hood Theft deterrent locking system i The alarm is not switched off, even if you Immobilizer immediately close the open door that has triggered it, for example. X To activate: remove the key from the igni- X To stop the alarm: press the % button tion lock. on the remote control. X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2 in or the ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from The alarm stops. being started without the correct key.

Z 62 Theft deterrent locking system

Tow-away alarm Interior motion sensor Operation Operation A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the If the armed interior motion sensor detects inclination of the vehicle changes when the motion in the vehicle interior, a visual and tow-away alarm is armed. This can be the acoustic alarm is triggered. This can happen if case if the vehicle is raised on one side, for someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. example. Safety

Arming/disarming Switching on The tow-away alarm is automatically armed X Close the side windows. approximately 20 seconds after you lock the X Make sure that nothing (such as mascots or vehicle. coat hangers) are hanging on the rear-view The tow-away alarm is automatically deacti- mirror or on the grab handles on the head- vated when you unlock the vehicle. liner. This will prevent false alarms. Disarming X Lock the vehicle. The interior motion sensor is armed after approximately 40 seconds.

Switching off X Unlock vehicle. The interior motion sensor automatically switches off.

Deactivating

X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button :. When the button is released, indicator lamp ; in the button lights up for about 5 seconds. X Lock the vehicle. The tow-away alarm is disarmed. The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again. Disarm the tow-away alarm when locking X Remove the key from the ignition lock. your vehicle and: X Press button :. Rloading and/or transporting the vehicle, on When the button is released, indicator a ferry or car transporter, for example lamp ; of the button lights up for about Rparking on a moving surface, as split-level 5 seconds. garage X Lock the vehicle. This will prevent false alarms. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. Theft deterrent locking system 63

The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until you lock the vehicle again. Deactivate the interior motion sensor when locking your vehicle: Rwith people or animals remaining inside Rwith the side windows remaining open Rwhen transporting it on a ferry or car trans-

porter, for example Safety This will prevent false alarms.

Z 64 65

Useful information ...... 66 Key ...... 66 Central locking ...... 71 Driver's door and co-driver's door ..... 72 Sliding door ...... 72 Electrical step ...... 73 Rear doors ...... 75 Partition sliding door ...... 77 Side windows ...... 78 Opening and closing 66 Key

Useful information tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a This Operator's Manual describes all models risk of an accident. as well as standard and optional equipment of Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the your vehicle that were available at the time of SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before going to print. Country-specific variations are inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the described functions. Do not keep the key with remote control: This also applies to systems and functions Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile relevant to safety. phone or another key with remote control Read the information on qualified specialist Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal Y workshops ( page 25). foil Rin metallic objects, e.g. metal cases Key This can affect the key's functionality. Important safety notes Key functions of the remote control Opening and closing G WARNING Activate the child-proof door locks if children General notes are traveling in the vehicle. The children could The vehicle is equipped with either 2 or otherwise open the doors while the vehicle is 4 remote controls with a folding key, or 4 in motion, injuring themselves and others. mechanical keys. In this Operator's Manual, both the mechanical keys and the keys with G WARNING remote control are referred to as keys. The Do not leave children unsupervised in the remote control key has a range of up to 32 ft vehicle, even if they are secured in a child (10 m). Use the remote control of the key only restraint system. Children could otherwise when in immediate proximity of the vehicle. injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. This prevents theft. They could be severely or even fatally injured Remote controls that are not included in the by prolonged exposure to intense heat or scope of delivery for the vehicle must be pro- cold. grammed before use. Further information can If children open a door, they could: be obtained at any authorized Sprinter Rinjure other people Dealer. Rget out of the vehicle and thereby injure The key's remote control locks/unlocks the themselves or be injured by a passing vehi- driver's door and/or the following centrally if cle the factory settings have not been changed: Rseverely injure themselves by falling down, Rthe driver's and the co-driver's door in particular due to the vehicle height Rthe sliding doors Always take the key with you when leaving the Rthe rear doors vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short i time. If the driver's or co-driver's door is not closed, the corresponding door is not G WARNING locked. If a sliding door or a rear door is not closed properly, none of the rear doors are If you attach heavy or large objects to the locked. SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- Key 67

If there is a key is in the ignition lock, the If you do not open a Cargo Van or remote control is inoperative. When locking Passenger Van within approximately or unlocking the vehicle with the remote con- 40 seconds of unlocking: trol, always pay attention to the indicator Rthe vehicle is locked again. lamp signaling. Also check the locking knobs Rthe theft deterrent locking system is of the doors. armed again. Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the X To lock centrally: press the & button. remote control The indicator lamps flash three times when the theft deterrent locking system has been armed and all doors have been closed. X Check the locking knobs on all the doors. The locking knobs must all be in the lowered position.

Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the mechanical key or the folding key

The anti-theft alarm system (ATA) is triggered Opening and closing if you unlock and open the driver's door or the rear door with the mechanical key or the fold- Remote control with an integrated folding key ing key. : 5 To unlock the sliding doors and the rear door The alarm can be disabled in the following two ways: ; % To unlock the driver's door only or unlock the vehicle centrally X Press the % or & button on the = & To lock the vehicle centrally remote control. ? Key release button Or A Battery check lamp X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X To unlock the driver's door: press the % button. The turn signals flash once. The theft deterrent locking system is deactivated. X To unlock the sliding doors and the rear door: press the 5 button. The turn signals flash once. X To unlock centrally: unlock the driver's door. X Press the % button again within 2 seconds. The turn signals flash once. i If the surround lighting has been switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 193), it goes on when the vehicle is unlocked.

Z 68 Key

Remote control battery Important safety notes

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention Driver's door immediately.

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They Opening and closing must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly Rear door manner. Take discharged 1 Locked batteries to a qualified spe- 2 Unlocked cialist workshop or a special X To unlock the driver's or rear door: press collection point for used bat- the key release button on the remote con- teries. trol. The key folds out. The key batteries contain perchlorate mate- X Insert the key fully into the door lock and rial, which may require special handling and turn it to position 2. regard for the environment. Check with your The door is unlocked. local government’s disposal guidelines. Cali- www.dtsc.ca.gov/ X fornia residents, see To lock the vehicle: lock all doors except HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ the driver's door and, if necessary the rear index.cfm. door, from inside. To do this, press down the door locking buttons. We recommend that you have batteries changed at a qualified specialist workshop. X Press the key release button on the remote control. Checking the batteries The key folds out. X Insert the key fully into the driver's door X Press the % or & button for longer lock and turn it to position 1. than two seconds. The driver's door is locked. If battery indicator lamp (Y page 66) lights up briefly, the batteries in the remote con- Key 69

trol still have sufficient charge. Otherwise, X Align battery compartment cover : and change the batteries immediately. push it on until it audibly engages. i If the remote control is checked within the X Check the function of all the remote control signal reception range of the vehicle, press- buttons on the vehicle. ing the & or % button: Rlock or Runlock the vehicle

Changing batteries You need a CR 2025 2 3 V cell battery, which can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. When changing the batteries, do not press any of the buttons on the remote control. Opening and closing

X Press release button ;. The key folds out. X Remove battery compartment cover : in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove the batteries from the battery tray. X Insert the new batteries into the battery tray with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

Z 70 Key

Problems with the key/remote control

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions It is no longer possible The doors are not closed properly. to lock the vehicle X Close the doors properly and lock the vehicle again. using the remote control. The central locking system has malfunctioned. The turn signals do not X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 66). flash when the vehicle X Have the central locking system checked as soon as possible at is locked. a qualified specialist workshop.

It is no longer possible The key battery is weak or discharged. to lock or unlock the X Point the remote control at the driver's door handle from very vehicle using the close range and press the % or & button. remote control. If this does not work: X Replace the key battery (Y page 69). Opening and closing or X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 66).

The remote control is faulty. X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 66). X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The key cannot be The steering lock has jammed mechanically. turned in the ignition X Remove the key and insert it again into the ignition lock. Turn the lock. steering wheel from side to side while doing so.

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low. started using the key. X Switch off all non-essential consumers, such as interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 263). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 276). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced. Central locking 71

Central locking Locking and unlocking manually Important safety notes G WARNING Activate the child-proof door locks if children are traveling in the vehicle. The children could otherwise open the doors while the vehicle is in motion, injuring themselves and others.

G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. Children could otherwise Central locking buttons injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. Use the central locking buttons to centrally They could be severely or even fatally injured lock/unlock either the entire vehicle or just by prolonged exposure to intense heat or the sliding doors and rear doors from the cold. inside. If children open a door, they could: X To lock/unlock the entire vehicle: press Opening and closing Rinjure other people the upper Ã central locking button when the doors are closed. Rget out of the vehicle and thereby injure When the entire vehicle is locked, the indi- themselves or be injured by a passing vehi- cator lamp in the Ã central locking but- cle ton lights up. Rseverely injure themselves by falling down, i If the key has been removed or is in posi- in particular due to the vehicle height tion 0 in the ignition lock, the indicator Always take the key with you when leaving the lamp in the Ã central locking button vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short remains lit for 5 seconds. time. X To lock/unlock the sliding doors and You can open a locked front door from the rear doors: press the lower section of the inside at any time. You can open a locked Ä central locking button when the sliding door or rear door from the inside if it doors are closed. has been previously unlocked from inside. When the sliding doors and rear doors are locked, the indicator lamp in the upper Ã central locking button lights up.

Automatic locking General notes The vehicle locks automatically as standard once a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) has been reached. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the doors may be locked automatically once the ignition is switched on. Information on the functions of the automatic locking

Z 72 Sliding door

mechanism of your vehicle can be obtained Driver's door and co-driver's door from any authorized Sprinter Dealer. If the automatic locking when driving function ! Only open the doors when road and traffic is activated, there is a risk of being locked out conditions permit. Make sure that there is when the vehicle is pushed or towed. sufficient clearance when opening the For this reason, deactivate the automatic doors. Otherwise, you could damage your locking when driving function: vehicle or other vehicles. Rbefore pushing the vehicle Rbefore towing the vehicle If activated, automatic locking is deactivated when the vehicle is unlocked or locked using the central locking button. Automatic locking is reactivated after the ignition is switched off or a door is opened with the vehicle stationary.

Opening and closing Activating automatic locking when driving You can open the driver's or co-driver's door X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition from the inside at any time, even if it is locked. lock when the doors are closed. X Pull door handle :. X For the entire vehicle: press the upper Locking knob ; pops up. Ã central locking button until the indi- The door opens. cator lamp in the button flashes four times. X For the sliding doors and rear doors only: press the Ä lower central locking Sliding door button until the indicator lamp in the Ã Important safety notes upper button flashes four times. G WARNING Deactivating automatic locking when If the open sliding door is not engaged, it could driving move on its own if the vehicle is on a slope. This could trap you or other persons. There is X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition a risk of injury. lock when the doors are closed. Always make sure that the open sliding door is X For the entire vehicle: press the Ã engaged. upper central locking button until the indicator lamp in the button flashes twice. ! Only open the doors when road and traffic X For the sliding doors and rear doors conditions permit. Make sure that there is only: press the Ä lower central locking sufficient clearance when opening the button until the indicator lamp in the Ã doors. Otherwise, you could damage your upper button flashes twice. vehicle or other vehicles. The sliding door of your vehicle can be equipped with an electrical access step. Observe the notes on the electrical step when opening and closing the sliding door (Y page 73). Electrical step 73

Opening/closing from the outside The sliding door is equipped with an active retainer, which engages the door at the end stop when opened. You can only open a sliding door from the inside if the child-proof locks have not been activated. i You can also lock the sliding door in place around halfway when opening/closing. The door does not have to be opened fully when getting into or out of the vehicle. The inter- mediate detent does not fully engage the sliding door. The sliding door is equipped with an active X To unlock: pull locking knob = upwards. retainer, which engages the door at the end Only this sliding door unlocks. The other stop when opened. doors remain locked. i You can also lock the sliding door in place X To open: press button :. around halfway when opening/closing. The X

Slide the sliding door by handle ; back to Opening and closing door does not have to be opened fully when the stop. getting into or out of the vehicle. The inter- X Check the sliding door detent. mediate detent does not fully engage the The sliding door must be engaged. sliding door. X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for- X To open: : pull door handle . wards by handle ; until it engages. The sliding door opens. X To lock: press locking knob = down. X Push back the sliding door using door han- Only the sliding door is locked. All other : dle until it engages. doors that were previously unlocked X Check the sliding door detent. remain unlocked. X To close: slide the sliding door firmly forwards by handle : until it closes. Electrical closing assist

Opening/closing from the inside If your vehicle is equipped with electrical closing assist, you will require less force to close the sliding door.

Electrical step Important safety notes If you do not use the grab handle and the step, you could injure yourself when getting in and out of the vehicle.

Interior door handle on the sliding door

Z 74 Electrical step

In order to reduce risks: ing equipment can be moved nearer to the Rdraw the passengers' attention to the elec- cargo compartment. trical step. Wait until the electrical step is Vehicles without steering-wheel buttons: fully extended. if the 1 indicator lamp in the instrument Rdo not jump out of the vehicle. cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds, Ronly use the grab handle and step. Only electrical step : is malfunctioning Y they are designed for such a load. ( page 227). Rkeep grab handles, access steps and entry Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: if sills free from dirt, e.g. mud, clay, snow and the Electrical Step message is shown in ice. the display and a warning tone sounds, electrical step : is malfunctioning (Y page 216). If electrical step : is malfunctioning, the Operation and obstacle detection step may only partially extend/retract or may not extend/retract at all. If a malfunction does occur, you will have to retract and lock electrical step : manually before continuing the journey (Y page 74). Opening and closing Before passengers get out of the vehicle, let them know that electrical step : might not be extended.

Emergency release ! Driving with the step extended may result Electrical step in it being damaged. The sliding door of your vehicle can be equip- If the electrical step does not retract auto- ped with an electrical step. matically, you will have to push it in and X When getting in and out of the vehicle, use lock it into place manually before continu- the grab handles and electrical step :. ing your journey. Electrical step : automatically extends when the sliding door is opened and retracts when it is closed. Electrical step : is equipped with an obstruction detection device on the front side. If the step comes into contact with an obstacle while it is extending, it stops. After you have removed the obstacle, you must first close the sliding door and open it once again so that the step can extend completely. X Pull R-clips ; on both rods : on the i If the electrical step obstructs loading, underside of the step out of their respective you can prevent the step from extending pins. when opening the sliding door via obstacle X Remove washers = and detach both detection. The electrical step can then rods :. remain retracted and a forklift or other lift- Rear doors 75

G WARNING If you open the rear doors to 90° (detent position), the rear lamps are no longer visible. The vehicle is no longer sufficiently visible from the rear and will only be recognized as an obstacle at a late stage by other road users. This could lead to an accident. Therefore, in such a situation, ensure that the vehicle is visible from the rear according to the respective national regulations, e.g. with a X Fold rods : into the housing in the step. warning triangle. X Push the step into its housing. ! Make sure that there is sufficient clearance when opening the rear doors. You could otherwise damage the vehicle and objects in close range of the rear doors. You can lock the rear doors at an angle of 90°, 180° and 270°. Always make sure that the Opening and closing open rear door is correctly engaged in the detent.

Opening/closing from the outside i When securing the step for the first time, Opening the right-hand rear door you must pierce a film with the R-clips. X Insert R-clips ; into the step as far as they will go through the holes on both sides of the housing. The step is secured in its housing.

Rear doors Important safety notes G WARNING X Pull handle :. If you open a rear door, you could: X Swing the rear door to the side until it Rendanger other people or road users engages. Rbe caught by oncoming traffic This is particularly the case if you open the rear door more than 90°. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only open the rear doors when traffic conditions permit. Always make sure that the rear doors are properly locked.

Z 76 Rear doors

Opening the left-hand rear door

Magnetic door retainer X With the rear door opened to an angle of X Make sure that the right-hand rear door is 270°, push it against magnetic door open and engaged. retainer ; on the side wall. X : Pull release handle in the direction of When the magnet on the rear door is in the arrow. contact with magnetic door retainer ;, the X Swing the rear door to the side until it rear door is held in this position. Opening and closing engages. i Vehicles with 270° pivoting rear doors: If door retainer : malfunctions while load- Opening the rear doors to an angle of ing, you can swivel it 180° against the 180° or 270° spring force and onto the door and engage it. The door retainer remains in this position and will not swivel back to its original position. Before closing the door, release door retainer : from the detent and return it to its original position.

Closing the rear doors from the outside X Pull the rear door away from magnetic door retainer. Door retainer (example: right rear door) X Close the left-hand rear door firmly from X Open the rear door to about 45°. the outside. X X Pull and hold door retainer : in the direc- Close the right-hand rear door firmly from tion of the arrow. the outside. X Open the rear door more than 90°, so that the door retainer cannot engage. X Release the door retainer and open the door to an angle of 180° or 270°. Partition sliding door 77

Opening/closing from the inside the vehicle is in motion. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Close the partition sliding door before every journey and make sure that it is engaged.

Opening/closing the partition sliding door from the cab

Release the lever on the inside of the right rear door. A white section on latch ; indicates that the rear door is unlocked. i You can only open the locked rear doors from the inside if the child-proof locks have Opening and closing not been activated. X To unlock: slide latch ; to the left. X You will see a white marking. To open: turn the key counter-clockwise =. Only the rear door unlocks. All other doors that were previously locked remain locked. The sliding door is unlocked. X X To open: pull opening lever : and open Slide the sliding door to the stop in the direction of arrow ;. the unlocked rear door. X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc- X Swing the rear door to the side until it : engages. tion of arrow until it engages. The sliding door can be locked using the X To close: make sure that the left-hand rear key. door is closed. X Pull the rear door firmly by the door handle to close it. Opening/closing the partition sliding X To lock: slide latch ; to the right. door from the cargo compartment The white section is no longer visible. Only the rear door is locked. All other doors that were previously unlocked remain unlocked.

Partition sliding door Important safety notes G WARNING If the open partition sliding door is not engaged, it could move automatically while

Z 78 Side windows

X To unlock: press the catch in the direction injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. of arrow =. They could be severely or even fatally injured The sliding door is unlocked. by prolonged exposure to intense heat or X Slide the sliding door to the stop in the cold. direction of arrow :. If children open a door, they could: X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc- Rinjure other people tion of arrow ; until it engages. Rget out of the vehicle and thereby injure themselves or be injured by a passing vehicle Side windows Rseverely injure themselves by falling down, Important safety notes in particular due to the vehicle height Always take the key with you when leaving the G WARNING vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short While opening the side windows, body parts time. could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Opening and closing Opening/closing the side window Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again.

G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press Control panel (example: driver's door) the switch to open the side window again. : Power window, left ; Power window, right G WARNING X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition If children operate the side windows they lock. could become trapped, particularly if they are X left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Press or pull button : or ; until the corresponding side window has reached the Activate the override feature for the rear side desired position. windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi- If you press the switch beyond the pressure cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the point and then release it, the window opens vehicle. automatically. To stop the movement, press or pull the switch again. G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. Children could otherwise Side windows 79

Resetting the side windows You must reset the side windows if there has been a malfunction or an interruption in the voltage supply. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the two power window switches and hold for approximately 1 second after closing the side window.

Problems with the side windows If you cannot completely open or close a side window: If there are no objects or leaves in the window guide that prevent the sliding sunroof from Opening and closing closing, there has been a malfunction or the on-board voltage has been interrupted. X Reset the side window (Y page 79).

Z 80 81

Useful information ...... 82 Seats ...... 82 Steering wheel ...... 88 Mirrors ...... 89 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 82 Seats

Useful information G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level This Operator's Manual describes all models of protection if you have not moved the back- as well as standard and optional equipment of rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- your vehicle that were available at the time of ing or in the event of an accident, you could going to print. Country-specific variations are slide underneath the seat belt and sustain possible. Note that your vehicle may not be abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This equipped with all of the described functions. poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal This also applies to systems and functions injury. relevant to safety. Adjust the seat properly before beginning Read the information on qualified specialist your journey. Always ensure that the backrest workshops (Y page 25). is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. Seats G Important safety notes WARNING If head restraints are not installed and adjus- G WARNING ted correctly, they cannot provide protection You could lose control of your vehicle if you do as intended. There is an increased risk of the following while driving: injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every Rfasten the seat belt vehicle occupant that the center of the head There is a risk of an accident. restraint supports the back of the head at Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- about eye level. ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt Seats, steering wheel and mirrors before starting the engine. Your seat must be adjusted in such a way that you can wear the seat belt correctly. G WARNING Observe the following points: If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could RPosition the backrest in an almost vertical move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in position so that you are sitting virtually motion. This could cause you to lose control of upright. Do not drive with the backrest the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. reclined too far back. Always make sure that the driver's seat is RYour arms should be slightly bent when you engaged before starting the engine. are holding the steering wheel. R G WARNING Avoid seat positions that prevent the seat belt from being routed correctly. The shoul- When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle der section of the belt must be routed over occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the the middle of your shoulder and be pulled seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. tight against your upper body. The lap belt Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one must always pass across your lap as low has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints. Seats 83

RAdjust the head restraint so that it supports You can find information on rotating the the back of the head at eye level. front seats under "Swiveling front seats" RThe distance from the pedals should be (Y page 84). such that you can depress them fully. X To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: Observe also the safety notes in the section pull lever : up. on "Air bags" (Y page 47)and "Children in the X Slide the seat forwards or back. Y vehicle" ( page 51). X Release lever :. If you swap over the head restraints for the X Slide the seat forwards or back until you front and rear seats, you will not be able to hear it engage. adjust the height and angle of the head X To adjust the backrest: turn handwheel restraints to the correct position. = towards the front. Use the head restraint pad to adjust the head The seat backrest moves to a vertical posi- restraint so that it is as close as possible to tion. the back of your head. X Turn handwheel = towards the rear. d mirrors Before the journey, make sure the head The seat backrest tilts towards the rear. restraints have been correctly set for each of X To adjust the seat height: the vehicle's passengers (Y page 86). press or pull lever ? repeatedly until you have reached the desired seat height. wheel an Driver's and co-driver's seat X To adjust the seat angle: turn handwheel A towards the front. The front of the seat cushion is lowered. X Turn handwheel A towards the rear. The front of the seat cushion is raised. i The lumbar support allows you to use the backrest to increase the support provided

to the lumbar spine. Seats, steering When the lumbar support is correctly adjusted, it reduces strain on your back while driving. X To adjust the lumbar support: turn handwheel ; upwards. This increases the support provided to the lumbar region. X Turn handwheel ; downwards. : Seat fore-and-aft adjustment This reduces the support provided to the lumbar region. ; Lumbar support adjustment = Seat backrest adjustment ? Seat height adjustment A Seat cushion angle adjustment B Seat suspension adjustment C Seat suspension lock i Depending on the seat model, some adjustments may not be available.

Z 84 Seats

The seat suspension must be adapted to your body weight. Adjust the seat suspension only while the seat is unoccupied. X To adjust the seat suspension: take your weight off the seat. X Using handwheel B, set your body weight (40 to 120 kg) for optimum seat suspension. The seat suspension will become more rigid the higher you set the weight. It will then not move as far. Seat release (example: co-driver's seat) If the seat moves up and down frequently and The driver's seat and co-driver's seat can be to a great extent, you can lock the seat in the rotated by 50° and 180°. lower range. The seats engage when facing in the direction X To engage the seat suspension lock: of travel as well as when facing in the opposite turn lever C upwards. direction and also engage at an angle of 50° When it next moves, the seat will lock in to the door. position. X Make sure that the parking brake has been X To release the seat suspension lock: engaged and that the handbrake lever has turn lever C to the right. been pushed down to the stop The seat can now move up and down again. (Y page 150). X Adjust the steering wheel to provide the necessary space to rotate and adjust the Swiveling front seats driver's seat (Y page 88). X G WARNING Before rotating, push the co-driver's seat Y Seats, steering wheel and mirrors forwards ( page 83). If the driver's and co-driver's seats are not X 2 To rotate the seat: push lever : on the engaged facing the direction of travel while rear of the seat towards the center of the driving, the restraint systems may not be able vehicle and rotate the seat slightly inwards. to provide the intended protection. There is an The rotation device is released. increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. X Release lever :. Engage the driver's and co-driver's seats so X they are facing the direction of travel before Turn the seat about 50° towards the out- starting the engine. side or inside to the desired position.

! When rotating the seats, make sure that there is sufficient space to do so. Move the seat forward or back first. This will help to avoid contact with other parts of the interior. Push the handbrake lever down to the stop. The parking brake or handbrake lever could otherwise be damaged. Seats 85

Twin co-driver's seat

Folding seat (example with partition sliding door) X Remove key : from the partition sliding X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the door. : seat cushion out of front anchorage . X

; d mirrors X Pull grip of the catch in the direction of Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly and the arrow and fold seat cushion = up or ; out of rear anchorage . down. X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up. X Release grip ; of seat cushion = in the i You can stow various articles in the space corresponding end position. wheel an under the twin co-driver's seat. X Move the seat cushion = until it engages. X To fold the seat cushion back: fold down Grip ; of the catch must lie completely on the seat cushion by the rear edge. the seat frame. X Slide the seat cushion under the seat backrest into rear anchorage ;. X Push down on the seat cushion at the front Rear bench seat (Passenger Van) : until it engages in front anchorage . G WARNING Seats, steering If the rear bench seat is not installed as descri- Folding seat bed or an unsuitable rear bench seat is installed, the seat belts may not provide protection G WARNING as intended. There is an increased risk of If the key is inserted in the partition sliding injury. door, it may come into contact with the per- Install the rear bench seat as described. Only son on the folding seat. There is a risk of use rear bench seats that are approved for injury. your vehicle by the distributor named on the Always remove the key from the partition slid- inside cover page. ing door before a person sits on the folding ! For safety reasons, the four-seat rear seat. bench must only be removed or installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Keep the seat bench mounting recesses in the vehicle floor free from dirt and foreign objects.

Z 86 Seats

X Slide the bench seat forwards until you hear the locking mechanisms engage. X Check levers : on the anchorages of the bench seat. All levers : must be flush to the vehicle floor.

Head restraints G WARNING Locking mechanism lever on the feet of the bench If head restraints are not installed and adjus- seat ted correctly, they cannot provide protection X To remove the rear bench seat: swing all as intended. There is an increased risk of levers : of the bench seat completely injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the upwards. event of an accident or when braking. The bench seat moves back into the seat Always drive with the head restraints instal- mounting recesses on the vehicle floor. led. Before driving off, make sure for every X Lift the bench seat upwards out of the seat vehicle occupant that the center of the head mounting recesses. restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not change over the head restraints for the front and rear seats. Otherwise, it will not be possible to correctly adjust the height and angle of the head restraints. Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close Seats, steering wheel and mirrors as possible to your head.

i Do not exceed the maximum permissible number of seats for models registered as passenger vehicles. X To install the rear bench seat: observe the prescribed installation position of the bench seat. Install the two-seat bench seat only on the driver's side. Head restraint (example: luxury head restraint on X Check mounting shells ; on the vehicle the co-driver's seat) floor. : Release button X Position the bench seat in the direction of ; Head restraint height travel in corresponding mounting shells ;. = Head restraint angle (luxury head restraints only) Seats 87

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the Seat heating desired position. G WARNING X To lower: press release button : and slide the head restraint down to the desired posi- Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can tion. cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with X To adjust the angle: hold the front part of limited temperature sensitivity or a limited the luxury head restraint by the lower edge ability to react to excessively high tempera- and tilt it to the desired position. tures may be affected or they may even suffer X To remove: pull the head restraint up to burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. the stop. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on X Press release button : and pull out the repeatedly. head restraint. ! X To insert: insert the head restraint so that When you leave your seat, do not place anything on the seat and switch off the seat the rod with the detents is on the left when d mirrors viewed in the direction of travel. heating. Do not switch the seat heating on when the seat is not occupied, e.g. when X Press and hold release button :. driving without a co-driver. The seat heat- X Push the head restraint down until it ing may otherwise overheat, causing dam-

engages. age to the seat. wheel an

Armrests Seats, steering

The three red indicator lamps in the c button show the activated heating level 1 to 3. X To set the armrest angle: fold the armrest The system automatically switches down upwards by more than 45° ;. from level 3 to level 2 after approximately The armrest is released. five minutes. X Fold armrest = forwards to the stop. The system automatically switches down X Slowly fold the armrest upwards to the from level 2 to level 1 after approximately desired position. ten minutes. X To fold the armrest up: if necessary, fold At level 1, the seat heating remains in con- the armrest upwards : by more than 90°. tinuous operation.

Z 88 Steering wheel

X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 When leaving the vehicle, always take the in the ignition lock. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X To switch on: press the c button leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. repeatedly until the desired heating level has been set. The steering wheel can still be adjusted if the key has been removed. X To switch off: press the c button repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out. If the indicator lamps of the current heating level in the c button flash, the seat heating has switched off automatically. In this case, too many electrical consumers are switched on or the battery charge is not sufficient. The seat heating will automatically switch back to the current heating level when enough on-board voltage is available again.

Steering wheel

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: : Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, ; Steering column height steering wheel or mirrors = Lever Rfasten the seat belt X To set the steering wheel: swing lever =

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors There is a risk of an accident. down until it engages. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- The steering wheel is unlocked. ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt X Move the steering wheel to the desired before starting the engine. position. X Pull lever = up to the stop. G WARNING The steering wheel is locked again. If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. Mirrors 89

Mirrors Adjusting electrically Rear-view mirror

Adjustment buttons and switches for setting the mirrors X Anti-glare mode: push anti-glare lever : X Before pulling away, turn the key to position in the direction of the arrow. 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 138). X Press switch ; to position 1 for the left- hand exterior mirror or to position 2 for the Exterior mirrors right-hand exterior mirror. Important safety notes X Press adjustment button : at the top, bottom, right or left. G WARNING Adjust the exterior mirrors in such a way The additional mirrors in the exterior mirrors that you can get a good overview of road reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in and traffic conditions. the mirrors are closer than they appear. You i could misjudge the distance from road users The exterior mirrors are automatically

driving behind you when changing lanes, for heated at low outside temperatures. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you, e.g.: Rby looking over your shoulder Rby looking in the main mirror in the exterior mirror.

Adjusting manually X Before starting off, manually adjust the exterior mirrors in such a way that you can get a good overview of road and traffic conditions.

Z 90 91

Useful information ...... 92 Exterior lighting ...... 92 Interior lighting ...... 97 Changing bulbs ...... 99 Windshield wipers ...... 107 Lights and windshield wipers 92 Exterior lighting

Useful information Light switch Operation This Operator's Manual describes all models as well as standard and optional equipment of your vehicle that were available at the time of going to print. Country-specific variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the described functions. This also applies to systems and functions relevant to safety. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 25).

Exterior lighting 1 Ã Automatic headlamp mode/ daytime running lamps Important safety notes 2 $ Lights off For reasons of safety, we recommend that 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and you drive with the lights switched on even instrument lighting during the daytime. There may be differences 4 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps in operation due to legal requirements and 5 N Fog lamps voluntary recommendations in some coun- 6 R Rear fog lamp tries. If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. Bulb failure indicator X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã. The bulb failure indicator is only an aid. You or Lights and windshield wipers are responsible for the proper functioning of X If the rear fog lamp is switched on: press the vehicle lighting. Insufficient or non-func- the light switch in to the stop. tioning vehicle lighting puts the operating The turn signals, high-beam headlamps and safety of the vehicle at risk. the high-beam flasher are operated using the For this reason, check the condition and func- combination switch (Y page 94). tion of your vehicle's lighting system and, if necessary, that of the trailer before each jour- Low-beam headlamps ney. X To switch on: 2 The bulb failure indicator monitors all of the turn the key to position in exterior lighting lamps, except the perimeter the ignition lock or start the engine. lamp and the trailer lighting. If a bulb fails, X Turn the light switch to position L. either the b(Y page 35) indicator lamp The L indicator lamp in the instrument lights up, or you will see a corresponding cluster lights up. message in the display (Y page 208). Daytime running lamps i Depending on the equipment, the bulb failure indicator can fail for all lamps with You can activate/deactivate the daytime run- the exception of the turn signal lamps. ning lamps function using the on-board computer. Exterior lighting 93

This is not possible in countries where day- lamps, low-beam headlamps and the license time running lamps are a legal requirement. plate lamp. This excludes weather-related The daytime running lamps function must be impairments to visibility, such as snow, fog or activated using the on-board computer: spray. If there is fog, snow or spray, turn the light Rvehicles with steering wheel buttons switch quickly from Ã to L. You could (Y page 192) otherwise briefly interrupt operation of the R vehicles without steering wheel buttons headlamps. (Y page 183) X To switch on automatic headlamp X To switch on: turn the light switch to the mode: turn the light switch to Ã. $ position. Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the The low-beam headlamps, parking lamps parking lamps switch on or off automati- and license plate lamp are switched on cally depending on the ambient light. when the engine is running. The L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights When the engine is running: if you activate up. the "daytime running lamps" function using the on-board computer, the daytime run- i USA only: ning lamps are switched on. The parking If you turn the light switch to the T or lamps and low-beam headlamps also L position, the parking lamps or low- switch on or off automatically, depending beam headlamps switch on. If you turn the on the ambient light. light switch to the Ã position, the day- When the low-beam headlamps are time running lamps remain switched on. switched on, the L indicator lamp in the i Canada only: instrument cluster lights up. If you turn the light switch to the L position, the low-beam headlamps are Fog lamps/rear fog lamp switched on. If you turn the light switch to G WARNING the T or Ã position, the daytime Lights and windshield wipers running lamps remain switched on. If you suspect that driving conditions will be foggy, turn the light switch to L before you Automatic headlamp mode start your journey. Your vehicle may otherwise not be visible and you could endanger G WARNING yourself and others. When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- beam headlamps may not be switched on G WARNING automatically if there is fog, snow or other In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, causes of poor visibility due to the weather only switch from position Ã to L with conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. accident. Switching from Ã to L will briefly In such situations, turn the light switch to switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driv- L. ing in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. Automatic headlamp mode is only a driving aid. You are responsible for the vehicle light- X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the ing at all times. ignition lock or start the engine. Depending on ambient light, the rain and light X Turn the light switch to L or T. sensor automatically switches on the parking

Z 94 Exterior lighting

i If your vehicle is only equipped with one X To indicate: press the combination switch rear fog lamp, you must turn the light in desired direction : or ; until it switch to L. engages. The combination switch automatically i When the light switch is set to Ã, you returns to its original position after large cannot switch on the front or rear fog steering movements. lamps. X To indicate briefly: press the combination X To switch on the front fog lamps: pull the switch briefly in desired direction : or ;. light switch out to the first locking point. The corresponding turn signal flashes three The green N indicator lamp on the light times. switch lights up. X To switch on the rear fog lamp: pull the High-beam headlamps and high-beam light switch out to the second locking point. flasher The yellow R indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. X To switch off the front fog lamps/rear fog lamp: push in the light switch to the stop. The R and N indicator lamp on the light switch go out.

Combination switch Turn signal lamps : High-beam headlamps ; High-beam flasher

Lights and windshield wipers X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: switch on the low-beam headlamps (Y page 92). X Press combination switch : forwards. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. i In the Ã position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. : To indicate a right turn X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: ; To indicate a left turn move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To switch on the high-beam flasher: turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow ;. Exterior lighting 95

Cornering lamps The cornering lamps improve the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The cornering light function switches on automatically, if: Ryou are traveling at a speed of less than 25 mph (40 km/h) and you switch on a turn signal or turn the steering wheel. Hazard warning lamp switch Ryou are traveling at a speed between X 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) To switch on/off: press the £ hazard and turn the steering wheel. warning lamp switch. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short If you have indicated a turn while the hazard time, but is automatically switched off after warning lamps are switched on, only the turn no more than 3 minutes. signal lamps on the side of the vehicle selected will light up. i If reverse gear is engaged the lamp on the opposite side of the vehicle switches on The hazard warning lamps switch on auto- instead. matically if: Ran air bag is deployed. Ryou brake sharply and bring the vehicle to a Hazard warning lamps halt from a speed of more than 45 mph G WARNING (70 km/h). If the hazard warning lamps have been The rear exterior light will be covered if you: switched on automatically, press the £ R open the rear doors by 90° hazard warning lamp switch to switch them Lights and windshield wipers Ropen the rear dropside. off. The vehicle will then be difficult for other road i The hazard warning lamps work even users to see or will not be seen by them at all, when the ignition is switched off. particularly if it is dark or visibility is poor. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore ensure in this and simi- Headlamp cleaning system lar situations that the vehicle is visible from the rear in accordance with the relevant The headlamps are cleaned automatically national regulations, by using the warning tri- with a high-pressure water jet if the "Wipe angle, for instance. with washer fluid" function is activated (Y page 107) while the low-beam headlamps are on and the engine is running. You can find information on refilling washer fluid in the "Maintenance and care" section (Y page 255).

Z 96 Exterior lighting

Highbeam Assist In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: General notes Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or You can use this function to set the head- snow lamps to change between low beam and high Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- beam automatically. The system recognizes ing the sensors vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in Activating/deactivating Highbeam front of your vehicle, and consequently Assist switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. X To activate: switch on the Highbeam Once the system no longer detects any other Assist function using the on-board com- Y vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam head- puter ( page 192). lamps. X Turn the light switch to the Ã position. The system's optical sensor is located behind X Press the combination switch beyond the the windshield near the overhead control pressure point in the direction of arrow : panel. (Y page 94). Highbeam Assist is active. Important safety notes The _ or indicator lamp in the G WARNING multifunction display lights up when it is Highbeam Assist does not recognize road dark and the light sensor activates the low- users: beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approx- Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians imately 22 mph (35 km/h) and no other R who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists road users have been detected: R whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier The high-beam headlamps are switched on Lights and windshield wipers In very rare cases, Highbeam Assist may fail to automatically. The K indicator lamp in recognize other road users who have lights, or the instrument cluster also lights up. may recognize them too late. In this or similar If you are driving at speeds below approx- situations, the automatic high-beam head- imately 19 mph (30 km/h), other road lamps will not be deactivated or will be acti- users are recognized or the roads are ade- vated regardless. There is a risk of an acci- quately lit: dent. The high-beam headlamps are switched off Always carefully observe the traffic conditions automatically. The K indicator lamp in and switch off the high-beam headlamps in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ good time. or indicator lamp in the multifunc- Highbeam Assist cannot take into account tion display remains lit. road, weather or traffic conditions. Highbeam X To deactivate: move the combination Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for switch back to its normal position or move adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevail- the light switch to another position. ing light, visibility and traffic conditions. The _ or indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out. Interior lighting 97

Headlamps fogged up on the inside The headlamps may fog up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity. X Switch on the low-beam headlamps and drive off. The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey and the weather conditions (humidity and temperature). If the level of moisture does not diminish: Interior lights in the overhead control panel X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified : Switches the left-hand reading lamp specialist workshop. on/off ; Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/ off Interior lighting = Right-hand reading lamp Switching the dashboard lighting on/ ? Interior light off A Switches the automatic control system on/off Overview B Switches the interior light on/off C Left-hand reading lamp If you manually switch on the interior lighting or reading lamps on the overhead control panel, they switch off automatically after 20 minutes. Lights and windshield wipers Automatic control The interior light comes on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the driver's or the co-driver's door Standard interior light R 1 Interior light switched on remove the key from the ignition lock 2 Interior light switched off The interior light switches off again automatically. 3 Automatic control system switched on If a door is left open, the interior lighting switches off after approximately 20 minutes.

Z 98 Interior lighting

Switching the rear compartment Switching the rear/cargo compart- lighting on/off centrally (Passenger ment lamp on/off Van)

Interior light with switch (example: Cargo Van) Rear compartment lighting switch 1 Automatic control : To switch on the rear compartment light- 2 To switch off the interior lighting ing 3 To switch on the interior lighting ; Automatic control = To switch off the rear compartment lighting You can switch the rear compartment lighting on/off centrally on Passenger Vans that are equipped with convenience control. There may also be a switch on the rear compartment lights that allows you to switch them on/off separately. If you switch off rear

Lights and windshield wipers compartment lighting =, the rear compartment light is switched off, regardless of the position of its own switch. Interior light with switch (example: Passenger Van with rear-compartment air conditioning) If you move the rear compartment lighting 1 To switch on the interior lighting switch to center position ;, the automatic 2 To switch off the interior lighting control system is switched on. When you 3 open a door or unlock the vehicle, the rear Automatic control compartment lighting then goes on automat- For Cargo Vans and Passenger Vans without ically. Once the doors are closed, it switches convenience control, the switch for the inte- off automatically after 20 minutes. rior lighting is on the rear interior light in the cargo compartment/vehicle interior. If you move the switch to automatic control, the rear/cargo compartment lamps go on when you open a door or unlock the vehicle. They switch off automatically after 20 minutes, or when you close the doors. Changing bulbs 99

Motion detector Changing bulbs G WARNING Important safety notes The motion detector sends the invisible infra- G DANGER red radiation emitted by LEDs (light emitting diodes). Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get an electric shock if you remove the cover of These LEDs are classified as class 1M lasers the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con- and can damage the retina if you: tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. R look directly into the unfiltered laser beam Never touch the parts or the electrical con- of the motion detector for an extended tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on period the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe- Rlook directly into the laser beam of the cialist workshop. motion detector using optical instruments, e.g. eyeglasses or a magnifying glass. G WARNING There is a risk of injury. Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot Never look directly into the motion detector. when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. The cargo compartment lighting is also There is a risk of injury. switched on by the motion detector in the Allow these components to cool down before cargo compartment of Cargo Vans equipped changing a bulb. with this feature. If the motion detector detects a movement in ! Make sure the bulbs are always securely the cargo compartment when the vehicle is installed. stationary, the cargo compartment lighting If your vehicle is equipped with Bi-Xenon switches on for approximately two minutes. bulbs, you can recognize this by the following: The cargo compartment lighting can be the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves switched on by the motion detector within from the top to the bottom and back again Lights and windshield wipers four seconds if: when you start the engine. For this to be Rthe rear interior light switch (Y page 98) is observed, the low-beam headlamps must be set to automatic control. switched on before starting the engine. Rthe vehicle is stationary, the parking brake The bulbs and lamps are an essential compo- is applied and the brake pedal is not being nent of vehicle safety. You must therefore depressed make sure that these function correctly at all Or times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Rthe selector lever is in position P on vehi- RAlways switch off the vehicle's lighting sys- cles with automatic transmission and the tem before changing a bulb. brake pedal is not being depressed and This will prevent a short circuit. Rthe vehicle has not been locked from the R outside using the key Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Always use a clean, The motion detector switches off automati- lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the cally if no change is detected in the vehicle for bulb when installing. several hours, e.g. if a door is opened, if the ignition key is turned, etc. This prevents the Even minor contamination can burn into battery from becoming discharged. the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs.

Z 100 Changing bulbs

RDo not use a bulb that has been dropped or = Low-beam headlamps: H7 55W that has scratches on its glass tube. ? High-beam headlamps: H7 55W The bulb could explode. A Parking lamps/standing lamps: W5W ROnly use bulbs in closed lamps which have been designed for this purpose. ROnly use spare bulbs of the same type and with the prescribed voltage RProtect the bulbs from moisture when in use. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. RHave the LEDs and bulbs of the following lamps changed at a qualified specialist workshop: Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps - the additional turn signals in the exterior : Turn-signal: NAK 3457 mirrors Additional turn signals in the exterior mir- - the high-mounted brake lamp ror (not for all-wheel-drive vehicles): - LED daytime running lamps (Bi-Xenon HPC 16WY headlamps) - Bi-Xenon lamps (Bi-Xenon headlamps) Low-beam headlamps and high-beam windshield wipers - front fog lamps headlamps/cornering lamp If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Lights and Front bulbs Overview of bulb replacement – bulb types The following bulbs can be replaced. Bulb types can be found in the legend.

Example (halogen headlamps) X Switch off the lighting system. X Open the hood (Y page 248). X Turn housing cover : in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Turn signal: PY21W ; Daytime running lamps: W21W Changing bulbs 101

X Switch off the lighting system. X Open the hood (Y page 248). X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove.

Example (halogen headlamps) ; Low-beam headlamp bulb holder = Bulb holder for high-beam headlamp ? Bulb holder for parking lamp/standing lamp (halogen headlamps) X Bi-Xenon headlamps: turn bulb holder X Turn the corresponding bulb holder with with bulb ; counter-clockwise and bulb ;, = or ? counter-clockwise and remove it. pull it out of the lamp. Halogen headlamps: press the spring X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. catches of the bulb holder together and X Insert the new bulb in such a way that its remove the bulb holder with bulb ;. base fits into the recess of the bulb holder. windshield wipers X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. X Insert the bulb holder with the bulb into the X Press a new bulb into the bulb holder. lamp and turn it clockwise to tighten. X The bulb holder engages audibly. Bi-Xenon headlamps: insert the bulb holder with bulb ; into the lamp and turn X Place housing cover : into the opening clockwise. and turn in the opposite direction of the Lights and arrow. Halogen headlamps: insert the bulb ; X Close the hood. holder with bulb into the lamp. The bulb holder with bulb ; engages audibly. Cornering light function/daytime run- X : ning lamps Replace cap and turn it clockwise to the stop. The cap audibly engages. X Close the hood (Y page 249).

Z 102 Changing bulbs

Turn signal lamps Rear bulbs (Cargo Van/Passenger Van) Overview of bulb types

X Switch off the lighting system. X Open the hood (Y page 248). X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb holder :. X Press the new bulb into bulb holder : and screw it in clockwise. windshield wipers X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn it clockwise to tighten. X Close the hood. Lights Bulb type

Lights and : High-mounted brake LED lamp ; Brake lamp/tail lamp P21W/5W = Turn signal lamps PY 21 W ? Tail lamps/standing R5W lamps A License plate lamp W5W B Rear fog lamps (driver's P21W side) C Backup lamps P21W Changing bulbs 103

Tail lamps X Release retaining lugs ; and take the bulb holder out of the tail lamp. X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder and screw it in clockwise. X Press the connector into the bulb holder. X Insert the lamp lens. To do this, clip the bulb holder into the three holes provided at the side and tighten screws :.

License plate lamp

X Switch off the lighting system. X Open the rear door. X Undo screws : and unclip the lamp lens in the direction of the arrow. windshield wipers X Pull the connector off the bulb holder.

X Switch off the lighting system. Lights and X Insert a screwdriver or similar implement into recess ; and carefully pry off lamp lens :. X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. X Insert a new bulb. X Align lamp lens : and clip it in so that it engages.

; Retaining lugs = Brake lamps ? Turn signal lamps A Standing lamp/tail lamp B Backup lamps C Rear fog lamp

Z 104 Changing bulbs

Rear bulbs (Cab Chassis) A Brake lamps B Overview of bulb types Tail lamps C Rear fog lamp D License plate lamp E Backup lamps X Switch off the lighting system. X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;. X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder and screw it in clockwise. X Chassis (example: Cab Chassis) Position lamp lens ; and tighten screws :. Lights Bulb type : Perimeter lamp/stand- R 5 W Additional lamps ing lamp Additional turn signal lamp on the roof ; Tail lamps R 5 W = Brake lamps P 21 W ? Turn signal lamps PY 21 W A Backup lamps P 21 W B Rear fog lamps (driver's P 21 W

Lights and windshield wipers side) C License plate lamp R 5 W

Tail lamps Type of lamp: P 21 W X Switch off the lighting system. X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;. X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder and screw it in clockwise. X Position lamp lens ; and tighten screws : again. : Screws ; Lamp lens = Perimeter lamp/standing lamp ? Turn signal lamps Changing bulbs 105

Perimeter lamp (Cab Chassis) X Disconnect cable connector =. X Unscrew bulb holder ;. X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;. X Press the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Screw bulb holder ; into courtesy light :. X Connect cable connector =. The connector locking spring must engage. X Align courtesy light : on the side and engage.

Interior lighting General notes ! Have the bulbs in the overhead control Type of lamp: W 5 W panel replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. You could otherwise damage X Switch off the lighting system. the overhead control panel. X Undo screws : and remove the lamp unit. X Turn bulb holder ; and remove it. Front interior light X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;. X Press the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Screw bulb holder ; into the lamp unit. X Carefully position the lamp housing and

tighten screws :. Lights and windshield wipers

Courtesy lights, rear compartment

Type of lamp: K 18 W X Switch off the interior lighting. X Press spring catch ; in the direction of the arrow and lift off interior light :. X Remove bulb = from the bulb holder. X Insert new bulb =. X Align interior light : on the right-hand side Bulb type: W5W and engage the spring catch. X Press in the latching spring of courtesy light : with a suitable implement, e.g. a screwdriver. X Pry off courtesy light :.

Z 106 Changing bulbs

Rear interior light X Switch off the interior lighting. Interior light with switch X Press in the catch springs of lamp housing : with a suitable object and pry off lamp housing :. X Open protective cover ?. X Press the contact spring of bulb holder ; outwards and remove bulb =. X Insert new bulb =. X Fold protective cover ? back into place. X Align lamp housing : on the left-hand side and engage. i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED is Interior light with switch faulty, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Type of lamp: K 15 W X Switch off the interior lighting. Cargo compartment lamp X Press in the catch springs of lamp housing : with a suitable object and pry off lamp housing :. X Press the contact spring of bulb holder ; outwards and remove bulb =. X Insert a new bulb =. X Align lamp housing : on the left-hand side and engage. i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED is

Lights and windshield wipers faulty, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Interior light without switch

Type of lamp: W 10 W X Switch off the interior lighting. X Undo screws : and remove the lamp lens. X Press bulb ; into the bulb holder and unscrew it counter-clockwise. X Press new bulb ; into the bulb holder and screw it in clockwise. Interior light without switch X Position the lamp lens and tighten Type of lamp: K 15 W screws :. i Vehicles with LED cargo compartment lamp: if an LED is defective, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Windshield wipers 107

Windshield wipers X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. Switching the windshield wiper X Turn the combination switch in the direc- on/off tion of arrow ; to the appropriate setting ! Do not operate the windshield wipers depending on the intensity of the rain. when the windshield is dry, as this could X Single wipe: push the combination switch damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust briefly to the pressure point in the direction that has collected on the windshield can of arrow :. scratch the glass if wiping takes place when X To wipe with washer fluid: press the com- the windshield is dry. bination switch beyond the pressure point If it is necessary to switch on the windshield in the direction of arrow :. wipers in dry weather conditions, always The detent positions of the combination use washer fluid when operating the wind- switch correspond to the following wiper shield wipers. speeds: ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on 0Windshield wipers off the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or IIntermittent wipe other residues may be the reason for this. II Normal wipe Clean the windshield using washer fluid III Rapid wipe after washing the vehicle in an automatic i car wash. Canada only: windshield wipers ! If the windshield wipers are switched on Vehicles with rain/light sensor: and you stop the vehicle, the windshield Switch the wipers off in dry weather. Oth- wiper speed is reduced. For example, if you erwise, dirt or optical effects may cause have selected level II and stop the vehicle, undesired windshield wiper sweeps. This wiping continues with intermittent wipe could then damage the windshield wiper while the vehicle is stationary. If intermit- Lights and blades or scratch the windshield. tent wipe is selected, the intervals become The windshield will no longer be wiped prop- longer. erly if the wiper blades are worn. Replace the Vehicles with a rain and light sensor: wiper blades twice a year (Y page 108), ide- you can use level I as the universal setting. ally in spring and fall. The rain and light sensor sets the appropriate wiping frequency automatically, according to the intensity of the rain. When you stop the vehicle, levels III and II are switched down to level I automatically. The windshield wiper will return to the original level when you drive faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). You can adjust the sensitivity of the rain and light sensor using the on-board computer (Y page 193). Combination switch Information on checking the washer fluid level can be found in the "Maintenance and care" section (Y page 255).

Z 108 Windshield wipers

Switching the rear window wiper on/ Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when off you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. We recommend that you have the wiper blades replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only hold the wiper blade by the wiper arm. You could otherwise damage the wiper rubber.

Combination switch The windshield will no longer be wiped properly if the wiper blades are worn. Replace the : è Rear window wiper switch wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and 2 ô To wipe with washer fluid fall. 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn switch : to the corresponding position The rear window wiper switches on automatically if you engage reverse gear and the wind-

Lights and windshield wipers shield wipers are on. Front windshield wiper arm with wiper blade X Fold wiper arm = away from the wind- Replacing the wiper blades shield. G WARNING X Set wiper blade : at right angles to the If the windshield wipers begin to move while wiper arm. you are changing the wiper blades, you could X Press both retaining clips ; together in be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of the direction of the arrow and swing wiper injury. blade : away from wiper arm =. Always switch off the windshield wipers and X Pull wiper blade : up and out of the ignition before changing the wiper blades. retainer on wiper arm =. X Slide new wiper blade : into the retainer ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper on wiper arm =. arm has been folded away from the wind- X Press new wiper blade : onto wiper arm shield. = until you hear retaining clips ; engage. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a X Fold wiper arm = back onto the windshield wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear again. window. Windshield wipers 109

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wiper Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield jams. wiper movement. The wiper motor has switched off. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch on the windshield wipers again.

The windshield wiper There is a malfunction in the windshield wiper drive. does not move at all. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The washer fluid com- The spray nozzles are misaligned. ing from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles checked at a qualified specialist work- zles no longer hits the shop. center of the windshield. Lights and windshield wipers

Z 110 111

Useful information ...... 112 Overview of climate control systems ...... 112 Operating the climate control system ...... 116 Adjusting the air vents ...... 120 Operating the auxiliary heating system ...... 122 Operating the cargo compartment air vents ...... 133 Climate control 112 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information

Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes Observe the recommended settings on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows could fog up. Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and

Climate control filters undesirable substances from the air. Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. The system only functions optimally when the side windows are closed. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather. In order to cool the vehicle more rapidly, switch climate control to air-recirculation mode briefly. This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the airflow into the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than that stated in the Maintenance Booklet. Overview of climate control systems 113

Heating control panel

: Sets the temperature (Y page 117) z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118) ; K Sets the airflow (Y page 118) z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118) = e Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120) ? Sets the air distribution (Y page 117) Climate control sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)

Information on heating Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use the heating optimally. RSet the temperature control to the middle level. Only change the temperature in small increments. ROnly use the defrosting function briefly, until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. 114 Overview of climate control systems

Control panel for the air-conditioning system

: Sets the temperature (Y page 117) z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118) ; Sets the airflow (Y page 118) K Increases the airflow I Reduces the airflow Climate control = e Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120) ? x Switches the reheat function (window air dehumidification) on/off (Y page 118) A Sets the air distribution (Y page 117) sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118) B ¿ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 117) C Blower setting bar display z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)

Information on the air-conditioning ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. system if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- Below, you can find a number of notes and erwise fog up as no fresh air is drawn into recommendations to help you use the air- the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. conditioning system optimally. ROnly use the reheat function until the fog- R Switch on the cooling with air dehumidifi- ged up windows are clear again. cation function. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). Only change the temperature in small increments. ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. Overview of climate control systems 115

Rear-compartment heating control panel

: i Switches the rear-compartment heating on/off (Y page 116) ; K Sets the airflow (Y page 118) = Sets the temperature (Y page 117)

Information on rear-compartment Climate control heating For optimum climate control, set the temperature control to the middle level. Only change the temperature in small increments. 116 Operating the climate control system

Control panel for rear-compartment air-conditioning system

: Sets the airflow (Y page 118) K Increases the airflow I Reduces the airflow ; Sets the temperature (Y page 117) = Blower setting bar display Climate control ? i Switches the rear-compartment air conditioning on/off (Y page 116)

Information on rear-compartment air Activating/deactivating climate con- conditioning trol via the control panel For optimum climate control, set the temper- X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition ature control to the middle level. Only change lock. the temperature in small increments. Vehicle with heating X To switch on: set airflow control ; down Operating the climate control system to at least level 1 (Y page 114). X To switch off: set airflow control ; up to Switching the climate control on/off the 0 position (Y page 114). Important information Vehicle with air conditioning When the climate control is switched off, air X To switch on: press the K button. intake and air circulation also stop. Only use The blower speeds are shown in bars next this setting for a brief period. Otherwise, the to the button. windows could fog up. X To switch off: press the I button and, after reaching the lowest blower speed, press it again. Operating the climate control system 117

Activating/deactivating rear-compart- Setting the temperature ment climate control via the control panel Increasing/reducing temperature in the front compartment via the control X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition panel lock. Only change the temperature in small incre- Vehicle with rear-compartment heating/ ments. Start at the center position, or at 72 ‡ rear-compartment air conditioning (22 †). X To switch on/off: press the i switch. X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). If the indicator lamp in the button lights up, X : the rear-compartment heating/rear-com- Turn temperature control clockwise to partment air conditioning is switched on. increase or counterclockwise to reduce the temperature (Y page 114).

Switching the cooling with air dehu- Increasing/reducing temperature in midification function on/off the rear compartment via the control panel rol Important information Only change the temperature in small incre- If you switch off the "Cooling with air dehu- ments. midification" function, the air inside the vehi- X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). cle will not be cooled (in warm weather) or X Turn rear-compartment temperature con- dehumidified. The windows could fog up more trol = (Y page 115) or rear-compartment quickly. Climate cont air-conditioning system ; (Y page 116) The cooling with air dehumidification function clockwise to increase or counterclockwise is only available when the engine is running. to reduce the temperature. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu- i midified according to the temperature selec- Vehicles with additional air conditioning ted. and heating in the rear compartment: if you set the temperature control to the center Condensation may appear on the underside position, only one of the two climate con- of the vehicle when in cooling mode. This is trol systems works in the rear compart- normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc- ment and in air-recirculation mode tion. (Y page 120). Switching on/off Vehicle with air conditioning Setting the air distribution X Press the ¿ button. Air distribution settings If the indicator lamp in the button lights up, cooling with air dehumidification is The air distribution symbols have the follow- switched on. ing meanings: m Directs air through the center and side air vents s Directs air to the windshield and the z air vents 118 Operating the climate control system

q Directs air to the windshield, the air X Close the center air vents (Y page 121) and vents and into the footwell the air outlets for the headroom and the r Directs air to the air vents and into rear compartment (Y page 121). the footwell X Direct the side air vents towards the side windows and open the defroster vents for Adjusting the side windows (Y page 121). Vehicle with air conditioning X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). X Set air-distribution control ? for the heat- X Set temperature control : to ing (Y page 113)or air-conditioning system z (Y page 114). A (Y page 114) to the corresponding sym- X Press the K button until the maximum bol. blower output is reached. All bars in the display next to the button light up. Setting the airflow X Set air-distribution control A to s z Y X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). ( page 114). X Y X Vehicle with heating/rear-compart- Close the center air vents ( page 121) and ment heating: set airflow control ; of the the air outlets for the headroom and the rear compartment (Y page 121). heating (Y page 113) or of the rear-com- X partment heating (Y page 115) to the Direct the side air vents towards the side desired level. windows and open the defroster vents for Y X Vehicle with air conditioning/rear-com- the side windows ( page 121). Climate control partment air conditioning: press the I button to reduce or the K button Clearing condensation from the win- to increase the airflow. dows The blower speeds are shown in bars next to the buttons. Windows fogged up on the inside You should only select this setting until the Defrosting the windows windows are clear again. X Vehicle with window heating: switch on You can use the "defrosting" function to the front (Y page 119) and/or rear window defrost the windshield or to demist the inside defroster (Y page 119) . of the windshield and the side windows. X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). Only use the following settings until the win- X dows are clear again. Switch off air-recirculation mode (Y page 120). X Vehicle with window heating: switch on the front (Y page 119) and/or rear window Vehicle with heating defroster (Y page 119) . X Set temperature control : to a higher tem- X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). perature (Y page 113). Vehicle with heating X Set airflow control ; to a higher blower setting. It should be set at least to level two X : Set temperature control and airflow (Y page 113). control ; to z (Y page 113). X Set air-distribution control ? to s X ? s Set air-distribution control to z (Y page 113). z (Y page 113). Operating the climate control system 119 i If the windows still fog up, set the control X Start the engine. as described for defrosting (Y page 118). X To switch on/off: press the z switch. Vehicle with air conditioning The indicator lamp in the z button comes on when the windshield heating is X Activate cooling with air dehumidification switched on. (Y page 117). X Press the ¨ button (Y page 114). If the indicator lamp in the z windshield The reheat function is switched on. The heating button flashes, the on-board voltage indicator lamp in the switch lights up. is too low. The windshield heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be acti- To switch off the reheat function, press the vated. ¨ button again. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior Windows fogged up on the outside lighting. If enough on-board voltage is available again You should only select this setting until the within 30 seconds, the windshield heating windshield is clear again. automatically switches on again. It otherwise X Switch on the windshield wipers remains switched off. (Y page 107). X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). Rear window defroster X Adjust air distribution to the footwell (Y page 117). X Close the air vents (Y page 120). Climate control

Window heating Windshield heater

Rear window defroster switch The rear window defroster consumes a lot of power. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. The rear window heating otherwise only switches off automatically after 12 minutes. X Start the engine. X To switch on/off: | Windshield heater switch press the switch. The indicator lamp in the | button The windshield heater consumes a lot of comes on when the rear window defroster power. You should therefore switch it off as is switched on. soon as the windshield is clear. The windshield heating otherwise switches off auto- If the indicator lamp in the | rear window matically after 5 minutes. defroster button flashes, the on-board voltage is too low. The rear window defroster has 120 Adjusting the air vents

switched off prematurely or cannot be acti- or rear-compartment air conditioning sys- vated. tem ; (Y page 116) to the center position. X Switch off any consumers that are not Only one of the two climate control sys- required, e.g. reading lamps or interior tems in the rear compartment is activated lighting. and is in air-recirculation mode. X To deactivate: turn the temperature con- If enough on-board voltage is available again = within 30 seconds, the rear window heating trol of rear-compartment heating Y automatically switches on again. It otherwise ( page 115) or rear-compartment air-con- ; Y remains switched off. ditioning system ( page 116) clockwise or counterclockwise. Only change the temperature in small increments. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off Adjusting the air vents Important safety notes Important safety notes When you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows could fog up more quickly, in G WARNING particular at low outside temperatures. Only Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air switch on air-recirculation mode for a short vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in time. the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There You can deactivate the intake of fresh air if is a risk of injury. unpleasant odors enter the vehicle from out- Make sure that all vehicle occupants always Climate control side. The air inside the vehicle will only be maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- circulated. lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. Heating/air-conditioning system The center and side air vents are adjustable. Air-recirculation mode switches off automat- On vehicles with a rear-compartment air-con- ically after about 10 to 30 minutes, depending ditioning system, you can also adjust the air on the outside temperature. vents in the roof duct. X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust X To switch on/off: press the e switch. the sliders of the center air vents to the If the indicator lamp in the e button center position. lights up, air-recirculation mode is activated. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, Rear-compartment heating/rear-com- please observe the following notes: partment air conditioning Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. On vehicles with a rear-compartment heating R and air-conditioning system, you can acti- never cover the vents or the ventilation vate/deactivate air-recirculation mode for grilles in the vehicle interior. the rear-compartment climate control. X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). X To activate: set the temperature control of rear-compartment heating = (Y page 115) Adjusting the air vents 121

Setting the center air vents Adjusting air vents for the passenger compartment

: Center air vent, left ; Center air vent, right Air vents (example: right-hand side of the vehicle) = Thumbwheel for center air vent, right You can use the air vents to ventilate the ? Thumbwheel for center air vent, left vehicle interior on the left and right, in the rear and the headroom. X To open: turn thumbwheel = to the left or thumbwheel ? to the right. X To open: for the right-hand side of the vehi- ; X To close: turn thumbwheel = to the right cle, turn thumbwheel to the left or for or thumbwheel ? to the left. the left-hand side of the vehicle, thumbwheel : to the right. X To close: for the right-hand side of the Climate control Setting the side air vents vehicle, turn thumbwheel ; to the right or for the left-hand side of the vehicle, thumbwheel : to the left.

Adjusting the air vents in the roof duct ! Always leave at least one air vent open. If the rear-compartment air conditioning is switched on and all the air vents are closed, the air-conditioning system may be damaged.

Side air vent (example: right-hand side of the vehicle) X To open: turn thumbwheel = of side air vents : upward. X To close: turn thumbwheel = of side air vents : downward. i If the ® symbol can be seen on thumbwheel =, defroster vent ; is open.

Z 122 Operating the auxiliary heating system

On vehicles with rear-compartment air con- When the auxiliary heating is switched on, ditioning, adjustable air vents are integrated make sure that: into the roof duct. Rno flammable materials come into contact X To adjust the airflow: open or close the with hot vehicle components : air flap in air vents as needed. Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the X To adjust the air distribution: turn air exhaust pipe unhindered vent : to the desired position. Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.

Operating the auxiliary heating sys- ! Turn on the auxiliary heating at least once tem a month for approximately 10 minutes. The auxiliary heating could otherwise be dam- Important safety notes aged. G DANGER ! Make sure that the flow of hot air is not If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate blocked. The auxiliary heating will other- ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases wise overheat and switch off. such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the Your vehicle may be equipped with either an vehicle. This is the case, for example in auxiliary hot-water heater or an auxiliary enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in warm-air heater. Adjustment and operation of snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. the: Switch the auxiliary heating off in enclosed R spaces without extraction systems, e.g. in hot-water auxiliary heater is done via the Climate control garages. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and on-board computer and with the auxiliary you have to leave the auxiliary heating run- heating button in the control panel Y ning, keep the exhaust pipe and the area ( page 123) or with the remote control Y around the vehicle free of snow. To ensure an ( page 125). adequate supply of fresh air, open a window Rauxiliary warm-air heater is done via the on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into timer above the overhead control panel the wind. (Y page 127). The auxiliary heating works independently of G WARNING the engine and supplements the climate con- When the auxiliary heating is switched on, trol system in the vehicle. The auxiliary heat- parts of the vehicle can become very hot, e.g. ing heats the air in the vehicle interior to the the exhaust system. temperature set. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or If your vehicle is equipped with a hot-water twigs may ignite if they come into contact auxiliary heater, the auxiliary heating also with: keeps the coolant warm. This way, the load on the engine is minimized and fuel is saved. Rhot parts of the exhaust system The heater booster function (Y page 130) of Rthe exhaust gas itself the auxiliary heating supports the climate There is a risk of fire. control system when the engine is running and the outside temperature is low. You can use the auxiliary heating at an outside temperature of up to 39 ‡ (4 †). At an outside temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) the Operating the auxiliary heating system 123 auxiliary heating system and the heater boos- tion of charge depends on the outside tem- ter function switch off automatically. perature and on the electrical consumers switched on.

Heating time Outside tempera- Engine runtime ture The heating time when operating the auxiliary heating with the vehicle is stationary without Above 32 ‡ (0 †) at least 10 minutes the engine running depends on the outside 32 ‡ (0 †) to 14 ‡ at least 15 minutes temperature and the electrical consumers (Ò10 †) switched on. Below 14 ‡ (Ò10 †) at least 20 minutes Outside Heating Possible tempera- time startup proce- ture dures Before switching on Above Approx. 6 X Check the fuel level and top up if necessary. 23 ‡ 20 minutes The auxiliary heating is operated directly Ò ( 5 †) using the vehicle's fuel. The tank must be at 23 ‡ Approx. 3 least a quarter full to ensure that the aux- (Ò5 †) to 40 minutes iliary heating functions. 5 ‡ X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). (Ò15 †) X Set the temperature control to the desired temperature (Y page 117). Below 5 ‡ Approx. 2 Climate control X (Ò15 †) 50 minutes Set the air distribution as required (Y page 117). X Y You can then switch on the auxiliary heating Open the center ( page 121) and side air Y again. vents ( page 121) and set them to the middle position. If you do not start the engine for a while, the total duration of heating is limited to a maxi- i The auxiliary heating automatically mum of 120 minutes to protect the starter switches to heater booster mode after the battery. Switching on the auxiliary heating is engine is started. then automatically disabled. You can, for example, switch on the auxiliary heating without the engine running if the outside temper- Operating with the button (control ature is Ò5 ‡ (Ò20 †) a maximum of two panel) times. If you try it again, the indicator lamps in the y button (Y page 123) flash alternately for approximately 2 minutes to signal switch-on interlock. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on without starting the engine. When the condition of charge of the starter battery is sufficient again, the switch-on interlock will be deactivated. To charge the starter battery, let the engine run. The engine run time required to reach the necessary condi-

Z 124 Operating the auxiliary heating system

i Switch the heater booster function on or The switch-on time selected is displayed. off with the ¢ button (Y page 130). X Wait 10 seconds for the standard display to X To activate the auxiliary heating sys- appear. tem: press and hold the upper section of The switch-on time is selected. The yellow the y switch for longer than 2 seconds. indicator lamp in the y button lights up. The red indicator lamp in the button lights If you do not preselect a switch-on time, up. The auxiliary heating heats or ventilates and --:-- is shown in the display, this the interior to the temperature that you means that the automatic switch-on mode have set. The blower switches to the first is switched off. The yellow indicator lamp in level. the y button goes out. X To switch off auxiliary heating: press the upper section of the y button. On-board computer with steering wheel or buttons X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0. The red indicator lamp in the button goes out. The auxiliary heating operates for another 2 minutes and then switches off automatically.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Selecting a switch-on time lock. Climate control X Important information Press the y button. The Aux. heat submenu is shown in the You can use the on-board computer to define display. up to three switch-on times, one of which can If no switch-on time has been selected, the be selected. selected switch-on time is highlighted or The yellow indicator lamp in the y button Timer off is highlighted. goes out after 30 minutes, if you: i You can also access the Aux. heat. sub- Rhave selected the switch-on time and menu via the Settings (Y page 188) Rturn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock menu. X Use the W or X button on the steer- On-board computer without steering ing wheel to select the desired switch-on wheel buttons time. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Use the Timer off setting to deactivate lock. automatic switch-on. X V X Press the y button. Press the button on the steering The y symbol flashes in the display. wheel. The switch-on time is selected. The yellow or indicator lamp in the y button lights up. X Press the 4 menu button on the instrument cluster repeatedly until the y symbol flashes in the display. X Use the f or g buttons on the instrument cluster to select the switch-on time 1 to 3. Operating the auxiliary heating system 125

Setting the switch-on time The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 600 meters. This range is X Use the same method to select a switch-on reduced by: time as described in the "Preselecting a R switch-on time" section. sources of interference Rsolid objects between the remote control On-board computer without steering and the vehicle wheel buttons Rthe remote control being in an unfavorable X Press the 9 reset button on the instru- position in relation to the vehicle ment cluster. Rtransmitting from an enclosed space The hour display flashes. X Use the f and g buttons on the instru- Overview of the remote control ment cluster to set the hours. X Press the 9 reset button The minute display flashes. X Use the f and g buttons to set the minutes. The switch-on time is set and selected. On-board computer with steering wheel buttons X Press the 9 button on the steering wheel.

The display shows the Hours menu. Climate control : Indicator lamp X W X Use the and buttons on the ; To confirm settings steering wheel to set the hours. = To switch the remote control on/off, set X Press the 9 button. the operating duration or end or cancel The display shows the Minutes menu. settings X Use the W and X buttons to set the Indicator lamp : lights up in various ways to minutes. show different operating modes: X Press the V button. The switch-on time is set and selected. Signaling Meaning Lights up red Remote control switched Operation with the remote control on Important information Data transfer Flashes red Auxiliary heating switched You can switch the auxiliary heating on/off off and set the operating duration using the remote control. You can use up to 4 remote Lights up Auxiliary heating switched control units on the vehicle. These must be green on synchronized for the receiver in your vehicle (Y page 126).

Z 126 Operating the auxiliary heating system

Signaling Meaning When indicator lamp : flashes red, the auxiliary heating is switched off. Flashes green Change operating duration active Changing the operating duration Flashes alter- Remote control in syn- X Switch on the remote control. nately red and chronizing mode X When indicator lamp : flashes red, press green Ü and b simultaneously. Indicator lamp : flashes green. i When the remote control battery is weak, X Press the Ü button repeatedly until the indicator lamp : flashes red rapidly. desired operating duration is shown. Replace the remote control battery R20 minutes (Y page 130). Indicator lamp : flashes green twice. You can find further information on the lamp R30 minutes status in the "Problems with the auxiliary heating" section (Y page 132). Indicator lamp : flashes green three times. Switching the remote control on/off R40 minutes Indicator lamp : flashes green four The remote control switches to standby mode times. after 10 seconds. Indicator lamp : goes out. X Press the b button. X To switch on: press and hold the Ü During data transmission, indicator button until indicator lamp : lights up red. : Climate control lamp lights up red. If a connection between the remote control If indicator lamp : emits two long, green and the receiver in the vehicle has been flashes, the selected operating duration is established and indicator lamp :: stored. Rflashes red, the auxiliary heating is i If no adjustment is made, indicator switched off. lamp : flashes six times and the remote R lights up green, the auxiliary heating is control goes into standby mode. switched on. X To switch off: press and hold the Ü Synchronizing the remote control button until indicator lamp : goes out. X Press the y auxiliary heating button in the control panel (Y page 123) for longer Switching the auxiliary heating on/off than 10 seconds. X Switch on the remote control. When you press and hold the y button, X To switch on: when indicator lamp : the red indicator lamp lights up in the but- flashes red, press the b button. ton. During data transmission, indicator When the red indicator lamp in the y lamp : lights up red. button flashes, the receiver in the vehicle is When indicator lamp : lights up green, the ready for synchronizing. auxiliary heating is switched on. X Press and hold the Ü remote control X To switch off: when indicator lamp : button until indicator lamp : lights up red. lights up green, press the b button. If there is an active connection between the During data transmission, indicator remote control and the receiver, indicator : lamp : lights up red. lamp flashes alternately red and green. Operating the auxiliary heating system 127

The remote control is in synchronizing Rset the operating duration from 10to mode. 120 minutes or to continuous operation i If you press the Ü button again on the Rset the heating level (preselected temper- remote control after starting synchroniza- ature) to a range between 10 and 30 tion, you will only synchronize this remote control unit with the receiver. Any other Timer overview remote control units that were synchronized will be cleared. Indicator lamp : flashes alternately red and green (very slowly). X Press the b button on the remote control. During data transmission, indicator lamp : lights up red. When remote control indicator lamp : emits two long green flashes, the selected operating time is synchronized. The indicator lamp in the y auxiliary heating but- Timer above the overhead control panel ton goes out. : Program column G Sets preselection memory 1 – 3 (Y page 129) Operation with the timer Sets weekday (Mon. – Sun.) (Y page 128) Climate control Important safety notes ; Menu bar This is only for vehicles with a hot-water aux- y Activates/deactivates immediate iliary heater. heating mode (Y page 128) B G DANGER Sets the program times (Y page 129) If a switch-on time has been selected, the Ñ auxiliary heating switches on automatically. Sets the day, time and the operating duration (Y page 128) RIf the ventilation is insufficient, poisonous ß exhaust gases can collect, in particular car- Sets the heating level Y bon monoxide. This is the case in enclosed ( page 129) spaces, for example. There is a risk of fatal = Display panel for: time, heating level injuries. and operating duration RIf highly flammable substances or flamma- à Continuous operation mode active ble materials are nearby, there is a risk of a ß Heating level set risk of fire and explosion. ? Selects options in program column : or Always deactivate the preselected switch-on menu bar ; (forwards) times if you stop the vehicle in such or similar Increases values situations. A Confirms a selection or setting B Status bar Use the timer to: y Heating mode activated R activate/deactivate immediate heating C Activates the timer mode Cancels or ends settings in a menu Rset up to three switch-on times

Z 128 Operating the auxiliary heating system

D Selects options in program column : or X Using the Û or â button, set the menu bar ; (backwards) minute value or select the à symbol for Reduces values continuous operation. X Press the b button. Activating the timer The operating duration is stored. The time is shown. The timer switches to standby mode after 10 seconds. The display goes off. Activating/deactivating immediate X Press and hold the Ü button until the heating mode menu bar appears in the display and the time is shown. X To switch on: press the Û or â button until the y symbol in the menu bar Setting the day, time and operating flashes. duration X Press the b button. The operation duration flashes in the dis- You must reset the day, time, and default play. value for the operating duration: i You can preset the default value that is Rduring initial operation shown (Y page 128). R after a voltage supply interruption (e.g. if X Using the Û or â button, set the the battery has been disconnected) minute value (10 – 120) or select the à Rafter a malfunction. symbol for continuous operation. You can find further information on malfunc- X Press the b button. Climate control tions in the "Problems with the auxiliary heat- Immediate heating mode is activated. The ing" section (Y page 132). time and the y symbol appear. X Press the Û or â button until the X To switch off: press the Û or â Ñ symbol in menu bar ; flashes. button until the y symbol flashes in the X Press the b button. menu bar, and then press the b button. In program column :, the day selected Immediate heating mode is deactivated. flashes. The y symbol disappears. X Press the Û or â button to set the The auxiliary heating operates for another desired day. two minutes and then switches off auto- X Press the b button. matically. The day selected is stored. The hour setting i If you switch off the ignition while imme- of the clock flashes. diate heating mode (operating duration X In the same way, set the hour and subse- 10– 120 minutes) is active, immediate quently the minutes, then confirm by press- heating mode is also switched off. The aux- ing the b button. iliary heating operates for another The time is stored. Program column : dis- two minutes and then switches off auto- appears and the operating duration matically. flashes. If you have set continuous operation as the i The operating duration set is the default operating duration and you switch off the setting for immediate heating mode. You ignition, the auxiliary heating switches off can set the operating duration from 10 to automatically after about 15 minutes. If, in 120 minutes or activate continuous opera- the remaining time, the ignition is switched tion. on again, continuous operation of the auxiliary heating continues. Operating the auxiliary heating system 129

Setting the preselection time X Set the day and time as described in the "Setting the day, time and operating dura- G WARNING tion" section (Y page 128). The auxiliary heating must not be operated if The preselection time is stored. The pro- there are highly flammable substances gram column disappears. In the display nearby or in enclosed spaces without an panel, the on message and the y sym- extraction system. Make sure that the auxili- bol appear. ary heating is not switched on automatically X Press the b button. by the timer in such places. If this possibility The operating duration flashes. exists, deactivate the respective programmed X Press the Û or â button to set the time. minute value (10 – 120). You can set three preselection times using X Press the b button. the timer. The operating duration for the preselection Observe that when setting the preselection time is saved. The time and number of the time, this does not correspond to the switch- selected preselection memory are shown. on time but to the switch-off or departure i The preselection memory that will be acti- time. The auxiliary heating system starts up vated next is underlined. Additionally, the automatically and runs for the operating dura- day that is set appears. tion set prior to departure. Example: For a planned departure time of Deactivating the preselection time 7:00 a.m., you should also set the preselec- X Carry out the steps as described in the tion time to 7:00 a.m. If the operating dura- "Setting the preselection time" section. tion is preset to 40 minutes, for example, the Climate control auxiliary heating starts up at 6:20 a.m. If the y symbol in the status bar is shown: If an identical time (time and day) is set in the X Press the Û or â button until the off preselection memory, only the last time set is message in the display panel is shown. saved. X Press the b button. After a malfunction or if the battery has been The preselection time is deactivated. The disconnected, you must set the preselection time is shown. times again. You can find further information on malfunctions in the "Problems with the Setting the heating level auxiliary heating" section (Y page 132). You can set the heating level to a range X Press the Û or â button until the between 10 and 30. B symbol in the menu bar flashes. The heating level corresponds to a preselec- X Press the b button. tion temperature for the vehicle interior. This In the program column, the G preselec- is a guide value and may, depending on the tion memory numbers appear. The selected outside temperature, differ from the actual preselection memory flashes. vehicle interior temperature. X Press the Û or â button to select the X Press the Û or â button until the desired preselection memory. ß symbol in the menu bar flashes. X Press the b button. X Press the b button. The preselection memory is selected. The The heating level display flashes. days are shown.

Z 130 Operating the auxiliary heating system

X Using the Û and â buttons, set the will be switched on the next time the engine is desired heating level to a range between 10 started (memory function). and 30. i Switch the auxiliary heating on or off with X Press the b button. the y button (Y page 123). The heating level is set and the y sym- X To switch on/off: press the ¢ switch. bol appears. If the indicator lamp in the button lights up, the heater booster function is switched on. Switching the heater booster function After switching off, the auxiliary heating oper- on/off ates for about another 2 minutes and then switches off automatically.

Replacing the remote control battery G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention Vehicles with auxiliary heating immediately. Climate control H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an Vehicles with heater booster function environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged At outside temperatures of up to 39 ‡ (4 †) batteries to a qualified spe- the fuel-fired heater booster system heats the cialist workshop or a special vehicle interior as quickly as possible when collection point for used bat- the engine is running. teries. The auxiliary heating automatically switches to heater booster mode after the engine is If the indicator lamp on the remote control started. flashes red rapidly, the remote control battery At an outside temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) is discharged. You should replace the remote the auxiliary heating system and the heater control battery. booster function switch off automatically. You need a battery of the type CR2430, which If you switch off the engine without switching can be obtained at any qualified specialist off the heater booster function, the system workshop. Operating the auxiliary heating system 131

X Remove battery cover ; using a suitable implement, e.g. a coin, by turning it counter-clockwise. X Check the seal on battery cover ; for damage and, if necessary, replace.

X Remove old batteries =. rol X Insert new, clean battery = into the battery tray with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Position battery cover ; so that mark : on the raised area points between two

recesses ?. Climate cont X Turn battery cover ; using a suitable implement, e.g. a coin, clockwise to the stop. X Check all the functions of the remote control (Y page 125).

Z 132 Operating the auxiliary heating system

Problems with the auxiliary heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp on The remote control battery is discharged. Data transmission is not the remote control possible. flashes red rapidly. X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 130).

The indicator lamp on There is no connection between the remote control and the the remote control receiver in the vehicle. flashes red and green in X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, e.g. hold the rapid succession. remote control higher or to the side. X Move closer. If you cannot establish a connection and the auxiliary heating is switched on, it can then only be deactivated using the y button (Y page 123). or Several remote controls are being used at the same time. X Switch on the remote control again after a short while (Y page 126). or Climate control The remote control is not synchronized. X Synchronize the remote control (Y page 126).

The indicator lamp on The remote control is being synchronized. the remote control X Wait until the remote control synchronization process is com- slowly flashes red and plete (Y page 126). green alternately. The remote control for The remote control battery is discharged. the auxiliary heating X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 130). cannot be switched on. The auxiliary heating The outside temperature is above 39 ‡(4 †). The auxiliary heating does not switch on. switches off automatically.

The auxiliary heating The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches off switches off automati- automatically. cally and/or cannot be X Refuel at the nearest gas station. switched on. X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel lines are full. or Operating the cargo compartment air vents 133

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unit switches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage is less than 10 V. X Have the alternator and battery checked. or

The fuse is blown. X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement. X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified specialist workshop. or

A malfunction has occurred. X Switch the ignition on and off twice. If the auxiliary heating still cannot be switched on, the heating device is faulty. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The auxiliary heating is The coolant level is too low. Climate control overheated. X Check the coolant level and add more coolant if necessary (Y page 253).

Operating the cargo compartment air X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition vents lock. X To activate and extract air: press the upper section of the ´ switch. The roof ventilator removes used air from the cargo compartment. X To activate and ventilate: press the lower section of the · switch. The roof ventilator feeds fresh air into the cargo compartment. X To switch off: set the switch to the middle position.

If your vehicle is equipped with a roof ventilator, you can ventilate and extract air from the cargo compartment.

Z 134 135

Useful information ...... 136 Breaking-in notes ...... 136 Driving ...... 136 Automatic transmission ...... 142 Refueling ...... 145 Parking ...... 149 Driving tips ...... 151 Driving systems ...... 159 Working mode ...... 172 Towing a trailer ...... 173 Driving and parking 136 Driving

Useful information drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. This Operator's Manual describes all models as well as standard and optional equipment of your vehicle that were available at the time of Driving going to print. Country-specific variations are Important safety notes possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the described functions. G WARNING This also applies to systems and functions If you switch off the ignition while driving, relevant to safety. safety-relevant functions are only available Read the information on qualified specialist with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, workshops (Y page 25). for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

Driving and parking Breaking-in notes of an accident. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Do not switch off the ignition while driving. New or replaced brake pads and brake disks G WARNING only reach their optimum braking effect after If the parking brake has not been fully a few 100 miles (a few 100 kilometers). Until released when driving, the parking brake can: then, compensate for this by applying greater R force to the brake pedal. overheat and cause a fire R For the service life and economy of your vehi- lose its hold function. cle it is crucial that you break in the engine There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release with due care. the parking brake fully before driving off. RTherefore, protect the engine for the first If you park the vehicle for more than 1000 miles (1500 km) by driving at varying three weeks: vehicle and engine speeds. R RAvoid overstraining the vehicle and high connect the batteries to a trickle charger or engine speeds during this period, e.g. driv- Rdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery or ing at full throttle. Do not exceed Ø of the Rswitch off the electrical system using the maximum speed for each gear. battery main switch (Y page 137) and RDo not change down a gear manually in Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery order to brake. Otherwise, you need to check the battery's RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator condition of charge every three weeks, since pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick- standby power consumption can drain the down). battery. If the battery voltage is lower than RThe shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only be 12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other- engaged when driving slowly, e.g. when wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus- driving in mountainous terrain. tive discharging. After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase Be sure to observe the notes on disconnect- the engine speed gradually and accelerate ing and charging the batteries under "Battery" the vehicle to full speed. (Y page 258). You can obtain information i about trickle chargers from a qualified spe- You should also observe these notes on cialist workshop. breaking-in if the engine or parts of the Driving 137

Battery isolating switch Important safety notes ! Make sure that the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock and wait at least 20 seconds before disconnecting or connecting the battery isolating switch. You could otherwise damage electrical system components. d parking You can use the battery isolating switch to disconnect the power supply to all your vehi- Battery isolating switch in the driver's footwell, on cle's consumers. This will prevent uncontrol- the right-hand side next to the accelerator pedal led battery discharge caused by off-load cur- X Remove the key from the ignition lock and rent consumption. wait for about 20 seconds. Driving an If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary X Press button ; in the direction of the battery in the engine compartment, you will arrow and hold. need to disconnect both batteries. Only then X Pull connector : from the earth pin. is the electrical system fully disconnected X Clamp connector : under the accelerator from the power supply. pedal so that it cannot make contact with i Only switch the vehicle to de-energized the earth pin. using the battery main switch if: All starter battery consumers are discon- Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy nected from the power supply. period Rit is absolutely necessary Switching on the power supply After the power supply has been activated, you will need to reset the side windows (Y page 79).

Switching off the power supply ! When you clamp the connector under the accelerator pedal, make sure that the connector does not become damaged or dirty. It may otherwise not be possible to restore the electrical connection when the parts are reassembled. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X Press connector : onto earth pin ; until you feel it engage and the lock inhibitor is released. Connector : must be in full contact with earth pin ;. All consumers are reconnected to the DC power supply.

Z 138 Driving

Key positions operation, care and maintenance should be observed. X Rectify any noticeable defects before com- mencing the journey.

Checks in the vehicle

rking Emergency equipment/first-aid kit X Check the equipment to make sure that it is accessible, complete and ready for use. The first aid and breakdown assistance equipment is in the front door stowage compart- g To insert/remove the key, to lock the ments and behind the driver's seat. steering wheel Driving and pa 1 To unlock the steering wheel, power sup- Vehicle lighting ply for some consumers (e.g. the radio) X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition 2 To switch on the ignition. Power supply for lock. all consumers, preglow and drive position X Check the lighting system with the aid of a 3 To start the engine second person. On vehicles with a battery main switch, you X Replace defective bulbs (Y page 99). must first switch on the power supply (Y page 137). Before driving off i To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly while turning the key to posi- G WARNING tion 1. Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper- Preparing for a journey ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a Visual check of the vehicle exterior risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that X In particular, check the following compo- they do not get into the driver's footwell. nents on the vehicle, and on the trailer as When using floormats or carpets, make sure necessary: that they are properly secured so that they do Rlicense plates, vehicle lighting, turn sig- not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place nals, brake lamps and wiper blades for several floormats or carpets on top of one dirt and damage another. Rtires and wheels for firm seating, correct tire pressure and general condition G WARNING Rtrailer tow hitch for play and security Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage The trailer coupling is one of the most of the pedals, e.g.: important vehicle parts with regard to Rshoes with thick soles road safety. The separate instructions Rshoes with high heels issued by the manufacturer pertaining to Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Driving 139

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

X Secure the load as per the loading guidelines (Y page 240). X Make sure that the floormats and carpets are properly secured so that they cannot slip and obstruct the pedals. X Close all doors.

Gearshift pattern Starting the engine j Park position with parking lock G WARNING k Reverse gear

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust i Neutral Driving and parking gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling h Drive these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There X Move the selector lever to position P. is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave The display in the instrument cluster shows the engine running in enclosed spaces with- P: out sufficient ventilation. Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons Y ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal ( page 187) when starting the engine. Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons (Y page 182) X Before starting the engine, make sure that: i You can also start the engine in neutral N. Rall the doors are closed. Rall the vehicle occupants are wearing X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition their seat belts correctly. lock. % Rthe parking brake is applied. The preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly. i If you depress the brake pedal before X % starting the engine, the pedal travel is short Once the preglow indicator lamp goes 3 and pedal resistance is high. out, turn the key to position in the ignition lock and release it as soon as the engine is If you depress the brake pedal again after running. starting the engine, pedal travel and resist- i ance will be back to normal again. You can start the engine without preglow when the engine is warm. The preglow system is malfunctioning if the % preglow indicator lamp lights up for approximately 1 minute: Rafter the ignition is switched on Rwhile the engine is running At extremely low outside temperatures you may then no longer be able to start the engine. Have the malfunction rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 140 Driving

i Depending on the equipment installed, You can also deactivate the automatic lock- the vehicle either automatically locks cen- ing feature (Y page 71). trally after switching on the ignition or after pulling away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. Reverse warning device You can open the doors from the inside at G WARNING any time. Other road users may ignore or fail to hear the Automatic door locking can be deactivated warning tone of the reverse warning feature. (Y page 71).

d parking There is a risk of injury if you fail to ensure that the area in which you are maneuvering is clear. Driving off Make sure that there are no persons or G WARNING objects in the area in which you are maneu-

Driving an If the engine speed is above the idling speed vering. It may be necessary to enlist the help and you engage transmission position D or R, of a second person when maneuvering. the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is The reverse warning feature is a system a risk of an accident. designed to assist you in ensuring the safety When engaging transmission position D or R, of other road users. always firmly depress the brake pedal and do A warning signal sounds to alert other road not simultaneously accelerate. users when reverse gear is engaged. The vol- ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the ume of the warning tone can be reduced for vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could night-time driving. damage the transmission. X To reduce the volume of the warning tone: engage reverse gear twice in quick X Depress the brake pedal and keep it succession. depressed. The selector lever lock is released. The warning tone is now quieter. X Move the selector lever to position D or R. i The warning tone sounds at a normal vol- On vehicles with a reverse warning feature, ume by default. The volume of the warning when reverse gear is engaged a warning tone has to be reduced each time you tone sounds to alert other road users engage reverse gear if necessary. (Y page 140). X Release the parking brake (Y page 150). The c indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. i After pulling away or switching on the ignition, the vehicle automatically locks centrally. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. Driving 141

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not There is air in the fuel system. start. X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before The starter motor can attempting to start the engine again. be heard. X Start the engine again. Please bear in mind that lengthy and frequent starting attempts will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The fuel tank has been run dry. Driving and parking start. X Refuel the vehicle. The starter motor can If you drive until the fuel tank is completely empty, air may get into be heard. The reserve the fuel system. If the engine does not start after refueling, bleed fuel warning lamp is lit the fuel system as follows: and the fuel gage is at X 0. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition for approximately 10 seconds. X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds. If the engine does not start: X Wait approximately 2 minutes. X Restart the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds. X If the engine still fails start, do not continue trying to start it. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The vehicle cannot be The exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty, an emission-relevant driven at a speed malfunction has occurred or the DEF reserve has been used up. exceeding 5 mph This malfunction or defect can damage the exhaust gas after- (8 km/h). treatment. The yellow ; engine X Observe the messages in the display: diagnostic lamp and Ron vehicles without steering-wheel buttons (Y page 200) the yellow å DEF Ron vehicles with steering-wheel buttons (Y page 211) and indicator lamp2 light (Y page 211). up. The engine does not The battery isolating switch is switched off. start. X Switch on the power supply (Y page 137). The starter motor cannot be heard.

2 Only vehicles without steering-wheel buttons.

Z 142 Automatic transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low. The battery is too weak or dis- start. charged. The starter motor can- X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 276). not be heard. If the engine cannot be jump-started, the starter motor is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The battery is discharged or faulty. start. X Check the battery for damage. The starter motor can- X Charge the battery (Y page 263). not be heard. Driving and parking Automatic transmission Selector lever Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. j ! Vehicles with automatic transmission Park position with parking lock may roll only briefly in the neutral position k Reverse gear N. Prolonged rolling of the wheels, e.g. i Neutral when being towed, will result in transmis- h Drive sion damage. The display in the instrument cluster shows i Be sure to observe the instructions in the the present selector lever position or the cur- "Tow-starting and towing away" section rent shift range: (Y page 277). Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons (Y page 187) Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons (Y page 182) Automatic transmission 143

Selector lever positions Changing gear

B Park position The 5-speed automatic transmission adapts to your individual driving style by continu- This prevents the vehicle from roll- ously adjusting its shift points. These shift ing away when stopped. Only move point adjustments take into account the cur- P the selector lever to if the vehicle rent operating and driving conditions. If the is stationary. operating or driving conditions change, the You can only remove the key when automatic transmission reacts by adjusting the selector lever is in this position. the gearshift program. The selector lever is locked in posi- When the selector lever is in position D, the P tion if the key is removed. automatic transmission selects the individual The parking lock should not be gears automatically. This depends on: used as a brake when parking. Rany restriction in the shift range Always apply the parking brake as

(Y page 144) Driving and parking well once you have parked the vehi- R cle. the position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed C Reverse gear Only move the selector lever to R when the vehicle is stationary. Touchshift A Neutral When the selector lever is in position D, you No power is transmitted from the can perform gearshifts yourself. engine to the drive wheels. Releas- X To shift down: press the selector lever to ing the brakes will allow you to the left towards D–. move the vehicle freely, e.g. by The automatic transmission shifts to the pushing. next gear down, depending on the gear cur- Do not move the selector lever to N rently engaged. The shift range is also while driving. The automatic trans- restricted. mission could otherwise be dam- i The automatic transmission does not shift aged. down if you press the selector lever If ASR is deactivated or ESP® has towards D– while traveling at too high a malfunctioned: only move the speed. This protects the engine from over- selector lever to N if the vehicle is revving. in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever roads. to the right towards D+. 7 Drive The automatic transmission shifts to the The automatic transmission next gear up, depending on the current changes gear itself. All forward gearshift program. This also extends the gears are available. shift range. You can influence the gearshifts and shift gears yourself or limit the shift range.

Z 144 Automatic transmission

X To derestrict the shift range: press and Driving tips hold the selector lever towards D+ until D appears in the display again. Accelerator pedal position The automatic transmission shifts from the Your style of driving influences how the auto- current shift range directly to D. matic transmission shifts gear: X To select the optimum shift range: press Rlittle throttle: early upshifts and hold the selector lever to the left Rlots of throttle: later upshifts towards D–. The automatic transmission will shift to a

d parking Kickdown range which allows easy acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic Use kickdown for maximum acceleration: transmission will shift down one or more X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the gears. pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to the Driving an next gear down, depending on the engine Shift ranges speed. When the selector lever is in position D you X Ease off on the accelerator pedal once the can restrict or derestrict the shift range for desired speed is reached. the automatic transmission. The automatic transmission shifts up again. X To derestrict/restrict the shift range: press the selector lever briefly to the right Maneuvering towards D+ or left towards D–. Maneuvering in a tight space: The display shows the selected shift range. The automatic transmission shifts only as X Control the vehicle's speed by braking far as the relevant gear. carefully. X i If the maximum engine speed for the Depress the accelerator pedal slightly and restricted shift range is reached and you evenly. depress the accelerator pedal, the auto- i You can shift back and forth between matic transmission will not shift up. drive position D and reverse gear R at low Driving situations speeds without applying the brakes. This can help you, for example when rapidly 5 Use the braking effect of the engine maneuvering the vehicle or rocking it out of on steep downhill gradients and for snow or slush. driving: Ron steep mountain roads Towing a trailer R in mountainous terrain X Drive at moderate engine speeds on steep Rin arduous conditions uphill gradients. 4 Use the braking effect of the engine X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradi- on extremely steep downhill gradient, shift down to a shift range adapted to ents and long downhill stretches. the driving situation (Y page 144), even if cruise control is activated. Refueling 145

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission mal- The transmission is losing oil. functions when shifting X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe- gear. cialist workshop.

The acceleration char- The transmission is in emergency mode. acteristics have deter- It is only possible to shift into second gear or reverse gear R. iorated noticeably. X Stop the vehicle. The transmission does X Depress the brake pedal. not shift. X Move the selector lever to position P. X Switch off the engine. Driving and parking X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Depress the brake pedal. X Move the selector lever to position D or R. In position D, the transmission shifts into second gear; in position R, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Releasing the parking lock manually X Push the implement in and simultaneously move the selector lever out of position P. In the event of a malfunction, it is possible to The selector lever lock is released. You can manually release the selector lever from the now move the selector lever freely again P lock in parking position , e.g. to have the until it is returned to position P. vehicle towed away. X Remove implement ;. X Re-install cover :. i The screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit could function as the implement, for instance (Y page 274).

Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING X Apply the parking brake. Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of X : Remove cover . fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion. X ; Slide implement as far as it will go into Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating the opening. sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the

Z 146 Refueling

engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating ! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci- before refueling. dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Other- wise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify G WARNING a qualified specialist workshop and have Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com- There is a risk of injury. pletely. You must make sure that fuel does not come ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing fuel system. and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted vapors. Keep fuel away from children. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the If you or others come into contact with fuel, paintwork. observe the following: ! Filter the fuel before transferring it to the RWash away fuel from skin immediately vehicle if you are refueling the vehicle from

Driving and parking using soap and water. barrels or containers. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel immediately rinse them thoroughly with system due to contaminated fuel. clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. Further information on fuel and on fuel grades RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- can be found in the "Technical data" section Y tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ( page 318). ing. R Immediately change out of clothing which Refueling procedure has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNING If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.

H Environmental note The fuel filler flap is on the left side of the If fuels are handled improperly, they pose a vehicle behind the front door. It is only pos- danger to persons and the environment. Do sible to open the fuel filler flap when the front not allow fuels to run into the sewage system, door is open. the surface waters, the ground water or into X the ground. Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Switch off the auxiliary heating system ! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with (Y page 122). a diesel engine. Even small amounts of gas- X Open the front left-hand door first, and then oline will cause damage to the fuel system the fuel filler flap. and engine. X Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel vapors from entering the vehicle. Refueling 147

X Turn fuel filler cap ; counter-clockwise, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) remove it and let it hang from strap :. Important safety notes X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank and refuel. H Environmental note X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle Dispose of DEF in an environmentally respon- switches off. Fuel may otherwise leak out. sible manner. X Replace tank filler cap ; on tank and turn clockwise. ! Only use DEF in accordance with You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap ISO 22241. Never mix DEF with additives or is closed fully. thin it with tap water. The exhaust gas after- X Open the front left-hand door first, and then treatment may otherwise be damaged. close the filler flap. Observe the MB Specifications for Service Products, Sheet 352.0. Damage that results from the use of addi- Driving and parking Problems with the fuel and fuel tank tives or tap water leads to the loss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If your vehicle is losing fuel, the fuel lines or the fuel tank are defective. ! If DEF comes into contact with a painted or aluminum surface, wash the surface off X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition immediately with plenty of water. lock immediately and remove it. ! X Do not restart the engine under any cir- DEF is not a diesel additive and must not cumstances. be mixed with fuel in the tank. Even small X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. amounts of DEF can cause engine damage. Damage that results from the blending of If the fuel tank has been run dry, after refuel- DEF will not be covered by the New Vehicle ing carry out the following steps: Limited Warranty. X Before starting the engine: switch on the The exhaust gas aftertreatment requires a ignition three or four times. reducing agent, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), in X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition order to function correctly. lock (Y page 138). When opening the DEF tank filler cap at high % The preglow indicator lamp in the outside temperatures, ammonia vapors may instrument cluster lights up briefly. escape. X % Once the preglow indicator lamp goes Ammonia vapors have a pungent smell and out, turn the key to position 3 in the ignition primarily cause irritation of the: lock and release it as soon as the engine is R running. skin Rmucous membranes You can start the diesel engine without pre- R glow when the engine is warm. eyes You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat, as well as coughing and watering of the eyes. Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Avoid contact with DEF. Do not allow DEF to come into direct contact with your skin; it is hazardous to your health.

Z 148 Refueling

Rinse any affected areas off with plenty of Lockable filler cap clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. i If the DEF level has dropped below the reserve range, add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF at the latest after receiving the second warning message (Y page 182).

rking i If you switch off the engine at a low outside temperature and add DEF, restart the engine after refueling. If you leave the vehicle parked without restarting the engine and the DEF freezes in the DEF tank, the on- board computer will only be able to register Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment the new fill level after a defrosting period of

Driving and pa up to 60 minutes. During this time the engine may only be operated in neutral. You will find further information on DEF in the "Service products" section (Y page 318).

Refueling procedure

DEF filler neck Non-lockable DEF filler cap

X To open: switch off the ignition. X Open the hood (Y page 248). X Remove tool ? for unlocking tank filler cap : from the footwell on the co-driver's side (Y page 274). X Pull cover = up, turn 90° and release. X Insert tool ? into hole ; of tank filler cap :. X Turn filler cap : counter-clockwise and Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment remove it. Make sure that tool ? remains in tank filler cap : while doing so. X To open: switch off the ignition. X Open the hood (Y page 248). X To close: replace filler cap : and turn it X Turn filler cap : counter-clockwise and clockwise until closed. remove it. X Pull tool ? out of tank filler cap : and stow with the vehicle tool kit in the footwell X To close: replace cap : on the filler neck on the co-driver's side. and turn it clockwise. X Pull cover = up over hole ; of tank filler You will hear a click when cap : is fully cap :, turn and release. closed. X Turn tank filler cap :. X Y Close the hood ( page 249). If tank filler cap : turns freely, the DEF tank is closed. Parking 149

Parking On vehicles with a battery isolating switch, switch off the power supply if the vehicle is Important safety notes to be out of use for a longer period of time. G WARNING Always park your vehicle safely and according Flammable material such as leaves, grass or to legal requirements and secure it against twigs may ignite if they come into contact with rolling away. hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust To ensure that the vehicle is properly secured gas flow. There is a risk of fire. against rolling away unintentionally: Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- Rthe parking brake must be firmly applied rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- Rthe selector lever must be in position P and cle which are hot. Take particular care not to the key must be removed from the ignition park on dry grassland or harvested grain lock fields. Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the G WARNING front wheels must be turned towards the Driving and parking curb If you switch off the ignition while driving, Rthe rear axle must be secured, e.g. with a safety-relevant functions are only available wheel chock, on steep uphill or downhill with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, gradients for example, the power steering and the brake Y boosting effect. You will require considerably Use the wheel chock ( page 151) to do so. more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk If you leave the vehicle parked for more than of an accident. three weeks: Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or Rdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery or G WARNING Rswitch off the electrical system using the If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- battery main switch (Y page 137) and cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery Rrelease the parking brake. Otherwise, you need to check the battery's Rshift the automatic transmission out of the condition of charge every three weeks, since parking position P. standby power consumption can drain the Rstart the engine. battery. If the battery voltage is lower than In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- 12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus- an accident and injury. tive discharging. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Be sure to observe the notes on disconnect- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never ing and charging the batteries under "Bat- Y leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. tery“ ( page 258). You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified ! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to specialist workshop. the vehicle or damage to the drive train. ! When the vehicle is parked, always remove the key to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

Z 150 Parking

Parking brake X To apply the parking brake: pull brake lever : up as far as the last possible G WARNING detent. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- The c warning lamp in the instrument cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: cluster lights up if the engine is running. Rrelease the parking brake. i On vehicles with a folding brake lever, you Rshift the automatic transmission out of the can then press lever : down to the stop. parking position P. X To release the parking brake: on vehicles Rstart the engine. with a folding brake lever, first pull brake In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- lever : up to the stop. ment and become trapped. There is a risk of X Raise brake lever : slightly and press an accident and injury. release knob ;. When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Guide brake lever : down to the stop. c

Driving and parking SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The indicator lamp in the instrument leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. cluster goes out. Exceptionally, if the service brake fails, the G WARNING parking brake can be used to brake the vehi- If you must brake the vehicle with the parking cle in an emergency. brake, the braking distance is considerably X Emergency braking: press and hold longer and the wheels could lock. There is an ; increased danger of skidding and accidents. release button and carefully apply brake lever :. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the Switching off the engine wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

! If the coolant temperature is very high, e.g. after driving on hilly roads, leave the The brake lamps are not illuminated when you engine running at idle speed for about brake the vehicle using the parking brake. two minutes before turning it off. As a rule, you may only apply the parking This allows the coolant temperature to brake when the vehicle is stationary. return to normal. X Stop the vehicle. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. Driving tips 151

X Apply the parking brake. X To remove the wheel chock on Cab X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition Chassis: pull the locking springs down and lock and remove it. remove the wheel chock. The immobilizer is activated. i When stowing the wheel chock, make X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling sure that it is secured in the retainer with away (Y page 149). the locking springs.

Wheel chock Parking the vehicle for a long period d parking Use the wheel chock or a similar object to If you park your vehicle for longer than prevent the vehicle from rolling away, e.g. three weeks: when parking or changing a wheel. Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or Rdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery or

Rswitch off the electrical system using the Driving an battery main switch (Y page 137) and Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery Otherwise, you need to check the battery's condition of charge every three weeks, since standby power consumption can drain the battery. If the battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other- wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus- Wheel chock in the load/passenger compartment tive discharging. X To remove the wheel chock on Cargo Be sure to observe the notes on disconnecting and charging the batteries under "Bat- Vans/Passenger Vans: pull restraining tery“ (Y page 258). You can obtain informa- cable : down a little and remove it from tion about trickle chargers from a qualified retainer ;. specialist workshop. X Remove the chock. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than i When stowing the wheel chock, make 6 weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a sure that restraining cable : is holding it result of lack of use. In this event, consult a securely in retainer ;. qualified specialist workshop.

Driving tips General notes Important safety notes

G WARNING The driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we rec- Wheel chock to the rear of the chassis on the left ommend that you pull over to a safe location side of the vehicle (example) and stop before placing or taking a telephone

Z 152 Driving tips

call. If you choose to use the telephone while Fuel consumption also increases when driv- driving, please use the hands-free device and ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in only use the telephone when road, weather mountainous terrain. and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from Overrun cutoff using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you are in overrun mode and take your foot Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph off the accelerator pedal, the fuel supply is cut (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers off when the engine speed is out of the idle a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) speed control range. every second. Drinking and driving G WARNING G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and Driving and parking with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, driving are very dangerous combinations. for example, the power steering and the brake Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can boosting effect. You will require considerably affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk ment. of an accident. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- Do not switch off the ignition while driving. dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. ! Always observe the ground clearance of Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow the vehicle and avoid obstacles. On vehi- anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- cles with a step, ground clearance is further ing drugs. restricted. Obstacles can damage the vehicle. Emission control If you must drive over obstacles, drive especially slowly and carefully. If necessary, G WARNING have another person direct you. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling Drive sensibly – save fuel these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave In order to save fuel, observe the following the engine running in enclosed spaces with- tips: out sufficient ventilation. X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. Certain engine systems are designed to keep X Remove unnecessary loads. the level of poisonous substances in exhaust X Remove roof carriers when they are not fumes within legal limits. needed. These systems only work optimally if they are X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. maintained exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Any work on X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. the engine should therefore be carried out by X Have all maintenance work carried out as qualified and authorized technicians at a indicated by the service intervals in the Sprinter dealer. Maintenance Booklet or by the service The engine settings must not be changed interval display. under any circumstances. In addition, all spe- Driving tips 153 cific maintenance work must be carried out at You can permanently limit the maximum regular intervals and in accordance with the speed of your vehicle to 55 mph (90 km/h), service requirements of the dealer listed here 60 mph (100 km/h) or 75 mph (120 km/h). on the inside title page. Details can be found We recommend that you use an authorized in the Maintenance Booklet. Sprinter Dealer for the programming of the maximum speed. Before overtaking, take into consideration Short journey that the engine speed limiter prevents the ! If the vehicle is predominantly used for speed increasing beyond the programmed short-distance driving or is stationary for maximum speed. long periods, this could lead to a malfunction in the automatic cleaning function for the diesel particle filter. This can lead to Driving abroad blockage of the diesel particle filter. This Service can also result in fuel collecting in the Driving and parking engine oil and cause engine failure. An extensive network of authorized Sprinter Therefore, if you mainly drive short distances, Dealers is also at your disposal when you are drive on a highway or an inter-urban road for traveling abroad. Nevertheless, please bear in 20 minutes every 300 miles (500 km). This mind that service facilities or replacement facilitates the diesel particle filter's burn-off parts may not always be immediately availa- process. ble. You can obtain a list of workshops at any authorized Sprinter Dealer.

Speed limiter Fuel G WARNING In some countries, only fuels with a higher sulfur content are available. Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Y lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There Information on fuel ( page 318). is a risk of accident. Low-beam headlamps Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the If you are traveling in countries where vehi- tire load rating and speed rating required for cles are driven on the opposite side of the your vehicle. road to that in which the vehicle is registered, you will need to: As the driver, you must find out about the R maximum speed of the vehicle and the result- have the halogen headlamps partially ing permissible maximum speed of the tires masked (tire and tire pressure). In particular, also Rhave the Bi-Xenon headlamps set to sym- observe the tire approval regulations for each metrical low beam country. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic and no You must not exceed the speed limit for the longer illuminates the edge of the road to the tires listed in the tire pressure tables. You can same height and distance. find information on tire pressures in the Have the headlamps masked or adjusted at a "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 288). qualified specialist workshop before you cross the border, but as close to it as possible.

Z 154 Driving tips

When you return from your journey, and as Downhill gradients close to the border as possible, you will need ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly to: results in excessive and premature wear to Rremove the adhesive surfaces from your the brake pads. halogen headlamps and clean the glass of On long and steep downhill gradients, you the headlamps if necessary 2 1 R should change down to shift range or have the Bi-Xenon headlamps reset to in good time. This should be observed in par- asymmetrical low beam at a qualified spe- ticular when driving with a laden vehicle and cialist workshop when towing a trailer. i You must also change the shift range in Transport by rail good time when cruise control is switched on. Transporting your vehicle by rail may be sub- You thereby make use of the braking effect of

Driving and parking ject to certain restrictions or require special measures to be taken in some countries due the engine and do not have to brake as often to varying tunnel heights and loading stand- to maintain the speed. This relieves the load ards. on the service brake and prevents the brakes You can obtain further information from any from overheating and wearing too quickly. authorized Sprinter dealer. Heavy and light loads

G WARNING Braking If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while Important safety notes driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even G WARNING cause the braking system to fail. There is a If you shift down on a slippery road surface in risk of an accident. an attempt to increase the engine's braking Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. depress the brake pedal and the accelerator There is an increased danger of skidding and pedal at the same time. accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly ing on a slippery road surface. results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. G WARNING If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. driving, the braking system can overheat. This Drive on for a short while. The brakes are increases the stopping distance and can even cooled down more quickly in the airflow. cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Wet road surfaces Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never If you have been driving for a long time in depress the brake pedal and the accelerator heavy rain without braking, there may be a pedal at the same time. delayed response when you first apply the ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly brakes. This may also occur after driving results in excessive and premature wear to through a car wash or deep water. the brake pads. Driving tips 155

You must depress the brake pedal more 110 yds (100 m) at a maximum speed of firmly. Maintain a longer distance to the vehi- 12 mph (20 km/h). cle in front. The brake lamps are not illuminated when you While paying attention to the traffic condi- brake the vehicle using the parking brake. tions, you should brake the vehicle firmly after driving on a wet road surface or through a car wash. This heats the brake discs, so that Driving in wet conditions they dry more quickly, which protects them Hydroplaning against corrosion. G WARNING Limited braking performance on salt- There is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, treated roads even if you are driving slowly and your tires When driving on salted roads, salt may start have sufficient tread depth, depending on the to build up on the brake disks and brake pads. depth of water on the road. There is a risk of This can increase braking distances consid- an accident. Driving and parking erably. For this reason, avoid tire ruts and brake care- Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in fully. front. Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions in To remove any build up of salt that may have which hydroplaning can occur, drive as fol- formed: lows: X Apply the brakes at the start of the journey, Rreduce your speed occasionally during journey and at the end R of the journey. Make sure that you do not avoid tire ruts endanger other road users when doing so. Rapply the brakes with care

Parking brake Driving on flooded roads ! G WARNING Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving If you must brake the vehicle with the parking through it. Drive slowly through standing brake, the braking distance is considerably water. Otherwise, water may enter the longer and the wheels could lock. There is an vehicle interior or the engine compartment. increased danger of skidding and accidents. This can damage the electronic compo- Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi- nents in the engine or the automatic trans- cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not mission. Water can also be drawn in by the apply the parking brake too firmly. If the engine's air suction nozzles and this can wheels lock, release the parking brake until cause engine damage. the wheels begin turning again. If you have to drive on stretches of road on When driving on wet roads or dirt-covered which water has collected, please bear in surfaces, road salt and/or dirt may get into mind that: the parking brake. This causes corrosion and Rthe water level of standing water should not a reduction of braking force. be above the lower edge of the front In order to prevent this, drive with the parking bumper brake lightly applied from time to time. When Rdo not drive faster than walking speed doing so, drive for a distance of approximately

Z 156 Driving tips

Driving in winter Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. General notes G G WARNING WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in The outside temperature indicator is not an attempt to increase the engine's braking designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

rking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and Indicated temperatures just above the freez- accidents. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- Do not shift down for additional engine brak- face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, ing on a slippery road surface. especially in wooded areas or on bridges. ! G DANGER Vehicles with automatic transmission may roll only briefly in the neutral position

Driving and pa If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate N. Prolonged rolling of the wheels, e.g. ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases when being towed, will result in transmis- such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the sion damage. vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be fatal injury. stopped when moving at low speed: If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating X Shift the transmission to neutral position running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area N. around the vehicle are clear of snow. To X Try to maintain control of the vehicle using ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a corrective steering. window on the side of the vehicle that is not Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads. facing into the wind. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise con- specialist workshop in good time at the onset trol. of winter. You can find further information on winter i tires and snow chains in the "Winter opera- Do not cover the radiator, e.g. with a win- tion" section (Y page 286). ter cover. The measurements of the on- board diagnostic system may otherwise return inaccurate values. Some of these Driving off-road values are legally prescribed and must therefore always be exact. Important safety notes Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" G WARNING section (Y page 286). If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or Slippery road surfaces turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a G WARNING risk of an accident. If you shift down on a slippery road surface in Always drive on a steep incline in the line of an attempt to increase the engine's braking fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Driving tips 157

G WARNING total brake failure, also as a result of When driving off-road, your body is subject to increased wear. The braking characteristics forces from all directions, due to the uneven will vary depending on the material that has surface. You could be thrown from your seat, got into the system. Clean the brakes after for instance. There is a risk of injury. driving off-road. If you then notice reduced braking performance or hear scraping noises, Always wear a seat belt, even when driving off- have the brake system checked at a qualified road. specialist workshop. Adjust your driving style to the changed braking characteristics. G WARNING Driving off-road or on construction sites If you drive over obstacles or in ruts, the steer- increases the possibility of vehicle damage ing wheel may jerk out of your grip, causing which may in turn lead to the failure of certain injury to your hands. assemblies and systems. Adapt your driving Always hold the steering wheel firmly with style to the off-road driving conditions. Drive both hands. When driving over obstacles, you carefully. Have any vehicle damage rectified Driving and parking must expect steering forces to increase at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as briefly and suddenly. possible. When driving on rough terrain, do not shift the G WARNING transmission into the neutral position. You Flammable material such as leaves, grass or could lose control when attempting to brake twigs may ignite if they come into contact with the vehicle with the service brake. If your hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk vehicle cannot manage an uphill slope, drive of fire. back down the slope in reverse gear. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, When loading your vehicle for driving off-road check the vehicle's underside regularly. In or on a construction site, keep the vehicle's particular, remove parts of plants or other center of gravity as low as possible. flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a Checklist before driving off-road qualified specialist workshop. X Check the fuel and DEF levels (Y page 181) ! When driving off-road or on unpaved sur- and top up (Y page 148). faces, check the underside of the vehicle X Engine: check the oil level (Y page 250) and the wheels and tires at regular inter- and add oil (Y page 252). vals. In particular, remove any trapped for- Before driving up or down steep gradients, eign objects, e.g. stones and branches. fill the oil to the maximum level. Such foreign objects may: i If you drive up or down steep gradients, Rdamage the chassis, the fuel tank or the the 4 symbol may appear in the display. brake system The engine operating safety is not put at Rcause imbalances and thus vibrations risk if you have filled the engine oil to the Rbe flung out when you continue driving maximum level before the journey. If there is any damage, inform a qualified X Vehicle tool kit: check that the jack is specialist workshop. working (Y page 274). When driving off-road and on construction X Make sure that a lug wrench (Y page 274), sites, sand, mud and water mixed with oil, for wooden underlay for the jack, a robust tow example, may get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking performance or

Z 158 Driving tips

cable and a folding spade are carried in the RWatch out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes, vehicle. tree stumps and ruts). X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread RAvoid edges where the surface could crum- depth (Y page 285) and tire pressure ble or break away. (Y page 288). Checklist after driving off-road Rules for driving off-road ! If you detect damage to the vehicle after ! Always bear the vehicle's ground clear- driving off-road, have the vehicle checked ance in mind and avoid obstacles, e.g. deep immediately at a qualified specialist work- ruts. shop. Obstacles may damage the following parts Off-road driving places a higher demand on of the vehicle: your vehicle than normal road operation. Rthe chassis Check your vehicle after driving on rough ter- Driving and parking R rain. By doing so you will notice any damage in the drive train good time and reduce the risk of an accident Rthe fuel and supply tanks for yourself and other road users. Clean your For this reason, you should always drive vehicle thoroughly before driving on public slowly when driving off-road. If you have to roads. drive over obstacles, have the co-driver Observe the following points after driving off- direct you. road, on construction sites and before driving i We recommend that you additionally on public roads: carry a shovel and a recovery rope with X Activate ASR (Y page 58). shackle in the vehicle. X Clean the headlamps and tail lamps and REnsure that loads and items of luggage are check them for damage. securely stowed or lashed down X Clean the front and rear license plates. Y ( page 240). X Clean the windshield, windows and exterior RBefore driving off-road, stop the vehicle and mirrors. shift to a low gear. X Clean the steps, door sills and grab han- RIf the surface demands it, temporarily deac- dles. tivate ASR when pulling away (Y page 58). This increases safety of footing. ROnly drive off-road with the engine running X Clean the wheels/tires, wheel housings and a gear engaged. and the underbody of the vehicle with a RDrive slowly and smoothly. Walking pace is water jet. necessary in many situations. This increases road grip, especially on wet RAvoid spinning the drive wheels. road surfaces. RMake sure that the wheels always remain in X Check the wheels/tires and wheel hous- contact with the ground. ings for trapped foreign objects and RDrive with extreme care over unknown ter- remove them. rain where you can only see for a short dis- Trapped foreign objects can damage the tance. As a precaution, get out of the vehi- wheels/tires and may be flung out from the cle to take a look at the route to be taken in vehicle when you continue driving. advance. X Check the underbody for trapped branches RCheck the water depth before fording. or other parts of plants and remove them. Trapped branches or other parts of plants increase the risk of fire and can cause dam- Driving systems 159

age to fuel lines, brake hoses and the rub- Important safety notes ber bellows of axle joints and drive shafts. Observe the notes on braking (Y page 154). X Clean the brake disks, brake pads and axle If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you joints, particularly after operation in sand, are inattentive, cruise control can neither mud, grit/gravel, water or similarly dirty reduce the risk of an accident nor override the conditions. laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take X Check the entire floor assembly, the tires, road, weather and traffic conditions into wheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steer- account. Cruise control is only an aid. You are ing, chassis and exhaust system for any responsible for the distance to the vehicle in damage. front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good X Check the service brake for operating time and for staying in lane. safety, e.g. carry out a brake test. Do not use cruise control: X If you notice strong vibrations after driving Rin traffic conditions that are unsuitable for off-road, check the wheels and drive train driving at a constant speed, e.g. in heavy Driving and parking for foreign objects again. Remove any for- traffic, on winding roads or off-road. eign objects which can lead to imbalances R and thus cause vibrations. on slippery roads. Braking or accelerating may cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Driving systems Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. Cruise control If there is a change of drivers, make sure that General notes you inform the new driver about the set cruise speed. Cruise control maintains the speed of the vehicle for you. Cruise control lever Use cruise control if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can set any speed from 20 mph upwards in increments of 1 mph. i If you have set km/h as the unit for the digital speedometer (Y page 190), you can set any speed from 30 km/h upwards in increments of 1 km/h. Cruise control should not be activated when driving off-road or on construction sites. : To activate and store the current speed or Cruise control may not be able to maintain the a higher speed stored speed on uphill or downhill gradients. ; To activate at the last stored speed If the gradient evens out and the vehicle's = To activate and store the current speed or speed does not fall below 20 mph (30 km/h), a lower speed the stored speed is resumed. ? To deactivate cruise control The cruise control lever is the upper lever on the left of the steering column.

Z 160 Driving systems

Activation conditions X Release the cruise control lever. The current speed is stored. To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: i Cruise control is not deactivated if you Rthe parking brake must be released. The depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel- c indicator lamp in the instrument clus- erate briefly to overtake, for example, ter is off cruise control resumes the vehicle’s speed Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph to the last speed stored after you have fin- (30 km/h) ished overtaking. R neither the brake or clutch pedal is Deactivating cruise control depressed There are various ways to deactivate cruise i Other drive and brake systems not descri- control: bed in this Operator's Manual, such as a retarder, may affect cruise control. You can X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- Driving and parking find information on this in the separate wards ?. operating instructions provided by the or body manufacturer. X Apply the brakes. Storing and maintaining the current The last speed set remains stored. The last speed speed stored is deleted when you switch off the engine. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed Cruise control is deactivated automatically above 20 mph (30 km/h). when: X : Briefly push the cruise control lever up Ryou apply the brakes or down =. Ryou apply the parking brake and the c X Release the accelerator pedal. indicator lamp in the instrument cluster Cruise control is activated. The current lights up speed is stored. Ryou are driving slower than 20 mph (30 km/h) Setting the speed Ryou shift the automatic transmission to It may be a moment before the vehicle starts neutral position N while the vehicle is in to accelerate or brake to the set speed. Take motion this delay into account when setting the RESP® or ASR intervenes speed. Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP®, ASR or X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : ABS system to increase the speed or down = to reduce the speed. The last stored speed increases or decrea- ses in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments). or X Press and hold the cruise control lever up : or down = until the desired speed has been reached. Driving systems 161

Problems with cruise control

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions On vehicles with steer- The display shows a high-priority message. Thus a change in speed ing wheel buttons, the is not possible. speed cannot be set X Proceed as instructed by the message in the display. when cruise control is X Deactivate cruise control activated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance General notes warning function. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST comprises Operation Driving and parking the distance warning function and adaptive Brake Assist. The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with Distance warning function a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function Important safety notes detects that there is a risk of a collision, you i Note the section on 'Important safety will be warned visually and acoustically. With- notes' (Y page 57). out your intervention, the distance warning function cannot prevent a collision. G WARNING The distance warning function will issue a The distance warning function does not react: warning at speeds of around 20 mph Rto people or animals (30 km/h) or more if: Rto oncoming vehicles Ryou approach a vehicle ahead of you very Rto crossing traffic quickly. You will then hear an intermittent Ä Rwhen cornering warning tone and the warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. Thus, the distance warning function cannot X provide a warning in all critical situations. Brake immediately in order to increase the There is a risk of an accident. distance from the vehicle in front. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- or uation and be ready to brake. X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. G WARNING If you want the distance warning function to The distance warning function cannot always assist you, the function must be activated and clearly identify objects and complex traffic operational. situations. Due to the nature of the system, particularly In such cases, the distance warning function complicated driving conditions may cause the may: system to display an unnecessary warning. Rgive an unnecessary warning With the help of the radar sensor system, the Rnot give a warning distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an There is a risk of an accident. extended period of time.

Z 162 Driving systems

Up to a speed of about 45 mph (70 km/h), the cluster lights up and the Distance Warn‐ distance warning function can also react to ing Deactivated message appears. stationary obstacles, such as stopped or X To activate: press the æ button again parked vehicles. (Y page 37). If you approach an obstacle and the distance Vehicles without steering wheel but- warning function detects a risk of a collision, tons: the Ä warning lamp in the instru- the system will alert you both visually and ment cluster goes out and the ON message acoustically. flashes. In particular, the detection of obstacles can Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: be impaired in the case of: the Ä warning lamp in the instrument Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else cluster goes out and the Distance Warn‐ covering the sensors ing Activated message appears in the Rit is snowing or raining heavily multifunction display. R

Driving and parking there is interference from other radar sources Adaptive Brake Assist Rthere are strong radar reflections, for i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- example in parking garages tion for driving safety systems (Y page 57). R a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a G WARNING motorbike R Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly a vehicle traveling in front on a different line identify objects and complex traffic situa- Following damage to the front end of the vehi- tions. cle, have the configuration and operation of In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to colli- Rintervene unnecessarily sions at slow speeds where there is no visible Rnot intervene damage to the front of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Activating/deactivating the distance Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- warning function uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. When you switch on the engine, the distance warning function switches on after a few sec- G WARNING onds. Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: X To deactivate: press the æ button R (Y page 37). to people or animals Vehicles without steering wheel but- Rto oncoming vehicles tons: the Ä warning lamp in the instru- Rto crossing traffic ment cluster lights up and the OFF message Rto stationary obstacles flashes. Rwhen cornering Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: Ä As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not the warning lamp in the instrument intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Driving systems 163

Adaptive Brake Assist aids you when braking Following damage to the front end of the vehi- during hazardous situations at speeds above cle, have the configuration and operation of 20 mph (30 km/h). With the help of Adaptive the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- detect obstacles that are in the path of your sions at slow speeds where there is no visible vehicle for an extended period of time. damage to the front of the vehicle. When you approach an obstacle and adaptive Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of a collision, adaptive Brake Assist calculates the Lane Tracking package braking force necessary to avoid a collision. Blind Spot Assist d parking Should you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase General notes the braking force to the calculated level. Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the to monitor the areas on both sides of your emergency braking situation is over. vehicle. It supports you from speeds of Driving an ABS prevents the wheels from locking. approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning The brakes function as usual again if: display in the exterior mirrors draws your R attention to vehicles detected in the moni- you release the brake pedal tored area. If you then switch on the corre- R there is no longer any danger of a collision sponding turn signal to change lane, you will Rno obstacle is detected in front of your also receive an optical and audible collision vehicle warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. uses sensors in the rear bumper and behind Up to the maximum vehicle speed, adaptive the protective strips of the B-pillars. Brake Assist can react to moving obstacles Important safety notes that have already been recognized as such at G least once over the period of observation. WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react to sta- Blind Spot Assist does not react to: tionary obstacles. Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, In particular, the detection of obstacles can placing them in the blind spot area be impaired if: Rvehicles which approach with a large speed Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else differential and overtake your vehicle covering the sensors As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give Rit is snowing or raining heavily warnings in such situations. There is a risk of Rthere is interference from other radar sour- an accident. ces Always observe the traffic conditions care- Rthere are strong radar reflections, for fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. example in parking garages Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to R a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a detect some vehicles and is no substitute for motorbike attentive driving. Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line i USA only: If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the This device has been approved by the FCC full brake boosting effect with the help of BAS as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar remains available. sensor is intended for use in an automotive

Z 164 Driving systems

radar system only. Removal, tampering, or and behind the protective strips of the B-pil- altering of the device will void any warran- lars. ties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may approved way. be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not Any unauthorized modification to this driving in the middle of their lane. This may be device could void the user’s authority to the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner operate the equipment. side of their lane. Monitoring range of the sensors Due to the nature of the system: R In particular, the detection of obstacles can a clear warning situation may not occur. be impaired in the case of: The yellow indicator lamp on the relevant side of the vehicle will then light up. Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving the sensors ing close to crash barriers or similar solid Driving and parking R poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or lane borders. snow Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving R narrow and short vehicles, e.g. motorcy- alongside particularly long vehicles, for cles or bicycles example trucks, for a prolonged time. R very wide lanes The four sensors of Blind Spot Assist are inte- Rnarrow lanes grated into the rear bumper and behind the Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their protective strips of the B-pillars. Make sure lane that the bumper and protective stripping are Rbarriers or other road boundaries free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not sensors. The radar sensors must not be cov- indicated. ered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop: Rafter a severe impact Rafter damage to the bumper Rafter damage to the protective strips of the B-pillars Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft (3.5 m) each side of it. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper Driving systems 165

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist i Blind Spot Assist is activated when you switch on the ignition. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. X To deactivate: press the button in : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp the center console (Y page 37). The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mir- If yellow indicator lamp : lights up: ror : first flashes and then lights up con- Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph tinuously. (30 km/h) X Driving and parking To activate: RBlind Spot Assist is deactivated press the button in the center console again (Y page 37). RBlind Spot Assist is malfunctioning The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mir- R there is no clear warning, depending on the ror : flashes initially. If you exceed situation 20 mph (30 km/h) while driving, the yellow Blind Spot Assist is active from a speed of indicator lamp in exterior mirror : goes 20 mph (30 km/h). If a vehicle is detected in out. the blind spot monitoring range, red warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up. Towing a trailer This warning occurs when a vehicle enters the If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have blind spot monitoring range from behind or correctly established the electrical connec- from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, tion. This can be accomplished by checking the warning only occurs if the difference in the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is deac- speed is less than 14 mph (22 km/h). tivated as a result. The indicator lamp in the Yellow indicator lamp : goes out if reverse exterior mirrors lights up yellow. gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, the deactivated. Blind Spot Assist Deactivated mes- The brightness of the indicator/warning sage also appears in the display. lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Lane Keeping Assist Collision warning General notes If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the front of your vehicle by means of a camera at corresponding turn signal, a double warning the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist tone sounds once. Red warning lamp : detects lane markings on the road and warns flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detec- you before you leave your lane unintention- ted vehicles are indicated by the flashing of ally. red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones.

Z 166 Driving systems

The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rif the vehicle is incorrectly loaded (Y page 240) Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) : Lane Keeping Assist camera Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged Lane Keeping Assist supports you from or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the speeds of approximately 40 mph(60 km/h). vicinity of the camera R

Driving and parking no, or several, unclear lane markings are Important safety notes present for one lane, e.g. in a construction G WARNING area Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or recognize lane markings. covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too Rgive an unnecessary warning small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rnot give a warning Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. There is a risk of an accident. lanes branch off, cross one another or Always pay particular attention to the traffic merge situation and stay in lane, in particular if Rthe road is narrow and winding warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Rthere are highly variable shade conditions G WARNING on the road The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not A warning may be given if a front wheel return the vehicle to the original lane. There is passes over a lane marking. In addition, a Ã a risk of an accident. warning tone sounds and the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping ing Assist. Assist Lane Keeping Assist is automatically activa- If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane ted when you start the engine. Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of X accident nor override the laws of physics. To deactivate: press the j button in Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the center console (Y page 37). road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane On vehicles without steering wheel but- Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are respon- tons: sible for the distance to the vehicle in front, OFF flashes briefly in the display and the for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for Ã indicator lamp in the instrument clus- staying in your lane. ter flashes and then lights up continuously. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi- On vehicles with steering wheel but- cle in its lane. tons: Driving systems 167

The Lane Keep. Assist Deactivated Warnings are given later if: message appears in the display and the Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ã indicator lamp in the instrument clus- Ryou cut the corner on a bend. ter flashes and then lights up continuously. Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. X To activate: press the j button in the PARKTRONIC center console again (Y page 37). On vehicles without steering wheel but- General notes tons: PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid. The ON flashes briefly in the display and the system is equipped with ultrasonic sensors in Ã indicator lamp in the instrument clus- the front and rear bumpers to monitor the ter flashes and then goes out. area around your vehicle. PARKTRONIC indi- On vehicles with steering wheel but- cates visually and audibly the distance tons: between your vehicle and an object. Driving and parking The Lane Keep. Assist Activated mes- Your vehicle features two separate sound sage appears in the display and the Ã emitters with different frequencies for the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster warning tones. The warning ranges in front of flashes and then goes out. and behind the vehicle are indicated by dif- Lane Keeping Assist is activated. ferent warning tones. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when A Lane Keeping Assist warning is suppressed you: if: Rturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as R ABS, BAS or ESP®. release the parking brake and R Ryou have set the turn signal and a lane move the selector lever to D, N or R change is detected. In this case, the warn- PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above ings are suppressed for a certain period of 11 mph (18 km/h). PARKTRONIC is reactiva- time. ted at speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h). Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown on vehicles with an automatic transmission. Important safety notes Ryou brake hard. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It cannot replace Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an your own awareness of the immediate sur- obstacle or change lane quickly. roundings. You are responsible for safe Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. maneuvering, parking and pulling away. When In order that you are warned only when nec- maneuvering, parking and pulling away, make essary and in good time if you cross the lane sure that there are no persons, animals or marking, the system recognizes certain con- objects in the maneuvering area. ditions and warns you accordingly. ! Pay particular attention to obstacles Lane Keeping Assist warns you earlier if: above or below the sensors when parking, such as flower pots or trailer towbars. Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a PARKTRONIC does not recognize such bend. R objects when they are in the immediate the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a free- vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage way. the vehicle or objects. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

Z 168 Driving systems

PARKTRONIC can suffer interference from: The sensors must be free of dirt, ice or slush. Rultrasonic sources such as a truck's Otherwise, they cannot function correctly. compressed-air brakes, an automatic car Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to Y wash or a pneumatic drill scratch or damage them ( page 268). Rattachments to the vehicle, e.g. rear Front sensors mounted racks R Center Approx. 39 in number plates (vehicle license plates) (100 cm) that are not affixed flat against the bumper Corners Approx. 26 in Rdirty or icy sensors (65 cm) Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is no longer required. PARKTRONIC measures the Rear sensors minimum detection range to an obstacle from

Driving and parking the bumper, not the ball coupling. Center Approx. 71 in (180 cm) Range of the sensors Corners Approx. 39 in PARKTRONIC does not account for obstacles (100 cm) that are: Rbeneath its detection range, e.g. persons, Minimum distance animals or objects R Center Approx. 12 in above its detection range, e.g. overhanging (30 cm) loads, overhangs or truck loading ramps Front corner sen- Approx. 10 in sors (25 cm) Rear corner sensors Approx. 12 in (30 cm)

If an obstacle is within this range, all segments of the warning displays light up and you hear a warning tone. If the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle falls below the minimum range, it is possible that the distance may no longer be displayed. Driving systems 169

Warning displays Selector lever Monitoring position D Front area R or N Front and rear area P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Warning display, front area Rsixth segment, an intermittent warning

tone sounds for approximately 2 seconds. Driving and parking Rseventh segment, a continuous warning tone sounds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Roll-back warning PARKTRONIC automatically monitors the area behind the vehicle if the vehicle begins to roll backwards without reverse gear engaged, e.g. after stopping on an uphill gradient. Warning display for the left-hand rear area in the left-hand exterior mirror If PARKTRONIC recognizes an obstacle at a : Warning segments for the left front area distance of at most 31 in (80 cm), all the seg- ; Warning segments for the right front area ments in the warning displays light up. A continuous warning tone also sounds as the vehi- = Operational readiness symbol for the cle approaches the obstacle and for a further front area 2 seconds after the vehicle has come to a ? Warning display segments halt. A Operational readiness symbol for the rear area Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC The warning displays show the distance between the sensor and the obstacle. The warning display is divided into five yellow and two red segments for each side of the vehicle. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow indicator segments = and A are lit. There is a malfunction if only the red segments of the warning display light up (Y page 171). The position of the gear lever determines whether the front and/or rear area is moni- tored.

Z 170 Driving systems

X Press the f button. If PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the indicator lamp in the switch lights up.

Towing a trailer PARKTRONIC detects a coupled trailer if your vehicle is equipped with the corresponding electrical installations for trailer towing. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. If you use an adapter for the socket, remove it from the socket after detaching the trailer. Otherwise, PARKTRONIC remains deactivated for the Driving and parking rear area. Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is no longer required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. Driving systems 171

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. A warning tone also sounds for approximately 2 seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds. The indicator lamp of f the button lights Driving and parking up and the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning display go out. The PARKTRONIC The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or iced up. warning displays X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 268). implausible distances. X Turn the key to position 2 again in the ignition lock. For example, all the segments may be lit The license plate or other parts attached near the sensors may not even though there is no be secured correctly. obstacle present. X Check the license plate and attachment parts near the sensors for correct seating.

An external radio or ultrasonic source may be causing interference. X Check PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Rear view camera Only use the image from the rear view camera as a guide. You may otherwise damage Important safety notes your vehicle and/or the object. ! Objects that are not at ground level The rear view camera is only an aid. It cannot appear further away than they actually are, replace your own awareness of the immedi- for example: ate surroundings. You are responsible for Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind safe maneuvering, parking and pulling away. When maneuvering, parking and pulling away, Rthe drawbar of a trailer make sure that there are no persons, animals R the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch or objects in the maneuvering area. R the tail-end of a truck The rear view camera is a visual parking aid. Rslanted posts Information on operation can be found in the separate Audio 15 supplement.

Z 172 Working mode

The camera is in the middle of the roof above Working mode the high-mounted brake lamp (Y page 269). ADR (working speed governor) The rear view camera may show obstacles in perspectival distortion, incorrectly or not at General notes all. The rear view camera cannot display all objects located very near and/or under the When activated, ADR automatically increases rear bumper. It does not warn you of a colli- the engine speed to a preset speed or a speed sion, persons or objects. you have set. The area behind the vehicle is displayed in a i After a cold start, the idling speed of the mirrored fashion, as in the rear-view mirror or engine is increased automatically. If the the exterior mirrors. preset working speed is lower than the The function of the rear view camera may be increased idling speed, the working speed partially or completely impaired in the follow- is only reached once the engine has coming circumstances: pleted the warm-up phase. Driving and parking Rit is raining very heavily or snowing, or it is It is only possible to activate ADR with the foggy. vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied. Rthe parking space is located in a very dark place. The selector lever of the automatic transmission must be in position P. Rthe camera is exposed to very strong white light. White stripes may appear on the display. Activating/deactivating ADR Rthe surrounding area is illuminated with flu- orescent light. The display may flicker. Rif the temperature changes very quickly, for example if you drive into a heated garage in the winter. Rambient temperatures are very high. Rthe camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Rthe rear of the vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the position and setting checked at a specialist workshop. The rear view camera is activated when you X To activate: press upper section : of the engage reverse gear R. E switch while the engine is running. You can find information on cleaning the cam- The indicator lamp in the switch comes on. era in the "Maintenance and care" section The K indicator lamp in the instrument (Y page 269). cluster lights up or the display shows the following message: Operating speed governor active. X To deactivate: press lower section ; of the E switch while the engine is running. The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. Towing a trailer 173

ADR is automatically deactivated if: on the trailer tow hitch. This can cause dam- Ryou release the parking brake. age to the vehicle and the trailer may come Rthe brake pedal is depressed. loose during the journey. The handling may be impaired and the rear axle may be overloaded. Rthe vehicle moves. This may lead to an accident involving serious R the control unit detects a malfunction. or even fatal injury. Therefore note the following: Setting the working speed ROnly install a ball coupling that is approved for your vehicle. d parking RBefore the journey, make sure that the ball coupling is correctly installed and secured. To do this, observe the operating instructions of the ball coupling manufacturer. R

Do not make any modifications to the ball Driving an coupling or the trailer tow hitch. You must observe the operating instructions of the trailer tow hitch or ball coupling manufacturer. X Activate ADR. G WARNING X To increase: press the E button. If the ball coupling is not correctly installed X To decrease: press the F button. and secured, it could come loose while driving and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Towing a trailer Install and secure the ball coupling as descri- Notes on trailer towing bed in the ball coupling manufacturer's installation instructions. Make sure that the ball Important safety notes coupling is correctly installed and secured G WARNING before every journey. Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may G WARNING result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch When the vehicle/trailer combination begins and the rear axle. This applies especially if the to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi- ball coupling in question is longer or angled cle/trailer combination could even rollover. differently. This could seriously impair the There is a risk of an accident. driving characteristics and the trailer can come loose. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination You should only ever install a ball coupling by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle that has the permissible dimensions and that speed and do not countersteer. Apply the is designed to meet your trailer-towing brake as necessary. requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling or the trailer tow hitch. Always observe the operating instructions G provided by the manufacturers of the trailer WARNING coupling and the ball coupling. If you use a ball coupling that is not approved Couple and decouple the trailer carefully. for your vehicle, it may cause excessive strain When backing up the towing vehicle, make

Z 174 Towing a trailer

sure nobody is standing between the vehicle If you require any further explanation of the and the trailer. information contained in the Operator's Man- A trailer which is incorrectly coupled to the ual, please contact an authorized Sprinter towing vehicle could break away. A correctly dealer. coupled trailer must be positioned horizontally behind the towing vehicle. General notes Ensure that the following weights are not RObserve the legally prescribed maximum exceeded: speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in Rthe permissible noseweight the relevant country, state or Canadian Rthe permissible trailer load province. Before setting off, check the vehicle documents of the your trailer to find out Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing the permissible maximum speed. vehicle This reduces the risk of accidents. Rthe permissible gross weight of both the R Driving and parking towing vehicle and the trailer Install only an approved trailer coupling on your vehicle. Only use a ball coupling that is Rthe permissible gross combination weight approved for your vehicle and Sprinter The applicable permissible values that may trailer tow hitch. More information on the not be exceeded can be found: availability, mounting and installation of the Rin your vehicle documents trailer electrics is available at any qualified Ron the type plates for the trailer tow hitch specialist workshop. Ron the type plates for the trailer RThe turn signals on the trailer are only guar- Ron the vehicle identification plate anteed to function when incandescent (Y page 316). bulbs are used. You can obtain more information about installing the trailer electrics Where the values differ, the lowest is valid. at any qualified specialist workshop. You will find values approved by the manu- RThe trailer coupling is one of the most facturer on the identification plates and those important vehicle parts with regard to road for the towing vehicle in the "Permissible safety. The notes on operation, care and trailer loads and trailer drawbar noseweights" maintenance issued by the manufacturer Y section ( page 177). should be observed. Your vehicle behaves differently with a trailer RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suita- than without one. ble for installing detachable trailer cou- The vehicle/trailer combination: plings. Ris heavier RDo not attach rented trailer tow hitches or Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi- other detachable trailer tow hitches to the ent-climbing capability bumper. Rhas an increased braking distance RMinimize the risk of damage to the ball cou- Ris more susceptible to strong crosswinds pling. If you do not require the ball coupling, remove it from the ball coupling recess. Rrequires more sensitive steering Weight information can be found in the “Per- Rhas a larger turning circle missible trailer and drawbar noseweights” This may impair the handling characteristics. section (Y page 177). When towing a trailer, always adjust your i speed to suit the road and weather condi- The height of the ball neck changes tions. Drive carefully. Maintain a safe dis- according to the load on the vehicle. If this tance. Towing a trailer 175

is case, use a trailer with a height-adjusta- overrun. Then, increase the brake force ble trailer drawbar. quickly. RThe figures for the gradient climbing capa- Driving tips bilities from a standstill refer to sea level. The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ When driving in mountainous areas, note trailer combination depends on the type of that the power output of the engine, and trailer. Before setting off, check the vehicle with it its gradient climbing capability, documents of the your trailer to find out the decrease with increasing altitude. permissible maximum speed. Observe the legally prescribed maximum speed for vehi- Coupling up a trailer cle/trailer combinations in the relevant country, state or Canadian province. ! Do not connect the trailer's brake system When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling (if featured) to the hydraulic brake system characteristics will be different in comparison of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equip- to when driving without a trailer and it will ped with an anti-lock brake system. Doing Driving and parking consume more fuel. so will result in a loss of function of the On long, steep downhill slopes you must brake systems of both the vehicle and the select shift range 3, 2 or 1 in good time. trailer. i This also applies if cruise control is activated. This enables you to utilize the engine's braking effect and you do not need to brake so heavily to keep the correct speed, which protects the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need to brake additionally, to not depress the brake pedal constantly, but periodically. Trailer coupled ready for use Driving tips X Make sure the selector lever of the auto- If the trailer begins to swing from side to side: matic transmission is in position P. X Apply the parking brake of the vehicle. X Do not accelerate. X Close all doors. X Do not counter-steer. X Position the trailer horizontally behind your X Brake if necessary. vehicle. i You can reduce the risk of the trailer i The height of the ball neck changes swinging and rocking by retrofitting anti- according to the load on the vehicle. In this roll bars or trailer stability programs. More case, use a trailer with a height-adjustable information is available from your author- trailer drawbar. ized Sprinter Dealer. X RMaintain a greater distance than you would Couple the trailer. when driving without towing a trailer. X Establish all electrical and other connec- RAvoid sudden braking. Apply the brakes tions to the trailer. When doing so, hook the gently at first to allow the trailer brake to breakaway cable of the trailer into eyelet : on the ball coupling.

Z 176 Towing a trailer

X Remove the objects that are preventing the and get used to the new handling charac- trailer from rolling, e.g. wheel chocks. teristics. X Release the trailer parking brake. RBefore driving, check: - that the trailer tow hitch and ball cou- i The subharness of the vehicle has a cable pling are secure connection to the brake lamp indicator lamp. - that the safety switch for a braked trailer

rking is functioning properly Observe the maximum permissible trailer - that the safety chains are secure and not dimensions (width and length). damaged Most federal states and all Canadian provin- - that the electrical connections are ces require by law: secure R safety chains between the towing vehicle - that the lights are working and the trailer. The chains should be cross- - that the wheels are in good order and the wound under the trailer drawbar. They must Driving and pa tire pressure is correct be fastened to the vehicle's trailer cou- R pling, not to the bumper or the axle. Adjust the exterior mirrors to provide an unobstructed view of the rear section of the Leave enough slack in the chains. This trailer. allows you to drive round tight corners. RIf the trailer has electronically controlled Ra separate brake system for certain types brakes, pull the vehicle/trailer combina- of trailer. tion away carefully. Brake manually using R a safety switch for braked trailers. Find out the brake controller and check that the the specific requirements according to the brakes are working. applicable laws. RSecure the load on the trailer according to If the trailer detaches from the towing vehi- the applicable specifications and current cle, the safety switch applies the trailer's standards on securing loads (Y page 242). brakes. RWhen driving with a trailer, check at regular intervals that the load is secured and that Towing a trailer the brakes and lights are working. RBear in mind that the handling will be less There are numerous legal requirements con- stable when towing a trailer than when driv- cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed ing without one. Avoid sudden steering restrictions. Make sure your vehicle/trailer movements. combination complies with local laws. This RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, not only means where you live, but also any- accelerates more slowly and has a where you are driving to. Information is avail- decreased gradient climbing capability and able from the police and local authorities. a longer braking distance. Observe the following when towing a trailer: It is more susceptible to crosswinds and RPractice driving around bends, stopping requires cautious steering. and backing up at a place where there is no RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but traffic. This enables you to gain experience rather moderately at first so that the trailer can activate its brakes. Then increase the force on the brake pedal. RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly shifts between gears when driving on Towing a trailer 177

inclines, restrict the shift range. Select shift X Apply the parking brake of the trailer. range 4, 3, 2 or 1. X In addition, secure the trailer against rolling Driving in a low gear and at a low speed away with a wheel chock or similar object. reduces the risk of damaging the engine. X Remove the trailer cable and safety chains RWhen driving on a downhill gradient, shift to and decouple the trailer. a low gear and take advantage of the engine's braking effect. Avoid continuous brake application as this Permissible trailer loads and trailer may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if drawbar noseweights installed, the trailer brakes. Weight information RIf the coolant temperature increases dra- matically while the air-conditioning system ! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehi- is switched on, switch off the air-condition- cle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the per- ing system. missible gross combination weight is less Driving and parking Coolant heat can also be dissipated by than the total of the permissible gross vehi- switching the airflow and the temperature cle weight and the permissible trailer load. of the heater/air conditioning to the maxi- Exceeding the permissible gross combina- mum level. Open the windows if necessary. tion weight can lead to damage to the driv- RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention etrain, to the transmission or to the trailer to the extended length of your vehicle/ tow hitch. trailer combination. If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer relevant value for the permissible gross combination you need an additional dis- vehicle weight or the permissible trailer tance before you can return to your original load is therefore lower. In this case, the lane. trailer or the vehicle may only be partially loaded. The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated by Uncoupling a trailer adding the weight of the trailer to the weight of the load and equipment. G WARNING The maximum gross vehicle weight is vehicle- If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun specific and equipment-dependent: 5,000 lbs brake engaged, you could trap your hand (2,268 kg) or 7,500 lbs (3,402 kg). between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. The maximum permissible trailer drawbar There is a risk of injury. noseweight on the ball coupling is 500 lbs Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake (227 kg) or 750 lbs (340 kg). The actual nose- is engaged. weight may not exceed the value given on the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch or ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an the trailer. If the values vary, the lowest value engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your always applies. vehicle could be damaged by the rebound- ing of the overrun brake. The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is calculated by adding the gross weight of the X Make sure the selector lever of the auto- trailer to the gross vehicle weight including a matic transmission is in position P. driver's weight of approximately 150 lbs X Apply the parking brake of the vehicle. (68 kg). The permissible Gross Combination X Close all doors. Weight Rating is vehicle-specific and depends on the equipment level.

Z 178 Towing a trailer

When driving with a trailer, you should not (GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), the exceed the permitted Gross Combination gross combination weight rating (GCWR) Weight Rating (GCWR). and the noseweight of the trailer drawbar The permissible values, which must not be (TWR). exceeded, can be found in your vehicle documents and on the trailer tow hitch type plates for the trailer and the vehicle (Y page 316). Trailer power supply The basic values approved by the manufac- ! Incorrect wiring of the connector plug turer can also be found in the "Technical data" could, under certain circumstances, cause Y section ( page 328). If the values vary, the malfunctions in the vehicle's other elec- lowest value always applies. tronic systems. We therefore recommend having the connector plug wired at a quali- Loading a trailer fied specialist workshop. ! Utilize the maximum permissible nose- !

Driving and parking You can connect accessories with a max- weight as fully as possible. Do not allow the imum power consumption of 240 W to the weight to fall below the minimum permis- permanent power supply. sible noseweight, otherwise the trailer may You must not charge a trailer battery using come loose. the power supply. R You must distribute the load on the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with various and trailer so that the permitted maximum electrical installations for trailer towing. values for the gross vehicle weight (GVWR), Depending on your trailer, you may need an gross trailer weight (GTW) and gross com- adapter to connect the electrical system of bined weight (GCWR) as well as permitted the trailer with that of the vehicle. gross axle loads (GAWR) and noseweight The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped (TWR) of your vehicle are not exceeded. at the factory with a permanent power supply. RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball The permanent power supply is on the trailer coupling (TWR) to the rear axle load. This socket pin assignment 4. will prevent you from exceeding the permissible gross axle weight (GAWR). Note that the permanent power supply of the trailer is not switched off when the on-board RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball voltage is low. This can completely discharge coupling (TWR) to the vehicle payload. This the starter battery of your vehicle. will prevent you from exceeding the permissible gross vehicle weight (GVWR). The turn signals on the trailer are only guaranteed to function when incandescent bulbs Checking the vehicle and trailer weight are used. Further information on the electrical equip- R Make sure the weights of the towing vehicle ment currently installed on your vehicle and and the trailer comply with the maximum on installing trailer electrics can be obtained permissible values. Have the vehicle/ at any qualified specialist workshop. trailer combination weighed on a calibrated weighbridge. The vehicle/trailer combination consists of the towing vehicle including the driver, passengers and load, as well as the loaded trailer. RCheck the maximum permissible gross axle weight rating of the front and rear axles 179

Useful information ...... 180 Important safety notes ...... 180 Instrument cluster ...... 180 On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons) ...... 182 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) ...... 184 Display messages ...... 197 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster ...... 217 On-board computer and displays 180 Instrument cluster

Useful information You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving This Operator's Manual describes all models when operating the on-board computer. as well as standard and optional equipment of The on-board computer display only shows your vehicle that were available at the time of messages and warnings from certain sys- going to print. Country-specific variations are tems. You should therefore make sure your possible. Note that your vehicle may not be vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the equipped with all of the described functions. operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, This also applies to systems and functions stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying relevant to safety. attention to road and traffic conditions. Then Read the information on qualified specialist consult a qualified specialist workshop. workshops (Y page 25). Instrument cluster Important safety notes Overview

G WARNING On-board computer and displays If you are driving and reach through the steering wheel to operate the adjustment knob, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only operate the adjustment knobs when the vehicle is stationary. Do not reach through the steering wheel when driving.

G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic : Instrument cluster on vehicles without situation permits. If you are not sure that this steering wheel buttons is possible, park the vehicle paying attention ; Instrument cluster in vehicles with steer- to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ing-wheel buttons ment when the vehicle is stationary. = Adjustment buttons f/g ? Reset button 9 G WARNING A Service button Ë (engine oil level check) If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- B Menu button 4 functioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The You will find a full overview of the instrument operating safety of your vehicle may be cluster in the "At a glance" section impaired. There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 34). Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Instrument cluster 181

The display in the instrument cluster is acti- On vehicles without steering wheel buttons vated when you: (Y page 182) and on vehicles with steering Y Ropen the driver's door wheel buttons ( page 187), the outside temperature display is in the display. Rturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock Changes in the outside temperature are dis- R 9 press the reset button played after a short delay. Rswitch on the lights The display switches off automatically after approximately 30 seconds if: Speedometer Rthe key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. The speed can also be shown in the display. Rthe vehicle lighting is not switched on. You can find information on the digital speedometer for vehicles without steering wheel buttons under (Y page 182) and for vehicles Instrument lighting with steering wheel buttons under (Y page 187). When the lights are switched on, you can adjust the brightness of the instrument clus- i In some countries, a warning sounds ter lighting using the f and g buttons. when the vehicle reaches the maximum On-board computer and displays X To brighten: press the f button. speed limit, e.g. at 75 mph (120 km/h). X To dim: press the g button. i Vehicles with automatic headlamp mode: Trip odometer the instrument lighting also adapts to auto- X To reset: make sure that the display is matic headlamp mode. showing the trip odometer if you have a vehicle with steering wheel buttons (Y page 187). Tachometer X Press and hold the 9 reset button until the ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as trip odometer is reset to 0.0. this could damage the engine. H Environmental note Fuel gauge Avoid driving at high engine speeds. This unnecessarily increases the fuel consumption of your vehicle and harms the environment as a result of increased emissions.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. To protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature : Fuel gage on vehicles without steering You should pay special attention to road con- wheel buttons ditions when temperatures are around the ; Fuel gage on vehicles with steering wheel freezing point. buttons

Z 182 On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons)

= Fuel filler flap location indicator t: the Further information on DEF consumption can fuel filler flap is on the left-hand side. Fuel be found in the "Service products and filling filler flap location indicator u: the fuel capacity" section (Y page 320). filler flap is on the right-hand side ? Reserve fuel warning lamp (Y page 224) On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons) DEF gauge Operating the on-board computer Vehicles without steering wheel but- General notes tons The on-board computer is activated as soon If the supply of DEF is less than 1.5 US gal as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition å (5.5 l), the indicator lamp lights up and lock. the ¯ dEF Chk display message appears. The on-board computer shows vehicle infor- If the supply of DEF falls below the reserve mation and settings in the display. range of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the å indicator You can control the display and the settings in

On-board computer and displays lamp lights up and the ¯ StArtS RExx the on-board computer using the adjustment display message appears. In the display, xx buttons on the instrument cluster. corresponds to the number of possible remaining engine starts (16 to 0 ). Standard display When the number of remaining engine starts is 0 the engine management prevents the vehicle being driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h). The multifunction display shows the StArtS IdLE message and you hear a warning tone sequence. Further information on DEF consumption can be found in the "Service products and filling capacity" section (Y page 320). : Odometer ; Trip odometer Vehicles with steering wheel buttons = Clock ? Outside temperature or digital speedom- If the supply of DEF is less than 1.5 US gal eter (5.5 l), the Check Diesel Exhaust Fluid A Y See Operator's Manual message is shown Fuel gage ( page 181) in the display. B Selector lever position or current shift If the DEF supply falls below the reserve range range with automatic transmission Y of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the å XX starts ( page 142) remaining message is displayed. In the dis- X To call up the standard display: turn the play, XX corresponds to the number of possi- key to position 2 in the ignition lock. ble remaining engine starts (16 to 0 ). X Press the 4 menu button for longer than When the number of remaining engine starts 1 second. is 0 the engine management prevents the The information shown in the display vehicle from being driven at a speed exceed- changes from the outside temperature to ing 5 mph (8 km/h). The multifunction display the digital speedometer. shows the Idle Mode message and you hear a warning tone sequence. On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons) 183

Menus in the on-board computer Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist Overview X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition If you wish to exit a menu and go to the stand- lock. ard display: X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until X Press the 4 menu button for longer than the _ indicator lamp flashes and the on 1 second. or OFF message appears in the display. or X Use the f or g button to switch High- X Do not press any button for 10 seconds. beam Assist on/off. The display accepts the changed settings. Using the f, g, 4 or 9 adjustment but- Switching the daytime running lamps tons, you can select the following functions: on/off RCalling up the service due date If you switch the daytime running lamps on, (Y page 258) the daytime running lamps will automatically RChecking the oil level (Y page 250) light up when the engine is running. RChecking the DEF supply (Y page 182) For safety reasons, it is only possible to On-board computer and displays RPreselecting/setting the auxiliary heating change this setting when the vehicle is sta- on switch-on time (Y page 124) tionary. The factory setting is in countries in which daytime running lamp mode or day- R Y Tire pressure monitor ( page 291) time running lamps are mandatory. RSetting the time (Y page 183) X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition R Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist lock. (Y page 192) X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until R Setting the daytime running lamps the L indicator lamp flashes and the on Y ( page 92) or OFF message appears in the display. X f g Setting the time Press the or button to activate or deactivate the daytime running lamps. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition i lock. USA only: T L X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until If you turn the light switch to or , the hours figure flashes. the corresponding light switches on. If you turn the light switch to Ã, the daytime X f g Press the or button to set the hour. running lamps remain switched on. X 9 Press the reset button. Canada only: The minute display flashes. If you turn the light switch to L, the low- X f g Press the or button to set the minute. beam headlamps switch on. If you turn the i If you keep the f or g button pressed, light switch to T or Ã, the daytime the value will change continuously. running lamps remain switched on.

Z 184 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)

On-board computer (vehicles with ; W and X steering wheel buttons) RSelects submenus Operating the on-board computer RChanges values Overview RAdjusts the volume Using the telephone 6 Accepts a call ~ Ends a call

= Scrolls from one menu to another V Forwards U Back Scrolls within a menu 9 Forwards : Back On-board computer and displays

Controls You can think of the order of the menus and of the functions within a menu as a circle: X To activate the on-board computer: turn X Press the V or U button repeatedly. the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. The menus are displayed one after the The on-board computer shows vehicle infor- other. mation and settings in the display. X Press the : or 9 button repeatedly. You can control the display and the settings in The functions in the menu/submenu are the on-board computer with the buttons on displayed one after the other. the steering wheel. Several functions are combined thematically : Display in the menus. The display changes when you press one of On-board computer operation the buttons on the steering wheel. You can use a function to call up information or to change the settings for the vehicle. For example, the AUDIO menu has functions for controlling the radio or CD player. Unlike in other menus, you will find submenus in the Settings menu. For information on how to use these submenus, see the "Set- tings menu" section (Y page 188) . The number of menus depends on your vehicle's equipment. i Operation of the audio equipment using the steering wheel buttons and making settings using the AUDIO menu only function On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 185 with Sprinter audio equipment. If you are using audio equipment from another manufacturer, the described functions may be restricted or not available at all. On-board computer and displays

Z 186 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)

Menu overview Diagrams On-board computer and displays

This is what the displays look like when you scroll through the menus.

Generic terms Operation The illustration shows the menus on a vehicle ? Settings menu (Y page 188) with Audio 15. On Sound 5/Audio 20, the on-board com- A Trip computer menu (Y page 195) puter always shows the AUDIO and TEL (tele- B Telephone menu (Y page 196) phone) menus in English. This is the case even if a different language is selected for the dis- i play. The generic terms in the tabular overview should make orientation easier for you. Operation However, they are not always shown on the : Operation menu (Y page 186) display. RStandard display RCalling up the service due date Operation menu (Y page 258) RTire pressure monitor Overview (Y page 291) You can select the following functions in the RChecking the engine oil level Operation menu by pressing the 9 (Y page 250) or : button on the steering wheel: ; Audio menu (Y page 187) = Message memory menu (Y page 198) On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 187

RDisplaying the trip odometer and odometer Using the steering wheel buttons (standard display) (Y page 187) X Press the V or U button repeatedly RDisplaying the coolant temperature until the standard display is shown. (Y page 187) X Press the 9 or : button to select the RCalling up the service due date coolant temperature. (Y page 258) The temperature displayed may climb to R Tire pressure monitor (Y page 291) 250 ‡ (120 †) when the vehicle is being RChecking the oil level (Y page 250) driven in normal conditions and if the coolant contains the correct concentration of corro- ter and displays Standard display sion inhibitor and antifreeze. At high outside temperatures and when driving in mountain-

ous terrain, the coolant temperature may rise compu to the end of the scale.

Audio menu General notes On-board Use the functions in the Audio menu to operate the audio equipment when switched on. i Operation of the audio equipment using : Odometer the steering wheel buttons and making set- ; Trip odometer tings using the AUDIO menu only function = Outside temperature or digital speedom- with Sprinter audio equipment. If you are eter using audio equipment from another man- ? Clock ufacturer, the described functions may be A Selector lever position or current shift restricted or not available at all. range (Y page 142) If no audio equipment is switched on, you will In the basic setting, the odometer and the trip see the message AUDIO off. odometer are shown in the upper part of the display. This is referred to as the standard Selecting a radio station display. Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the standard display is shown.

Displaying the coolant temperature

: Reception frequency ; Waveband or waveband with memory preset number

Z 188 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)

Using the steering wheel buttons RInstrument cluster (Y page 189) X Switch on the audio equipment (see the - Units and language settings separate operating instructions). - Status bar settings X Press the V or U button repeatedly RTime(Y page 191) until the station selected appears in the RLighting (Y page 192) display. - Switching surround lighting on/off X 9 : Press the or button to select the - Switching the daytime running lamps desired station. on/off i You can only store new stations on the - Setting the exterior lighting delayed audio system itself. See the separate oper- switch-off ating instructions. - Activating/deactivating Highbeam You can also operate the audio equipment Assist in the same way as usual. RVehicle - Setting the radio station selection Operating the CD player - Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity On-board computer and displays RStationary heating or auxiliary heating (Y page 124) RConvenience (Y page 194) - Key-dependent settings i For safety reasons, it is not possible to reset all of the functions while the vehicle is : Current CD (with CD changer) in motion. For example, in the Lighting ; Current track submenu, the Daytime runn. lamps function remains unchanged. Using the steering wheel buttons X Switch on the audio equipment and select Resetting all settings the CD player (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the settings for the current CD appear in the display. X Press the 9 or : button to select a CD track. Settings menu When the Settings message is displayed, Settings menu you can reset all functions of the submenu to Introduction the factory settings. In the Settings menu, the following options and submenus are available: RResetting all settings RResetting the functions of a submenu On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 189

Using the steering wheel buttons Selecting submenus X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the display. X Press and hold the 9 reset button for approximately 3 seconds. You will see a message in the display prompting you to press the 9 reset button again to confirm. You will see the collection of submenus. X Press the 9 reset button again. There are more submenus than can be dis- The functions in all submenus are reset to played at the same time. the factory settings. Using the steering wheel buttons i If you want to retain the settings, do not X Press the V or U button repeatedly press the 9 reset button a second time. until the Settings menu appears in the The Settings menu appears again after display. approximately 5 seconds. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- On-board computer and displays menu selection. Resetting the functions of a submenu X Press the W or X button to select a You can individually reset the functions of submenu. each submenu to the factory settings. The submenu currently selected is highlighted. Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the 9 button to select the func- X Press the V or U button repeatedly tion within a submenu. until the Settings menu appears in the X Change the setting by pressing the W or display. X button. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- The changed setting is saved. menu selection. X Press the W or X button to select a Instrument cluster submenu submenu. X Press and hold the 9 reset button for Selecting the unit for temperature approximately 3 seconds. You will see a message in the display prompting you to press the 9 reset button again to confirm. X Press the 9 reset button again. All functions in the submenu are reset to the factory settings. Using the steering wheel buttons i If you want to retain the settings, do not press the 9 reset button a second time. X Press the V or U button repeatedly The Settings menu appears again after until the Settings menu appears in the approximately 5 seconds. display. X Press the 9 button to switch to the submenu selection.

Z 190 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)

X Press the W or X button to select the Using the steering wheel buttons Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the V or U button repeatedly X Press the 9 button to select the Tem‐ until the Settings menu appears in the perat. function. display. The selection marker is on the current set- X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- ting. menu selection. X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the W or X button to select the unit for all messages in the display: °C Inst. cluster submenu. (degrees Celsius) or °F (degrees Fahren- X Press the 9 button to select the Trip heit). function. Selecting the unit for the digital speed- The selection marker is on the current set- ometer ting. X Press the W or X button to select the unit for all messages in the display: km (kilometers) or miles .

On-board computer and displays Selecting the language

Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the display. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- The selected range of languages shown is just menu selection. an example. The range of languages available X Press the W or X button to select the is specific to each country. Inst. cluster submenu. Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the 9 button to select the Dig. X Press the V or U button repeatedly speedo. function. until the Settings menu appears in the The selection marker is on the current set- display. ting. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- X Press the W or X button to select the menu selection. unit for the digital speedometer: km/h or X W X mph . Press the or button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. Selecting the unit for distance X Press the 9 button to select the Lan‐ guage function. The selection marker is on the current setting. X Press the W or X button to set the language for all messages. On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 191

Selecting the display for the status bar X Press the 9 button to select the Tire pres. function. The selection marker is on the current setting. X Press the W or X button to select the unit for the tire pressure in the display: bar or psi.

Using the steering wheel buttons Clock/Date submenu X Press the V or U button repeatedly Setting the time until the Settings menu appears in the display. X Press the 9 button to switch to the submenu selection. X Press the W or X button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. On-board computer and displays X Press the 9 button to select the Select disp. function. Using the steering wheel buttons The selection marker is on the current set- X ting. Press the V or U button repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the X Press the W or X button to select display. whether to display the outside temperature X or the speed (digital speedometer). Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- The selected display is then shown perma- menu selection. nently in the lower part of the display. X Press the W or X button to select the Clock/Date submenu. Selecting the unit for the tire pressure X Press the 9 button to select Set clock Hours or Minutes . X Press the W or X button to set the values. Selecting the time format

Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the display. X Press the 9 button to switch to the submenu selection. Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the V or U button repeatedly Inst. cluster submenu. until the Settings menu appears in the display. X Press the 9 button to switch to the submenu selection.

Z 192 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)

X Press the W or X button to select the Switching the daytime running lamps on/ Clock/Date submenu. off X Press the 9 button to select the 12/24 h function. The selection marker is on the current setting. X Press the W or X button to select the 12 h or 24 h clock format.

Lighting submenu If you switch the daytime running lamps function to On, the daytime running lamps will Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist automatically light up when the engine is running. For safety reasons, it is only possible to change this setting when the vehicle is stationary. The factory setting is On in countries

On-board computer and displays in which daytime running lamp mode or daytime running lamps are mandatory . Using the steering wheel buttons Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button repeatedly X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the until the Settings menu appears in the display. display. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- X Press the 9 button to switch to the submenu selection. menu selection. X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the W or X button to select the Lighting submenu. Lighting submenu. X Press the 9 button to select the Day‐ X Press the 9 button to select the High‐ time runn. lamps function. beam Assist function. The selection marker is on the current set- The selection marker is on the current setting. ting. X Press the W or X button to switch X Press the W or X button to switch the daytime running lamps On or Off. Highbeam Assist On or Off . i If you turn the light switch to T or i For safety reasons, it is not possible to L, the corresponding lamp switches on. reset the Highbeam Assist function to the If you turn the light switch to Ã, the factory settings during a journey. You will daytime running lamps remain switched see the following message in the display: on. Setting only possible at stand‐ i For safety reasons, it is not possible to still. reset the Daytime runn. lamps function For further information about Highbeam to the factory setting while the vehicle is in Y Assist, see ( page 96). motion. You will see the following message in the display: Setting only possible at standstill. On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 193

Switching surround lighting on or off In the Headlamps submenu, you can set whether and for how long you wish the exterior lighting to remain on after closing the doors. Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the display. Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- X Press the V or U button repeatedly menu selection. until the Settings menu appears in the X Press the W or X button to select the display. Lighting submenu. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- X Press the 9 button to select the Head‐ menu selection. lamps function. X Press the W or X button to select the The selection marker is on the current set- Lighting submenu. ting. On-board computer and displays X Press the 9 button to select the Loc. X Press the W or X button to select lighting function. whether and for how long you wish the The selection marker is on the current set- exterior lighting to remain on. ting. If you have set the delayed switch-off and X Press the W or X button to switch switch off the engine, the following remain lit: the surround lighting On or Off . Rthe parking lamps If you switch the surround lighting to On, the Rthe tail lamps following lamps light up in the dark after you Rthe license plate lamps have unlocked the vehicle using the key: Rthe fog lamps Rthe parking lamps Rthe tail lamps i You can reactivate this function by open- Rthe license plate lamps ing a door within 10 minutes. Rthe fog lamps If, after switching off the engine, you do not open a door or you close an open door, the The surround lighting automatically switches exterior lighting switches off after off after 40 seconds or if you: 60 seconds. Ropen the driver's door Rinsert the key into the ignition lock Vehicle submenu Rlock the vehicle using the key Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity Setting the exterior lighting delayed switch-off

You can use the Wipe sensor function to set the sensitivity of the rain/ light sensor.

Z 194 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)

Using the steering wheel buttons For further information about Blind Spot Y X Press the V or U button repeatedly Assist; see ( page 163). until the Settings menu appears in the display. Heating submenu X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- Selecting the switch-on time for the aux- menu selection. iliary heating X Press the W or X button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the 9 button to select the Wipe sensor function. The selection marker is on the current setting. X Press the W or X button to adjust the sensitivity of the rain/light sensor. Using the steering wheel buttons The levels are graded as follows: X Press the V or U button repeatedly

On-board computer and displays RLevel 1: high sensitivity – wiping begins until the Settings menu appears in the even in light rain display. RLevel 2: moderate sensitivity X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- RLevel 3: low sensitivity – wiping only menu selection. begins in heavy rain X Press the W or X button to select the Heating submenu. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist X Press the 9 button to switch to the Aux. heat. submenu selection (Y page 124). The selection marker is on the current setting. X Press the W or X button to set the desired switch-on time. Use the Timer off setting to deactivate Using the steering wheel buttons automatic switch-on. X Press the V or U button repeatedly X Press button V. until the Settings menu appears in the The switch-on time is selected. display. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- Convenience submenu menu selection. X Press the W or X button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the 9 button to select the Blind Spot Assist function. The selection marker is on the current setting. X Press the W or X button to switch The Key function allows you to define whether Blind Spot Assist On or Off . settings for some submenus are stored with a key dependence. On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 195

This function pertains to the Inst. cluster = Average speed (instrument cluster) menu, the Lighting ? Average fuel consumption menu and the Vehicle menu. Using the steering wheel buttons Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button to select X Press the V or U button repeatedly After start. until the Settings menu appears in the or display. X Press the 9 or : button to select X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- After reset. menu selection. X Press the W or X button to select the The values in the After start submenu Convenience submenu. refer to the start of the journey. The values in the After reset submenu are calculated X Press the 9 button to select the Key from the last time the trip computer was function. reset. The selection marker is on the current setting. The After start trip computer function is automatically reset if: X Press the W or X button to activate R On-board computer and displays or deactivate key dependency. the ignition has been switched off for more than 4 hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. Trip computer menu R9,999 miles have been exceeded. After reset General notes The trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or You can call up or reset statistical data for the 99,999 miles. vehicle in the Trip computer menu. i If you turn the key to position 0 in the i When you call up the trip computer again, ignition lock or remove it, all the values are it displays the last function called up. reset after approximately four hours. The units of the statistical information dis- The values will not be reset if you turn the played are set permanently for each spe- key back to position 1 or 2 during this time. cific country, and are therefore independ- ent of the units selected in the Settings Calling up the range menu. Using the steering wheel buttons Trip computer "After start" or "After X Press the V or U button to select reset" After start. X Press the 9 or : button to select Range. The approximate distance which can be covered with the tank's current contents and your current style of driving is shown. i If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the 7 Please refuel Example: "After start" trip computer message is shown instead of the range. : Distance ; Time

Z 196 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)

Resetting the trip computer X Press the V or U button on the steering wheel to select the TEL menu. Using the steering wheel buttons X When Please enter PIN: appears in the X Press the V or U button to select display, enter the PIN using the mobile After start. phone or audio equipment. X Press the 9 or : button to select the The mobile phone will search for a network. function you would like to reset. The display remains blank during this time. X Press and hold the 9 reset button until the You will see the mobile phone operational values are reset to "0". readiness display once the mobile phone has found a network. i Telephone menu You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones and connecting Introduction mobile phones via Bluetooth® at any qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING i If you operate information systems and com- If the mobile phone operational readiness

On-board computer and displays munication equipment integrated in the vehi- symbol goes out, your vehicle is outside of cle while driving, you will be distracted from the transmission and reception range. traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Accepting a call Only operate the equipment when the traffic X Press the 6 button on the steering situation permits. If you are not sure that this wheel to accept an incoming call. is possible, park the vehicle paying attention The display shows the call duration. to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Rejecting or ending a call You must observe the legal requirements of X Press ~ button on the steering wheel to the country in which you are currently driving reject or end a call. when operating a mobile phone in the vehicle. The caller then hears the engaged tone. If it is permitted to operate a mobile phone The display shows the mobile phone opera- while the vehicle is in motion, only operate it tional readiness symbol again. when road and traffic conditions permit. If you have connected a mobile phone to the Dialing a number from the phone book Sprinter hands-free system, you can operate it using the functions in the TEL menu. You can enter new telephone numbers into X Switch on the mobile phone (see the sep- the phone book via the mobile phone (see the arate operating instructions). separate operating instructions). If your X mobile phone is able to receive calls, you can Switch on the audio equipment (see the search for and dial a number from the phone separate operating instructions). book. X Establish a Bluetooth® connection between the mobile phone and the audio equipment (see the separate operating instructions). Display messages 197

Using the steering wheel buttons Using the steering wheel buttons X Use the V or U button to select the X Use the V or U button to select the TEL menu. TEL menu. The display shows the mobile phone opera- The display shows the mobile phone operational readiness symbol. tional readiness symbol. X Press the 9 or : button to switch to X Press the 6 button. the phone book. The display shows the most recently dialed The on-board computer reads the phone numbers or names in the redial memory. book stored on the SIM card or in the X Press the 9 or : button to select the mobile phone. This may take more than a desired name or number. minute. X To start dialing: press the 6 button. When the message is no longer displayed, The on-board computer dials the corre- reading has ended. sponding phone number. X Press the 9 or : button to select the When a connection is established, the desired name. name of the other person and/or the call or duration appear in the display. X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold or On-board computer and displays the 9 or : button longer than 1 sec- X To exit the redial memory: press the ond. ~ button. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. Using the steering wheel buttons Display messages X To start dialing: press the 6 button. Notes on display messages The on-board computer dials the corresponding phone number. Important safety notes When a connection is established, the G WARNING name of the other person and/or the call No information will be displayed if either the duration appear in the display. instrument cluster or the display is inopera- X To exit the phone book: press the ~ tive. button. As a result, you will not be able to see warning and indicator lamps or information about the Redialing driving conditions, such as speed or outside The on-board computer saves the last names temperature. Driving characteristics may be or numbers dialed in the redial memory. impaired. Adjust your driving style and vehicle speed accordingly. Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

G WARNING If service work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle may be affected. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. More- over, the safety systems may no longer be

Z 198 Display messages

able to protect you or others as they are Message memory designed to do. The on-board computer only records and Always have service work carried out at a shows malfunctions and warnings from cer- qualified specialist workshop. tain systems. Therefore, make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You could otherwise i 2 If you turn the key to position in the cause an accident by driving an unsafe vehi- ignition, a display check is performed. All cle. warning/indicator lamps (except the turn The on-board computer stores certain display signal indicator lamps) and the display are messages. In the Message memory menu, activated. Before starting the journey, check that the warning and indicator lamps you can call up stored display messages. are operating correctly. Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button repeatedly Vehicles without steering wheel but- until the number of stored display mes- tons sages, e.g. 2 messages, appears in the dis- Warnings, malfunctions or additional infor- play. If no malfunctions have occurred, the No On-board computer and displays mation may also be shown in the display. The following tables show all the display mes- messages message appears. sages. A warning tone sounds with certain X Scroll through the stored display messages display messages. with the 9 or : button. X To exit the message memory menu: Vehicles with steering wheel buttons press the V or U button. The on-board computer shows warnings, mal- When you switch off the ignition, all display functions or additional information in the dis- messages are deleted from the message play. A warning tone sounds with certain dis- memory. You can only remove the key when it play messages. Display messages of a high is in the basic position. priority are shown in red. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the V, U, 9 or : button on the steering wheel or the 9 reset button. You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. These messages will continue to be shown in the display until their cause has been eliminated. The on-board computer stores certain display messages in the message memory (Y page 198). Display messages 199

Display messages on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is also displayed after 30 seconds. The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned. X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is also displayed after 30 seconds. The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or more wheels because: R a wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel oard computer and displays electronics. R

the maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units On-b has been exceeded. Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning. X Have wheels with suitable wheel electronics units installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

—— TPMS The —— message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is also displayed after 30 seconds. The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressures of the individual tires differ significantly. X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 291).

Z 200 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Err flashes for 5 seconds, the Ã indicator lamp also flashes and then lights up constantly. Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThere are no lane markings present. RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings: - It is too dark. - The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, by dirt or snow. RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision. X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

On-board computer and displays X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 149). X Clean the windshield (Y page 267), particularly in the camera's field of vision. If the Ã indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ¯ In addition, the yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp and the yellow å DEF indicator lamp light up and a warning tone dEF Chk sounds. The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant with ISO 22241. After the first message and under normal operating conditions, you can drive on for up to approximately 50 miles (80 km). Then a warning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be started another 10 times. X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Display messages 201

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¯ In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds. dEF Chk The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l). After the message appears for the first time, and under normal driving conditions, the remaining DEF supply will last for approximately 1000 miles (1600 km). After that, the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark is reached. A warning tone sequence sounds and the engine can then only be started another 16 times. X Add DEF (Y page 147). The å DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than 20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switched on the ignition or started the engine after refueling.

¯ In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up and a On-board computer and displays warning tone sequence sounds. StArtS RExx After the message appears for the first time, the engine can only be started another 10 times. The number of remaining engine starts XX (10 to 0) is shown in the message every time the engine is started. When the number of remaining engine starts is 0 the engine management prevents the vehicle being driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h). The Idle Mode message appears in the multifunction display. The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant with ISO 22241. X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Z 202 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¯ In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up and a warning tone sequence sounds. StArtS RExx The DEF supply has dropped below the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark. After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply will last for approximately 1000 miles (1600 km). The engine can then only be started another 16 times. The number of remaining engine starts XX (16 to 1) is shown in the message every time the engine is started. X Add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 147). The å DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than 20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switched on the ignition or started the engine after refueling.

On-board computer and displays ¯ If the message StArtS IdLE is displayed, you cannot drive the vehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h). StArtS IdLE X Add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 147). The å DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than 20 secondsafter the vehicle has stopped or you have switched on the ignition or started the engine after refueling.

Err flashes for 5 seconds, the _ indicator lamp also flashes and then goes out. Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily not operational or Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. Possible causes are: RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision. X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 149). X Clean the windshield (Y page 267), particularly in the camera's field of vision. If the _ indicator lamp goes out, Highbeam Assist is operational again. If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 203

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind_Err flashes for 5 seconds, the yellow indicator lamps flash in the exterior mirrors and then light up constantly. Blind Spot Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Err flashes for 5 seconds, the Ä indicator lamp also flashes and then lights up constantly. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. oard computer and displays On-b

Z 204 Display messages

Display messages on vehicles with steering wheel buttons Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ABS ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ESP®, ASR and Visit workshop BAS, as well as cruise control, have also been deactivated as a result. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating. ® ® On-board computer and displays If ESP is not operational, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ABS ABS is temporarily unavailable or is deactivated due to undervolt- Unavailable age. ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also unavailable as a result. The battery may not be being charged. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Drive for a short distance at a speed of more than 13 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages 205

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions : ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction. The engine power output may be reduced. Visit workshop G WARNING The driven wheels can spin when accelerating. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

: BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. Visit workshop G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without oard computer and displays electronic support.

The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situa- On-b tions. There is a risk of an accident. X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

: ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage. The battery may not be being charged. Unavailable G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a Brake wear Visit qualified specialist workshop. workshop

Z 206 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir. Brake fluid Visit G WARNING workshop Braking performance can be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir (Y page 254). If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark: X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

oard computer and displays X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

On-b If the brake fluid is above the MIN mark: X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

b EBD has been deactivated due to undervoltage. The battery may not be being charged. Brake force distri‐ bution G WARNING The rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

b EBD has been deactivated due to a malfunction. Brake force distri‐ G WARNING bution Visit work‐ The rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The braking shop distance can increase in emergency braking situations. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 207

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ESP ESP® has been deactivated due to a malfunction. As a result, Visit workshop cruise control has also been deactivated. Engine power output may be reduced. G WARNING If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ESP ESP® has been deactivated due to undervoltage. As a result, cruise Unavailable control has also been deactivated. oard computer and displays The battery may not be being charged. G

WARNING On-b If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Drive on with care. X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible. c Additionally, a warning tone sounds. You are driving with the parking brake applied. Parking brake X Release brake Release the parking brake (Y page 150). 7 The belt system has malfunctioned. Seatbelt sys. G WARNING Visit workshop In the event of an accident or a rapid deceleration, the seat belts either cannot protect you as intended. There is a risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible. 6 The restraint system is faulty. Restraint system G WARNING Visit workshop If the restraint system is malfunctioning, individual systems could be triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury and accidents. X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z 208 Display messages

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left-hand low beam is faulty3. X Low beam left Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 100). X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. b The right-hand low-beam headlamp is faulty3. X Low beam right Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 100). X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

3 On-board computer and displays b The left-hand cornering light is faulty . X Y Cornering lt. left Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 100). b The right-hand cornering light is faulty3. X Y Cornering lt. right Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 100). b The automatic headlamp feature is active: the light switch is in the Ã position and you have forgotten to remove the key. Lights on auto‐ X Remove the key from the ignition lock. matic. Remove key b The left-hand turn signal is faulty. X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 102) or Turn signal left rear (Y page 103) indicator lamp. b The right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 102) or Turn signal right rear (Y page 103) indicator lamp. b The left brake lamp is faulty3. X Y Brake lamp left Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 103). b The right brake lamp is faulty3. X Y Brake lamp right Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 103).

3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turn signals. Display messages 209

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty3. This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Third brake lamp X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible. b The left high-beam headlamp is faulty3. X Y High beam left Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 100). b The right high-beam headlamp is faulty3. X Y High beam right Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 100). b A license plate lamp is faulty3. X Y License plate lamp Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 103). oard computer and displays You have forgotten to switch off the lights when leaving the vehi-

b On-b cle. Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to $. b The left-hand front fog lamp is faulty.3 X Foglamp front left Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. b The right-hand front fog lamp is faulty3. X Foglamp front right Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear foglamp is faulty3. X Y Rear foglamp Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 103). b The front left parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3. X Y Parking lamp front Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 100). left b The front right parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3. X Y Parking lamp front Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 100). right b A reversing lamp is faulty3. X Y Reverse lamp Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 103).

3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turn signals. Z 210 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left-hand tail lamp is faulty.3 X Y Tail lamp left Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 103). b The right-hand tail lamp is faulty.3 X Y Tail lamp right Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 103). b A perimeter lamp is faulty.3 X Y Perim. lamps Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 105). Highbeam Assist Highbeam Assist is faulty. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. oard computer and displays Highbeam Assist Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. temporarily Possible causes are: On-b unavailable RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision. X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 149). X Clean the windshield (Y page 267), particularly in the camera's field of vision. If the malfunction has been rectified, the Highbeam Assist Now Available message appears.

3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turn signals. Display messages 211

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Exhaust Filter: The automatic regeneration of the diesel particle filter is not suf- Drive at high ficient or has malfunctioned. engine speed. See X Drive at an engine speed of above 2000 rpm until the display Oper. Manual message disappears. If the display message does not go out after approximately 20 minutes, have the malfunction rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Check Diesel The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply has dropped below Exhaust Fluid See 1.5 US gal (5.5 l). Operator's Manual After the message appears for the first time, and under normal driving conditions, the remaining DEF supply will last for approximately 1000 miles (1600 km).

After that, the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark is reached. A warning On-board computer and displays tone sequence sounds and the engine can then only be started another 16 times. X Add DEF supply (Y page 147). After topping up, the system check takes approximately 20 seconds. The display message then disappears.

Check Diesel If the yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp lights up as well, Exhaust Fluid See the DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or not compliant Operator's Manual with ISO 22241. After the first message and under normal operating conditions, you can drive on for up to approximately 50 miles (80 km). Then a warning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be started another 10 times. Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. å The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply has dropped below the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark. XX starts remaining After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply will last for approximately 1000 miles (1600 km). The engine can then only be started another 16 times. The number of remaining engine starts XX (16 to 0) is shown in the message every time the engine is started. X Add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 147). The display message disappears no more than 20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switched on the ignition or started the engine after refueling.

Z 212 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions å The vehicle cannot be driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h). Idle Mode The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant with ISO 22241. X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission relevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can damage the exhaust gas aftertreatment. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ? The coolant temperature is too high. If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads, Coolant Stop, turn On-board computer and displays the coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is engine off switched on or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for example, driving in mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer. X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message continues to be shown. * The coolant level is too low. Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine Coolant Check level could overheat and be damaged. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off the engine and let it cool down. X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes (Y page 325). X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 7 The fuel level has fallen into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 145). Reserve fuel Drive to a filling stat. : The water that has collected in the water separator has reached the maximum level. Water in fuel X Drain the water separator (Y page 255). Visit workshop Display messages 213

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 The oil level is too low. X Check the oil level the next time you refuel (Y page 250), and Engine oil Add 1.0 add oil. quart(Canada: 1.0 liter) 4 You want to check the engine oil level even though the engine is still running. Engine oil level X Switch off the engine. Not when eng. run‐ X ning Check the oil level (Y page 250). 4 You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter.

Engine oil level oard computer and displays X Check the oil level (Y page 250). Reduce oil level X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted at the next qualified specialist workshop. On-b X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified at the next qualified specialist workshop. 4 There is not enough or no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage. Engine oil level X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road Stop, turn engine and traffic conditions. off X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 251). X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop. 4 There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display. X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist Oil sensor Visit workshop. workshop

Z 214 Display messages

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise control Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction. Visit workshop X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Lane Keep. Assist and the Ã indicator lamp lights up. Temporarily Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Unavailable Possible causes are: RThere are no lane markings present. RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings: oard computer and displays - It is too dark. - The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, by On-b dirt or snow. RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision. X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 149). X Clean the windshield (Y page 267), particularly in the camera's field of vision. If the Ã indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.

Lane Keep. Assist Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. Inoperative X Have Lane Keeping Assist checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is faulty. Inoperative X Have Blind Spot Assist checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is faulty. tion Assist Inoper‐ X Have COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST checked at a qualified ative specialist workshop. Display messages 215

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Recognition by the radar sensor system can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rit is snowing or raining heavily Rthere is interference from other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line X Clean the radar sensor system area.

Intervention The d indicator lamp also flashes in the instrument cluster. oard computer and displays Crosswind Assist Crosswind Assist has intervened perceptibly. On-b Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire pres. Adjust The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressures pres. of the individual tires differ significantly. O X Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity and correct it if necessary (Y page 291).

Tire pres. The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned. monitor inopera‐ X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a tive qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pres. The tire pressure monitor function is temporarily unavailable due monitor currently to radio interference or undervoltage. unavailable X Once the causes have been remedied, the tire pressure monitor is automatically activated.

Tire pres.- The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or more monitor inopera‐ wheels because: tive No wheel sen‐ Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel sors electronics. Rthe maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units has been exceeded. Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning. X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 216 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check tire(s) The pressure of one or more tires has dropped significantly. If the tire pressure monitor has detected the affected wheel, the wheel O position is also displayed. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Check the tires. X Repair or change the wheel if necessary (Y page 305). X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 291). The display message disappears automatically after driving for a few minutes with the corrected tire pressure.

oard computer and displays Warning Tire defect One or more tires is losing air rapidly. If the tire pressure monitor O has detected the affected wheel, the wheel position is also dis-

On-b played. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers, paying attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Repair or change the wheel (Y page 305).

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defective alternator or a torn poly-V-belt. Battery/Alterna‐ X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road tor Visit workshop and traffic conditions. X Check the poly-V-belt. X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not at all. Electrical Step X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step. X Open or close the sliding door again. X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push the step in manually (Y page 74). Before stepping out, remind the passengers that the step is missing. Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 217

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 1 You are already driving at walking pace, even though the hood is not closed. Hood open X Close the hood. 9 You have not yet entered your PIN in the mobile phone. X Enter the PIN for the SIM card. Please enter PIN: ter and displays 1 You are already driving at walking pace, even though not all the doors are closed. Doors open X Close the doors. compu ¦ The washer fluid level is too low. X Add washer fluid (Y page 255). Check wash. fluid

level On-board

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The key is no longer working. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Replace key Visit workshop

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

When switching on the ignition, some systems carry out a self-test. Some indicator and warning lamps may temporarily turn on or start to flash. This is not an indication of any problem. Only when these indicator and warning lights turn on or start flashing after the engine has started or during the journey has a malfunction occurred.

Z 218 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d The yellow ASR/ G WARNING ESP® warning ESP® or ASR is intervening because at least one of the wheels has lamp flashes reached its tire grip limit. while the vehicle is in motion. Cruise control is deactivated for the duration of the intervention. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not use too much throttle. X Drive slowly.

d The yellow ASR/ ASR is deactivated. ® ESP warning G WARNING lamp is lit while the engine is The driven wheels can spin when accelerating. running. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Y

On-board computer and displays Activate ASR again. Exceptions ( page 58).

h ! :b EBD is malfunctioning or deactivated due to undervoltage or mal- The yellow ESP®, ABS function. and ASR/BAS indicator The battery may not be being charged. lamps and the red G WARNING brake system indicator lamp are lit while the The rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you apply engine is running. the brakes. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the messages in the display (Y page 197). X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 219

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The red brake There is insufficient brake fluid in the expansion tank. system indicator G WARNING lamp is lit while the engine is Braking performance can be impaired. running. There is a risk of an accident. X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the messages in the display (Y page 197). X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Check the brake fluid level in the expansion tank (Y page 254). X If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark: do not drive on! X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b When towing a G WARNING On-board computer and displays trailer: the red The brake force booster in the trailer is faulty. brake system indicator lamp is The driving and braking characteristics of your vehicle could lit while the change. There is a risk of the trailer overbraking and of you losing engine is run- control over the truck/trailer combination. ning. There is a risk of an accident. Additionally, a X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the mes- warning tone sages in the display (Y page 197). sounds. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

: The yellow ASR/ ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction. BAS indicator The engine power output may be reduced. lamp is lit while G the engine is WARNING running. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Drive on with care. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Z 220 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions : The yellow ASR/ BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. BAS indicator G WARNING lamp is lit while the engine is The brake system continues to function normally, but without running. electronic support. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. There is a risk of an accident. X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

: The yellow ASR/ ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage. BAS indicator The battery may not be being charged. lamp is lit while G the engine is WARNING On-board computer and displays running. The brake system is still available with the normal braking effect. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 221

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction or is temporarily unavail- indicator lamp is able. ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also lit while the unavailable as a result. engine is run- Self-diagnosis may not be complete, or the battery may not be ning. charging. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock, e.g. if the brakes are applied with maximum force. This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.

If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. On-board computer and displays There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Drive a short distance at a speed above 13 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the indicator lamp goes out. If the indicator lamp does not go out: X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

å The yellow DEF The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or the current indicator lamp is Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply is limiting the vehicle range. lit while the X Observe the messages in the display. engine is running. h The yellow ESP® ESP® is deactivated due to undervoltage or a malfunction. As a indicator lamp is result, cruise control has also been deactivated. lit while the Engine power output may be reduced. engine is run- The battery may not be being charged. ning. G WARNING If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents. X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the messages in the display (Y page 197). X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z 222 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The red warning The restraint systems have malfunctioned. lamp does not G WARNING go out approximately If the restraint systems are malfunctioning, individual systems 4 seconds after could be triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in the ignition is the event of an accident. switched on, or There is an increased risk of injury and accidents. it lights up again. X Drive on with care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# The red battery The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defective indicator lamp is alternator or a torn poly-V-belt. lit while the X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road engine is run- and traffic conditions. ning. On-board computer and displays X Check the poly-V-belt. X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.

# The red battery The battery is faulty. indicator lamp is X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road lit while the and traffic conditions. engine is run- X Do not continue driving under any circumstances. ning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# The yellow brake The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. pad wear indica- G WARNING tor lamp is lit after the engine Braking performance can be impaired. is started or There is a risk of an accident. while the vehicle X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a is in motion. qualified specialist workshop.

4 The yellow The oil level has dropped to the minimum level. engine oil level X Check the engine for oil loss. warning lamp is X If oil loss is detected: consult a qualified specialist workshop lit after the immediately. engine is started X or while the vehi- If no oil loss is detected: check the oil level and add engine oil Y cle is in motion. ( page 251). Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 223

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 The yellow On vehicles with a diesel engine, the oil level display additionally engine oil level appears in the display, e.g. – 2.0 qts (Canada: – 2.0 ltr). warning lamp There is not enough or no oil in the engine. flashes and the There is a danger of engine damage. warning buzzer X sounds after the Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road engine is started and traffic conditions. or while the vehi- X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 251). cle is in motion. X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop.

4 The yellow The engine oil level is above the maximum level. engine oil level There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter. warning lamp On-board computer and displays X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 251). lights up and the X warning buzzer If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted as soon sounds after the as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. engine is started X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified as soon or while the vehi- as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. cle is in motion.

4 On vehicles with There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display. a diesel engine, X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist the yellow workshop. engine oil level warning lamp lights up repeatedly during the journey.

% The yellow cool- The coolant level is too low. ant level warning Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine lamp lights up could overheat and be damaged. while the engine X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road is running. and traffic conditions. X Switch off the engine and let it cool down. X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes (Y page 253). X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 224 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant The coolant temperature is too high. warning lamp is X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road lit while the and traffic conditions. engine is run- X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ning.

? The red coolant The coolant temperature is too high. warning lamp is If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads, lit while the the coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is engine is run- switched on or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for ning. example, driving in mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer. X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message continues to be shown.

On-board computer and displays 7 The yellow The fuel filler cap is not closed. | reserve fuel X Close the fuel filler cap. warning lamp is You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully. on. At the same X If the malfunction continues to be displayed, have it rectified time, 0, appears immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. in the fuel tank content display while the engine is running, although there is fuel in the fuel tank.

; The yellow You have used up all fuel in the tank. Check Engine The engine is running in emergency mode. indicator lamp is X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 145). lit up or flashes X Y while the engine Bleed the fuel system ( page 141). is running. X Start the engine three to four times in succession after refueling. Emergency running mode will be canceled. The vehicle does not need to be checked.

; The yellow The injection control is malfunctioning. Check Engine The engine is running in emergency mode. indicator lamp is Engine power output may be reduced. lit up or flashes X while the engine Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop as is running. soon as possible. In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engine indicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the legal requirements. Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 225

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; The yellow The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission Check Engine relevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can indicator lamp is damage the exhaust gas aftertreatment. lit while the After the first message and under normal operating conditions, engine is run- you can drive on for up to approximately 500 mi (800 km). Then a ning. warning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be started another 16 times. X Observe the messages in the display. X Have the exhaust gas aftertreatment checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engine indicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the legal requirements. %

If you turn the At extremely low temperatures, the engine may not start. On-board computer and displays key to position 2 There is a malfunction in the preglow system. in the ignition X Have any malfunction rectified at a qualified specialist work- lock, the yellow shop. preglow indicator lamp remains lit for approximately 1 minute. Or the yellow preglow indicator lamp lights up for approximately 1 minute while the engine is running.

È The yellow air fil- The service limit for the air filter has been reached. The air filter is ter indicator dirty. lamp is lit while X Have the air filter element replaced as soon as possible at a the engine is qualified specialist workshop. running.

Z 226 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h The yellow tire G WARNING pressure moni- The tire pressure monitor indicates a rapid or severe loss of pres- tor warning lamp sure in at least one tire. comes on. X Stop the vehicle without making any extreme steering maneuvers or braking suddenly. Pay attention to the traffic conditions while doing so. X Check the tires and correct the tire pressure. If a tire continues to lose pressure, it must be replaced. Replace damaged tires immediately. The warning light will go out after the flat tire has been rectified and you have been driving for a few minutes. X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the messages in the display (Y page 197).

On-board computer and displays h US vehicles The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned. only: X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a The yellow tire qualified specialist workshop. pressure monitor warning lamp flashes for 60 seconds and then remains lit.

: The yellow water The water that has collected in the water separator of the fuel filter separator indi- has reached the maximum level. cator lamp is lit X Drain the water separator (Y page 255). when the ignition is switched on.

¦ The yellow The water level is too low. washer fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 255). level indicator lamp for the windshield washer/headlamp cleaning system is lit after the engine is started or while the vehicle is in motion. Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 227

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 The red seat belt The warning lamp is to remind you to fasten your seat belt. warning lamp X Fasten seat belt (Y page 45). lights up continuously or flashes. A warning tone may also sound. b When the key is One of the exterior lighting bulbs is faulty, with the exception of the turned to posi- perimeter lamps and the trailer lighting. tion 2 in the igni- i Depending on the equipment, the bulb failure indicator can fail tion lock, the for all lamps with the exception of the turn signal lamps. yellow bulb warning lamp X Replace the faulty bulb as soon as possible (Y page 99). lights up. On-board computer and displays 1 The yellow "door The vehicle is moving without all doors or the hood being closed. open" indicator X Close the doors or hood. lamp is lit while driving.

1 The yellow "door The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not open" indicator at all. lamp is lit. X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step. X Open or close the sliding door again. X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push the step in manually (Y page 74). Before stepping out, remind the passengers that the step is missing.

Z 228 229

Useful information ...... 230 Stowage spaces and stowage compartments ...... 230 Folding table in the twin co-driver's seat ...... 234 Cup holder ...... 234 Bottle holder ...... 235 Ashtray ...... 235 Cigarette lighter ...... 235 12 V socket ...... 236 Mobile phone ...... 236 Additional communications equipment ...... 237 Stowing and features 230 Stowage spaces and stowage compartments

Useful information Glove box

This Operator's Manual describes all models as well as standard and optional equipment of your vehicle that were available at the time of going to print. Country-specific variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the described functions. This also applies to systems and functions relevant to safety. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 25). Glove box (example: glove box with a lockable lid) 1 Unlocked Stowage spaces and stowage com- 2 Locked partments = Glove box handle Important safety notes You can lock and unlock the glove box using G WARNING the mechanical or folding key. X Stowing and features To open: If you do not correctly store objects in the unlock the glove box lid if neces- vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung sary. around, thus striking vehicle occupants. X Pull glove box handle = in the direction of There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- the arrow. ing or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too ? Card holder large in the trunk. A Pen holder In addition, observe the information in the X To close: fold the glove box up and press it "Loading guidelines" section (Y page 240). until it engages. Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 231

Eyeglasses compartment in the overhead control panel

Stowage space (example: co-driver's side)

X To open: briefly press cover :. The eyeglasses compartment opens downwards. X To close: press the eyeglasses compartment into the overhead control panel until it engages. Stowing and features Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment equipped with smartphone Dashboard stowage compartments connections = USB port G WARNING ? 3.5 mm audio jack Objects protruding from the stowage com- i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a partment above the co-driver front air bag USB port and an AUX-in connection is could obstruct or even prevent deployment of installed in the stowage compartment. A the co-driver front air bag. The co-driver front Media Interface is a universal interface for air bag may then fail to provide the intended portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® protection. There is an increased risk of or MP3 player (see the separate audio sys- injury. tem operating instructions). Do not place any protruding objects in the stowage compartment above the co-driver front air bag.

! The right and left storage spaces may be loaded with a maximum of 11 lb (5 kg) each.

Z 232 Stowage spaces and stowage compartments

Stowage compartment in the center On vehicles with a partition, stowage console space : can only be loaded from the cargo compartment.

Stowage space above the windshield ! The right and left stowage spaces may be loaded with a maximum of 5.5 lb (2.5 kg) each.

Stowage compartment on the dashboard above the center console (example with lid) The stowage compartments on and in the center console can be used to store small, light objects. X To open: pull release handle ;. Stowing and features Lid : swings up. X To close: close lid : and engage it. Stowage compartment (example: driver's side) : Stowage compartment The lid of the stowage compartment must remain closed while the vehicle is in motion to ensure that stowed objects are con- Stowage compartment under the twin tained safely. co-driver's seat

Stowage space above the headliner ! The entire stowage space may be loaded with a maximum of 66 lb (30 kg). Do not place high, bulky loads in the stowage space. You could otherwise damage the headliner in the event of sharp braking.

Twin co-driver's seat (example: Cargo Van) You can stow various articles in the stowage compartment under the twin co-driver's seat. X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the seat cushion out of front anchorage :. X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly and out of rear anchorage ;. X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up. Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 233

X To fold the seat cushion back: fold down X To fold up the rear bench seat: lift seat the seat cushion by the rear edge. cushion : out of the front anchorage and X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back- fold it upwards in the direction of the arrow. rest into rear anchorage ;. X Push down on the seat cushion at the front until it engages in front anchorage :.

Stowage compartment under the rear bench seat G WARNING Always secure the folded-up seat cushion

with the retainer loop. The seat cushion could d features otherwise drop down unexpectedly and thereby cause injury to yourself or others.

G WARNING wing an When folding down the seat cushion, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Retainer loops ; are secured to the outer Sto head restraints. ! The retainer loop is neither a grab handle X ; = for people to use nor a securing point for Attach retainer loop to hook under- : loads. It may tear if used incorrectly. neath folded-up seat cushion . X To fold down the seat cushion: hold seat cushion : and detach retainer loop ; from hook =. X Fold down seat cushion :. The seat cushion engages automatically.

Paper holder

For vehicles with a crewcab, you can use the stowage compartment under the rear bench seat to safely store tools and other small items. X To open: press the top of paper holder :.

Z 234 Cup holder

Folding table in the twin co-driver's you could lose control of the vehicle. There is seat a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is G WARNING stationary. Only use the cup holder for con- If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or tainers of the right size. Always close the con- not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot. over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle ! occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- Do not use the cup holder recesses as larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- ashtrays. This could damage the cup hold- den change in direction. ers. res Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or Cup holders in the dashboard loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. Stowing and featu

Cup holder in dashboard stowage compartment (example: right-hand side of vehicle) X To fold down the folding table: pull fold- : Cup holder ing table : forward by the tab. i If your vehicle is equipped with a twin co- X Fold folding table : down in the direction driver's seat, you will find further cup hold- of the arrow and onto the seat cushion. ers (Y page 234) in the folding table. i The folding table is equipped with a pen holder and cup holder. Cup holders in the center console

Cup holder Important safety notes G WARNING The cup holder cannot hold a container secure whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst traveling, the container may be flung around and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may be distracted from the traffic conditions and Cup holders in the center console Cigarette lighter 235

X To open: pull out ashtray compartment : X Pull ashtray compartment : out by by the recess. recess ;. Clamping arm ; of the cup holder opens X To open: fold cover = upwards. out fully. X To remove the insert: hold the ashtray by i Vehicles with the non-smoking package the recesses on the left and right and pull have an additional cup holder instead of the the insert out to empty it. ashtray. X To replace the insert: press it down into X Place the beverage container into the cup the holder as shown. holder and push clamping arm ; against Make sure that the insert is inserted cor- the container. rectly. Otherwise you will not be able to X To close: push ashtray compartment : close ashtray compartment :. into the center console until it engages.

Ashtrays in the passenger compart- d features Bottle holder ment wing an Sto

Ashtrays on the left and right in the side trim panels : Bottle holders in the front doors (example: co- X driver's door) To open: fold out the ashtray. X To remove the insert: press retaining clip : down and remove the ashtray from Ashtray the trim. Ashtray in the center console X To replace the insert: insert the ashtray down into the trim and close it.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.

Ashtray in the center console

Z 236 Mobile phone

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: The 12 V sockets for accessories are: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ron the lower section of the center console Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to (12 V, 25 A) objects, for example Ron the inside of the driver's seat frame There is a risk of fire and injury. (12 V, 15 A) R Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. in the respective corner trim next to the Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is rear doors in the passenger compartment out of reach of children. Never leave children (12 V, 15 A) unsupervised in the vehicle. Rin the cargo compartment next to the left rear door (12 V, 15 A) You can use the 12 V sockets (15 A) for accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 W. You can connect accessories with a maximum power consumption of 300 W to the 12 V socket (25 A) on the lower section of the center console. i The sockets are supplied with power even when the key is removed from the ignition

Stowing and features lock. If accessories, e.g. a coolbox, remain connected while the engine is not running, X To use the cigarette lighter: turn the key the battery will discharge. to position 1 in the ignition lock. X Press in cigarette lighter :. Mobile phone The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. Important safety notes X Pull the cigarette lighter out of the socket G WARNING by its handle. If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehi- 12 V socket cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile phones. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph Socket on the lower section of the center console (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is : 12 V socket (25 A) covering a distance of 44 feet(approximately 14 m) every second. Additional communications equipment 237

You and others can suffer health-related dam- Additional communications equip- age through electromagnetic radiation. By ment using an exterior antenna, a possible health risk caused by electromagnetic fields, as dis- Important safety notes cussed in scientific circles, is taken into G WARNING account. Only have the exterior antenna installed by a qualified specialist workshop. If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from We recommend the use of an approved exte- traffic conditions. You could also lose control rior antenna for operating the mobile phone. of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only in this way can optimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle be ensured Only operate this equipment when the vehicle and mutual interference between the vehicle is stationary. electronics and mobile phones minimized. You must observe the legal requirements for Observe the legal requirements for each indi- the country in which you are currently driving vidual country. when operating mobile communication equipment. Mobile phone pre-installation Please remember, a navigation system does not supply information on the load-bearing The mobile phone pre-installation includes a capacity of bridges or the overhead clearance hands-free system integrated into the vehi- of underpasses. The driver remains responsi- Stowing and features cle. The microphone for the hands-free sys- ble for safety at all times. tem is installed in the overhead control panel You and others can suffer health-related dam- or in the overhead stowage compartment age through electromagnetic radiation. By together with the front interior light. using an exterior antenna, a possible health In order to use the hands-free system, you will risk caused by electromagnetic fields, as dis- need a special bracket. The Sprinter acces- cussed in scientific circles, is taken into sories include brackets for various mobile account. Only have the exterior antenna phone models. installed by a qualified specialist workshop. i Mobile phone brackets which are availa- You will find information on installing electri- ble from various manufacturers on the cal or electronic equipment in the “Vehicle Y open market are not compatible with the electronics” section ( page 316). Sprinter telephone system. You can recognize suitable holders for your mobile phone by the imprinted star and the B6 spare part Installation for PND mobile navigation number on the back of the bracket. devices Detailed instructions for use can be found in You can secure a personal navigation device the operating instructions for the mobile (Personal Navigation Device PND) using a phone bracket and in the separate operating commercially available adapter. instructions for the mobile phone pre-installation. i The mobile phone battery is charged depending on the condition of charge and the position of the key in the ignition lock. The mobile phone display indicates the charging process.

Z 238 Additional communications equipment

PND connector (on the side behind the instrument cluster) = USB port ? 3.5 mm audio jack for the PND audio signal (voice announcements) X Connecting the PND: connect the PND ports to the appropriate jacks in the vehicle.

Stowing and features i You can also use USB port = and 3.5 mm audio jack ? for external audio sources. The voice announcements are heard through the radio speakers when you start navigation. The audio source played until this point is then muted for the duration of the voice announcements. i If you use audio devices or personal navigation devices which have been recommended by Mercedes-Benz, you can use all of the functions available, such as the mute function. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 239

Useful information ...... 240 Loading guidelines ...... 240 Load distribution ...... 242 Securing loads ...... 242 Carrier systems ...... 245 Transporting loads 240 Loading guidelines

Useful information them slipping or tipping over. If you remove a rear bench seat, it is advisable to store it out- This Operator's Manual describes all models side the vehicle. as well as standard and optional equipment of your vehicle that were available at the time of G WARNING going to print. Country-specific variations are When the permissible wheel loads, axle loads possible. Note that your vehicle may not be and/or the maximum permissible gross vehi- equipped with all of the described functions. cle weight are exceeded, driving safety is This also applies to systems and functions compromised. The handling as well as steer- relevant to safety. ing and braking characteristics may be signif- Read the information on qualified specialist icantly impaired. Overloaded tires may over- workshops (Y page 25). heat, causing them to burst. There is a risk of an accident. When transporting a load, always observe the Loading guidelines permissible wheel loads, axle loads and the Important safety notes maximum permissible gross vehicle weight for the vehicle (including occupants). G WARNING G As a result of improperly placed or unevenly WARNING distributed loads, the center of gravity of the When you load the roof, the center of gravity load being transported may be too high or too of the vehicle rises and the driving character-

Transporting loads far back. This can significantly impair handling istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof as well as steering and braking characteris- load, the driving characteristics, as well as tics. There is a risk of an accident. steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. Always make sure that the center of gravity of There is a risk of an accident. the load is: Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. Rbetween the axles and ! If you are using a roof carrier, observe the Ras low as possible, near the rear axle. maximum roof load and maximum roof carrier load. G WARNING You will find information about the maximum When objects are unsecured or inadequately roof load in the "Technical data" section secured, they can slip, turn over or be thrown (Y page 328) and information about roof car- about, striking vehicle occupants. This also riers in the "Carrier systems" section applies to: (Y page 245). Rluggage or loads RDo not stack luggage or loads higher than Ra rear bench seat which has been removed the backrests. and is being transported in the vehicle in an RStow objects preferably in the cargo com- exceptional case. partment. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the RWhen transporting luggage, always use the event of braking maneuvers or abrupt cargo tie-down rings and a parcel net, if changes in direction. present. Always stow objects in such a way that they RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteners cannot be tossed about. Before traveling, which are suitable for the weight and size of secure objects, luggage or loads to prevent the load. Loading guidelines 241

Always observe the operating instructions of X Tire pressure: check the tire pressure and the respective manufacturer when using suit- correct if necessary (Y page 288). able load securing aids or tie downs. In par- X Cargo compartment floor: clean the ticular, the information on service life. cargo compartment floor. Load securing aids and tie downs may not be The cargo compartment floor must be free used, for example, if: from oil and dust, dry and swept clean to Ridentification marks are missing or illegible prevent the load from slipping. Rthere are yarn breakages, damage to bear- X Place non-slip mats (anti-slip mats) on the ing seams or other signs of tearing cargo compartment floor if necessary. Rthere are signs of shearing, deformation, pinching or other damage Rthere is damage to clamping or connecting During loading elements ! On passenger van versions with maxi- Such load securing aids and tie downs are mum seating layout, the permissible rear worn; they should not be used and must be axle load would be exceeded if the full pay- replaced. If you use load securing aids or tie load were to be loaded in the cargo com- downs which are worn, the load may not be partment. sufficiently secured and could cause damage X Observe the gross axle weight rating and to property. permissible gross vehicle weight for your After an accident, the following must be vehicle. checked at a specialist workshop: Take into account that your vehicle's curb Transporting loads RCargo compartment floor weight is increased if accessories or RLoad surface optional equipment are installed. The maximum payload is thus reduced. RCargo tie-down rings X Observe the notes on load distribution RTie downs (Y page 242). Otherwise, the load may not be correctly The overall center of gravity of the load secured the next time anything is stowed. should always be as low as possible, cen- Even if you follow all loading guidelines, the tered and between the axles near the rear load increases the risk of injury in the event of axle. an accident. Observe the tips in the "Securing X Secure the load (Y page 242). Y luggage/loads" ( page 242) and "Load dis- Observe the legal requirements of the Y tribution" ( page 242) sections. country in which you are currently driving.

Before loading Checks after loading ! The anti-slip mats cannot be used for G WARNING securing goods and must be replaced when they show signs of: Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. If the sliding RPermanent deformation and crushing door or rear door is open when the engine is R Crack formation running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle RCuts interior, especially during the journey. There is a risk of poisoning.

Z 242 Securing loads

Always switch off the engine before opening Observe the following notes: the sliding door or rear door. Never drive the RDo not stack loads higher than the upper vehicle when the sliding door or rear door is edge of the backrests. open. RTransport loads behind seats that are not occupied. X Securing loads: check that the load is R secure before every journey and at regular If the rear bench seat is not occupied, insert intervals during a long journey, and correct the seat belts crosswise into the buckle of if necessary. the opposite seat belt. X Doors: close the sliding doors and rear doors. Securing loads X Tire pressure: adjust the tire pressures according to the vehicle load (Y page 288). Important safety notes X Driving style: adapt your driving style G WARNING according to the vehicle load. If you attach the tie-down incorrectly when securing the load, the following may occur in the event of abrupt changes in direction, brak- Load distribution ing maneuvers or an accident: General notes Rthe cargo tie-down rings may become detached or the tie-down may tear if the ! Excessive loads on individual points of the permissible load is exceeded Transporting loads cargo floor or on the load surface impair R vehicle handling characteristics and could the load may not be restrained. cause damage to the floor covering. This may cause the load to slip, tip over or be tossed about, striking vehicle occupants. The overall center of gravity of the load should There is a risk of an accident and injury. always be as low as possible, centered and between the axles near the rear axle. Always tension the tie-downs in the proper manner and only between the described On Cargo Vans/Passenger Vans: cargo tie-down rings. Always use tie-downs X Always transport loads in the cargo com- designed specifically for the loads. partment. X Always place the load against the backrests G WARNING of the rear bench seat. You may not transport anyone in the cargo X Move large and heavy loads as far towards compartment or on the load surface. Never let the front of the vehicle as possible against more people ride in the vehicle than there are the rear bench seat. Stow the load flush seat belts available. Make sure everyone rid- with the rear bench seat. ing in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a X Always additionally secure the load with separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for suitable load-securing aids or tie downs. more than one person at a time. ! Observe the information on the maximum loading capacity of the individual cargo tie- down points. If you use several cargo tie-down points to secure a load, you must always take the Securing loads 243

maximum loading capacity of the weakest or cargo tie-down rings and the loading rails cargo tie-down point into account. in the cargo compartment or on the cargo If you brake hard, for example, the forces area. acting could be up to several times the Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods or weight force of the load. Always use multi- lashing nets and lashing straps, that have ple cargo tie-down points in order to dis- been tested in accordance with current tribute the force absorption. Load the standards (e.g. DIN EN). anchorages evenly. Always use the cargo tie-down rings closest Spread the load evenly between the cargo tie- to the load to secure it and pad sharp edges down points or tie-down rings. for protection. Please also refer to the notes about qualified Loads, and heavy loads in particular, should specialist workshops (Y page 25). preferably be secured using the cargo tie- Always observe the operating instructions or down rings. the notes of the lashing strap manufacturer i Tie downs tested in accordance with cur- for the operation of the lashing strap. rent standards (e.g. DIN EN) are available at Information about the maximum loading any qualified specialist workshop. capacity of the cargo tie-down points can be found in the "Technical data" section (Y page 327). As the driver, you are responsible for ensuring that: Transporting loads RThe applicable requirements and guidelines relating to load-securing practices must be met. If this is not the case, this may constitute a punishable offense, depending on local legislation and any ensuing consequences. You should therefore observe the respective legal requirements for the relevant country. Make sure that the load is secure before every journey and at regular intervals during a long Cargo tie-down point (example: Passenger Van) journey. Correct an incorrectly or inade- : Cargo tie-down rings quately secured load if necessary. You can obtain information about securing the load correctly from the manufacturer of the load securing aids or tie down for securing the load. X Fill spaces between the load and the cargo compartment walls or wheel housings (form-locking). Use rigid load securing aids, such as wedges, wooden fixings or pad- ding. X Attach secured and stabilized loads in all directions. Use the cargo tie-down points

Z 244 Securing loads

Securing loads on the cargo compartment floor by lashing them down is only recommended for lightweight loads. Place non-slip mats (anti-slip mats) under the load to increase load security.

Installing/removing cargo tie-down rings for the load rails G WARNING Cargo tie-down point (example: Cargo Van without If the cargo tie-down ring is not properly loading rails) installed, it may slip or become detached in : Cargo tie-down rings the event of abrupt changes in direction, braking maneuvers or an accident. This may cause objects, luggage or the load to slip, tip over or be tossed about, striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury. Before using the cargo tie-down rings, always make sure they are properly installed and cannot be moved. Transporting loads

Cargo tie-down point (example: Cargo Van with loading rails) : Cargo tie-down rings ; Load rails X To install: slide the cargo tie-down ring through a recess in the loading rail close to Secure loose loads with a tested lashing net the load until locking mechanism : or a tarpaulin. engages in the recess. X Always fasten the lashing net or tarpaulin to i When you pull locking mechanism : up all available cargo tie-down points. Make and out of the recess, the cargo tie-down sure that the retaining hooks are secured ring is able to move within the loading rail. against accidental opening. Make sure that locking mechanism : is If your vehicle is equipped with loading always engaged in a recess. ; rails in the floor, you can place lashing rods X Check the cargo tie-down ring for firm seat- directly in front of and behind the load. The ing. lashing rods directly absorb the potential X To remove: : shifting forces. pull locking mechanism up and pull the cargo tie-down ring towards Carrier systems 245

the locking mechanism and out of the loading rail through a recess.

Carrier systems Roof carrier G WARNING When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof : Securing rails load, the driving characteristics, as well as It is possible to install a roof carrier if your steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. vehicle is equipped with securing rails on the There is a risk of an accident. roof. Special mounting elements (grooved Never exceed the maximum roof load and plates) are available as accessories. adjust your driving style. These mounting elements are available at any You can find information about the maximum authorized Sprinter Dealer. roof load in the "Technical data" section (Y page 328). Ladder carrier ! Make sure that: Rthe screws for the roof carrier are tight- Transporting loads ened in the sliding blocks to a torque of 6.0 – 7.4 lb-ft (8 – 10 Nm) Rthe bolts, when tightened, do not touch the rails. Rthe slot nuts are not located in the area of the plastic caps. Rthe slot nuts have the right cross-section. Rthe mounting rails in the interior are free of dirt. Example: ladder rack on Chassis Cab Rthe screws are retightened evenly after : Front ladder rack approximately 300 miles (500 km). ; Rear ladder rack We recommend that you only use roof Pay attention to the important safety notes in racks tested and approved by Sprinter. the "Loading guidelines" section These help avoid vehicle damage. (Y page 240). ! If you want to retrofit securing rails, have You can find information about the maximum it done at a qualified specialist workshop. ladder rack load in the "Technical data" sec- You could otherwise damage the vehicle. tion (Y page 245). You will find information about cleaning and care in the "Notes on care" (Y page 265) and "Power washers" (Y page 266) sections.

Z 246 247

Useful information ...... 248 Engine compartment ...... 248 Vehicle interior ...... 256 Maintenance ...... 256 Battery ...... 258 Care ...... 265 Maintenance and care 248 Engine compartment

Useful information If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: This Operator's Manual describes all models Rswitch off the ignition as well as standard and optional equipment of Rnever reach into the area where there is a your vehicle that were available at the time of risk of danger from moving components, going to print. Country-specific variations are such as the fan rotation area possible. Note that your vehicle may not be R equipped with all of the described functions. remove jewelry and watches This also applies to systems and functions Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- relevant to safety. ple, away from moving parts Read the information on qualified specialist G workshops (Y page 25). WARNING The fuel injection system operates with a high voltage. If you touch the live components, you Engine compartment could receive an electric shock. There is a risk of injury. Hood Never touch components of the fuel injection Important safety notes system when the ignition is switched on. G WARNING The live components of the fuel injection sys- If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem are, for example, the injectors. the vehicle is in motion and block your view. G WARNING There is a risk of an accident. Certain components in the engine compart- Never unlatch the hood while driving. ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts Maintenance and care of the exhaust system, can become very hot. G WARNING Working in the engine compartment poses a Opening the hood when the engine is over- risk of injury. heated or when there is a fire in the engine Where possible, let the engine cool down and compartment could expose you to hot gases touch only the components described in the or other service products. There is a risk of following. injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before If you have to carry out work in the engine opening the hood. If there is a fire in the compartment, only touch the following com- engine compartment, keep the hood closed ponents: and contact the fire department. RHood R G WARNING Oil dipstick REngine oil filler neck cap The engine compartment contains moving R components. Certain components, such as Washer fluid reservoir cap the radiator fan, may continue to run or start RCoolant expansion tank cap again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. Opening the hood ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. Engine compartment 249

X Swing the hood upwards until support strut = engages and the hood is supported.

Closing the hood

G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it could tip forward during rapid deceleration of the vehicle and hit persons or objects within its path. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, always make sure that the hood is Hood release lever in the driver's footwell closed and locked completely before driving Observe the safety notes when you open the off. hood. X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as If the hood is not locked and you are already possible on level ground. driving at walking pace: X Switch off the engine. Rthe yellow 1 indicator lamp in the X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling instrument cluster goes on for vehicles away. without steering-wheel buttons. X Pull release handle : on the hood. Rthe 1 Hood open display appears for The hood is released. vehicles with steering-wheel buttons. ! When you press the support strut back, make sure that you do not press it against the detent position and cause it to bend. Maintenance and care ! Do not use your hands to push the hood down. You could damage it otherwise. X Lift the hood slightly. X Press support strut = towards the back. X Lower the hood and allow it to fall with momentum from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm). X Reach into the gap and push lever ; on the The hood locks audibly. hood catch up. X Check that the hood is correctly locked. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. If the hood is not correctly engaged, open the hood again. Let the hood fall with a little more momentum.

Z 250 Engine compartment

Overview of the engine compartment Checking the oil level shown in the display If at extremely low temperatures no engine oil level is displayed after 5 minutes, repeat the engine oil level check after another 5 minutes. If an oil level reading is still not displayed, check the engine oil level with the dipstick (Y page 251). Have the engine oil level checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only check the oil level when the engine is at normal operating temperature. Example: engine : Coolant expansion tank cap X Park the vehicle on a level surface. (Y page 253) X Switch off the engine. ; DEF filler neck cap4 (Y page 148) X Wait 5 minutes. = Engine oil filler neck cap (Y page 250) X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition ? Brake fluid expansion tank cap lock. (Y page 254) The display is activated. A Washer fluid reservoir cap (Y page 255) X Vehicles without steering wheel but- 4 Regularly check the fluid level and the assem- tons: press the menu button on the Y bly for leaks. If you detect fluid loss, e.g. oil instrument cluster ( page 34) repeatedly flecks on the vehicle parking space, consult a until the display shows the 1 symbol. The --:-- display message appears in the Maintenance and care qualified specialist workshop immediately. display while the engine oil level measurement is running. Engine oil X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: press the Ë service button on the instru- General notes ment cluster (Y page 34). ! Engine oil gets dirty in the course of oper- The 4 Engine oil level Measuring ation and its quality and volume are gradu- in progress display message appears in ally diminished. Regularly check the oil the display while the engine oil level meas- level, and top up or have it replaced as nee- urement is in progress. ded. Display message for vehicles without Observe the information on engine oils and oil steering-wheel buttons: the display may consumption in the "Technical data" section show the following messages after the engine (Y page 322). oil level measurement. You can check the oil level in the engine: 1 Action Ron the display of the on-board computer OK X Do not add oil. Rwith the oil dipstick

4 For Cargo Van/Passenger Van only Engine compartment 251

– 1.0 qts X Add the amount of oil Observe X Repeat the engine oil shown (Y page 252). wait. measurement after about – 1.5 qts X Check the engine oil level period 5 minutes if the engine is – 2.0 qts again after a few minutes. at normal operating temperature. HI The oil level is too high. X Repeat the engine oil X Have excess oil removed. measurement after about 30 minutes if the engine is not at normal operating Measurement units in the display: temperature. Rqts USA only X Rltr Canada only Engine Switch off the engine oil level when it is at normal oper- Display message for vehicles with steer- Not when ating temperature and ing-wheel buttons: the display may show eng. run‐ wait approximately the following messages after the engine oil ning 5 minutes before measur- level measurement. ing the engine oil level. 1 Action Measurement units in the display: Engine X Do not add oil. oil level Rqts USA only OK Rltr Canada only Engine X Add the amount of oil Checking the oil level using the oil dip- oil Add shown (Y page 252).

stick Maintenance and care 1.0 quart X Check the engine oil level Engine again after a few minutes. oil Add 1.5 quarts Engine oil Add 2.0 quarts Engine The oil level is too high. oil level X Have excess oil removed. Reduce oil level Example: 4-cylinder diesel engine Eng. oil X Turn the key to position 2 lev. Turn in the ignition lock. ignition on for level

Z 252 Engine compartment

OM651 4-cylinder diesel engine: At outside temperatures between 32 ‡ (–0 †) and 86 ‡ (30 †), the oil level can be checked when the engine is cold. Measuring the engine oil when the engine is cold is less precise than measuring when the engine is at normal operating temperature. When the appropriate warning is shown in the display X Add engine oil (Y page 252) Example: 6-cylinder diesel engine or For vehicles with a red oil dipstick, only check X Have engine oil siphoned off. the oil level when the engine is at normal operating temperature: Add engine oil X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as possible on level ground. G WARNING X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- away. ponents in the engine compartment, it may X Switch off the engine. ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. X Wait 5 minutes. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and For vehicles with a yellow oil dipstick, only thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- check the oil level when the engine is cold. ponents before starting the engine.

Maintenance and care X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as ! possible on level ground. The alternator is located below the engine X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling oil filler neck. If engine oil spills onto the away. alternator, there is a danger of alternator damage. Be very careful when adding X Open the hood (Y page 248). engine oil. X : Pull out oil dipstick . H Environmental note X Wipe oil dipstick : using a lint-free cloth. When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If X Insert oil dipstick : back into the guide oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to tube as far as it will go and remove it again. the environment. If the level is between minimum mark = and maximum mark ;, the oil level is cor- ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much rect. engine oil can result in damage to the X If the oil level has dropped to or below min- engine or to the catalytic converter. Have imum mark =, open cap ? and add excess engine oil siphoned off. engine oil (Y page 252). ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. The difference in quantity between This could damage the engine. marks ; and = is approximately 2 US quarts (2 liters). X Open the hood (Y page 248). X Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube as X Unscrew and remove cap ?. far as it will go. X Add engine oil. X Close the hood (Y page 249). Engine compartment 253

X Replace cap ? on the filler neck and G WARNING tighten. If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- When doing so, make sure that the cap ponents in the engine compartment, it may engages correctly. ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick Let the engine cool down before you add anti- Y ( page 251) or on the display freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled Y ( page 250). next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the X Close the hood. antifreeze from components before starting the engine.

Coolant ! Take care not to spill any coolant on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage G WARNING the paintwork. The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. When opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape.

Only check the coolant level and/or fill the coolant if the vehicle is on a level surface and

the engine has cooled down. The coolant tem- Example: cap and coolant expansion tank Maintenance and care perature must be below 122 ‡ (50 †). Checking the coolant level ! Check the engine cooling and heating sys- X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as tem regularly for leaks. possible on level ground. If a large quantity of coolant is lost, have the X Switch off the engine. cause traced and rectified at a qualified X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling specialist workshop. away. G WARNING X Open the hood (Y page 248). Coolant contains glycol and is therefore toxic. X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter- Do not swallow the coolant. See a doctor clockwise to allow excess pressure to immediately if you swallow coolant. escape. Make sure that coolant does not come into X Turn cap : further and remove it. contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In case of X Check the coolant level. contact with eyes, rinse immediately with If the coolant reaches the maximum mark plenty of clean water. Clean affected areas of on coolant expansion tank ;, there is skin and clothing with soap and water imme- enough coolant in coolant expansion diately. Change any affected clothing imme- tank ;. diately.

Z 254 Engine compartment

Adding coolant You should have the brake fluid renewed at X If the coolant drops under the minimum the specified intervals. mark on coolant expansion tank ;, add ! coolant to the maximum mark. Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and Observe the information on coolant mix- rubber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come ture ratio and water quality in the "Techni- into contact with brake fluid, rinse with cal data" section (Y page 325). To prevent water immediately. damage to the engine cooling system, use Have the brake fluid renewed every 2 years at only approved corrosion inhibitor/anti- a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the freeze that comply with the Mercedes-Benz information on brake fluid in the "Technical Specifications for Service Products. data" section (Y page 324). X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise to tighten. X Start the engine. X After approximately 5 minutes, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. X Check the coolant level again and add coolant if necessary. X Close the hood.

Brake fluid Check the brake fluid level regularly, e.g. G WARNING weekly or when refueling. Maintenance and care Service products may be poisonous and haz- Checking the brake fluid level ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as Comply with instructions on the use, storage possible on level ground. and disposal of service products on the labels X Switch off the engine. of the respective original containers. Always X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling store service products sealed in their original away. containers. Always keep service products out X Open the hood (Y page 248). of the reach of children. X Check the brake fluid level. Brake fluid is hazardous to health. Also The brake fluid level is correct if the level is observe the safety notes in the "Service prod- between the MIN mark and MAX mark on ucts and capacities" section (Y page 318). brake fluid reservoir :. X Close the hood. G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture ! If the brake fluid level in the brake fluid from the air. This lowers the boiling point of reservoir has fallen to the MIN mark or the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake below, check the brake system immedi- fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the ately for leaks. Also check the thickness of brake system when the brakes are applied the brake linings. Visit a qualified specialist hard. This would impair braking efficiency. workshop immediately. There is a risk of an accident. Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. Engine compartment 255

Washer fluid Fuel system G WARNING Draining the fuel filter Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if G WARNING it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of fire and injury. fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion. Make sure that no windshield washer con- Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the ignition and auxiliary heating before carrying ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for out work to the fuel system. Always wear pro- plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or tective gloves. MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the H Environmental note headlamps. Dispose of the water-fuel mixture in an environmentally responsible manner.

! When the : indicator lamp lights up, drain the fuel filter with water separator immediately. Otherwise, the engine may be damaged. Maintenance and care

Example: washer fluid reservoir Add windshield washer concentrate to the washer fluid all year round. Observe the information on washer fluid in the "Technical data" section (Y page 326). Adding washer fluid If the : indicator lamp in the instrument X Mix the washer fluid to the appropriate mix- cluster goes on, drain fuel filter with water ing ratio in a container beforehand. separator = immediately. X Open the hood (Y page 248). i We recommend that you have this main- X Pull cap : on the washer fluid reservoir tenance work carried out at a qualified spe- upwards at the tab. cialist workshop. X Add the premixed washer fluid. X Park the vehicle safely and secure it from X Press cap : onto the filler neck until it rolling away. engages audibly. X Switch off the auxiliary heating system . X Close the hood. X Switch off the engine. X Open the hood (Y page 248). X Place a suitable receptacle under drain hose :.

Z 256 Maintenance

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Open drain plug ; immediately until the water/fuel mixture flows out of drain hose :. X Screw in drain plug ; as soon as approximately 0.2 US quarts(0.2 liters) of the water/fuel mixture have been collected. The electrical fuel pump automatically halts the flow of the water/fuel mixture after 30 seconds. Filter magazine, located on the roof in the rear X After draining, turn the key back to posi- compartment tion 0 in the ignition lock. An increased amount of sand or dust may X Dispose of the collected water/fuel mix- collect in the air filter of the rear-compart- ture in an environmentally responsible ment air conditioning when you drive on dusty manner, e.g. at a qualified specialist work- or sandy roads. shop. X To remove the filter mat: carefully pry X Check drain plug ;. The drain plug must cover : out of recesses ; and remove. be closed. X Remove the filter mat from the air duct. When the engine is running and drain X To clean the filter mat: hose ; is open, fuel is lost through drain wash the dirty fil- hose :. ter mat with clear water. X X Close the hood (Y page 249). Leave the filter mat to dry. i The filter mat must not be cleaned or dried Maintenance and care : If the indicator lamp does not go out in a machine. after draining: X To install the filter mat: insert the filter X Drain the fuel filter again. mat into the air duct. X If the : indicator lamp does not go out X Replace and engage cover :. after draining for the second time, have the cause checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Maintenance General notes Vehicle interior H Environmental note Air filter for the rear-compartment air Observe measures to protect the environ- conditioning ment when working on the vehicle. You must ! Regularly check the air filters for visible observe the legal requirements when dispos- dirt. Clean or replace a dirty filter mat. The ing of service products, e.g. engine oil. This dirt may otherwise lead to damage to the also includes all components, e.g. filters, air-conditioning system. which have come into contact with service products. Any qualified specialist workshop can provide information about this. Dispose of empty containers, cleaning cloths and care products in an environmentally Maintenance 257

responsible manner. Comply with the instruc- i Observe the information on Sprinter orig- tions for use of the care products. inal parts in the "Technical data" section Y Do not run the engine for longer than neces- ( page 27). sary when the vehicle is stationary.

Before having maintenance and repairs per- Service interval display formed, it is essential to read the materials General notes related to the maintenance and repairs: Rthe applicable sections of the technical A service that is due is displayed in the service documentation, e.g. the Operator's Manual interval display about 1 month in advance. A and workshop information. message is then displayed while the vehicle is in motion or when the ignition is switched on. Rregulations such as industrial safety regulations and accident prevention regula- i The service interval display does not pro- tions. vide information about the engine oil level. While working under the vehicle, you must The service interval display should there- secure the vehicle on jack stands with suffi- fore not be confused with the 5 engine cient load capacity. oil level display. Never use the jack as a substitute. The vehi- The service due date is displayed in days or cle's jack is intended only to raise the vehicle miles (kilometers), depending on the total for a short time when changing a wheel. It is distance driven. not suited for performing maintenance work The symbols or letters on the service display under the vehicle. show the type of service that is due. Please also refer to the notes about qualified ¯ or A for a minor service specialist workshops (Y page 25). ° or B for a major service Maintenance and care The scope and regularity of the inspection and maintenance work primarily depend on Service due date display the often diverse operating conditions. Spe- cialist knowledge beyond the scope of this Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the Operator's Manual is required when carrying following messages may be displayed. out testing and maintenance work. This work R¯ Service A due in ... days should only be carried out by trained staff. R¯ Service A due in ... mi (km) The vehicle Maintenance Booklet describes R¯ Service A Carry out now the scope and frequency of maintenance work and contains additional notes on the Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: New Vehicle Limited Warranty and on service the following messages may be displayed. products. R¯ for service A Maintenance services must be carried out in R° for Service B accordance with the provisions and recom- Additionally, you will see the remaining dis- mendations in the Maintenance Booklet. Not tance in miles (mi) or kilometers (km) or the doing so could void the warranty claim and remaining time in days (d). lead to refusal of goodwill gestures after the manufacturer has submitted a damage report.

Z 258 Battery

Service due date has been exceeded work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: if you have missed the service due date, one of G WARNING the following messages appears in the display Work carried out incorrectly on the battery and warning tone also sounds. can lead, for example, to a short circuit and R¯ Service A overdue by ... days thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can R¯ Service A overdue by ... km (km) lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys- Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® if you have missed the service due date, the (Electronic Stability Program). The operating ¯ or ° symbol for the service flashes safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You for 10 seconds after the ignition is switched could lose control of the vehicle, for example: on. A minus sign also appears in front of the service due date. Rbraking Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver Calling up the service due date and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition There is a risk of an accident. lock. The display is activated. In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop Vehicles without steering wheel buttons immediately. Do not drive any further. You X Press the 4 menu button on the instru- should have all work involving the battery car- ment cluster repeatedly until the ¯ or ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ° symbol for the service appears in the Maintenance and care display. Further information can be found under "ABS" Y ® Y Additionally, you will see the remaining dis- ( page 57) and under "ESP "( page 59). tance in miles (mi) or kilometers (km) or the G WARNING remaining time in days (d). Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation Vehicles with steering wheel buttons of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an X Press the V or U button on the steer- explosion. ing wheel until the standard display (Y page 187) appears in the display. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic X Press the & or * button on the steer- build-up. ing wheel repeatedly until the service message appears in the display, for example: The flammable gas mix is produced when the R¯ Service A due in ... days battery is charged or when the vehicle is R¯ Service A due in ... km (km) jump-started. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery are electrostatically charged. Electro- Battery static charging results, for example, from: Important safety notes Rwearing synthetic clothing Rfriction between clothing and the seat Work on the battery, e.g. removing or installing, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have Battery 259

Rdragging or pushing the battery across car- and recycled to protect the pet flooring or any other synthetic materi- environment. als Dispose of batteries in an Rrubbing the battery with cloths or towels. environmentally friendly Comply with the following safety precautions manner. Take discharged and take protective measures when handling batteries to a qualified spe- batteries. cialist workshop or a special Risk of explosion. Explosive oxy- collection point for used bat- hydrogen is produced when batteries. teries are being charged. Only charge batteries in well-ventilated Observe the following notes: areas. RRecharge the battery more frequently, if Fire, open flames and smoking are you: therefore prohibited when work- - predominantly drive short distances ing on the battery. Avoid creating - predominantly drive at low outside tem- sparks. peratures Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- - park the vehicle longer than tact with the skin, eyes or clothing. three weeks Wear acid-proof protective gloves. In order for the batteries to achieve their If skin or clothes are splashed with maximum possible service life, they must acid, neutralize the splashes always be sufficiently charged. immediately with soapy water or RWhen you park the vehicle, remove the key an acid neutralizer, and then clean if you do not require any electrical consum- the affected areas with water. ers. The vehicle will then use very little Maintenance and care Consult a doctor if necessary. energy, thus conserving battery power. Wear eye protection. When mixing RWhen replacing a battery, only use batter- water and acid, the liquid can ies that are recommended for use in splash into your eyes. Rinse acid Sprinter vehicles. splashes to the eyes immediately R with clean water and contact a Have the battery removed at a qualified doctor immediately. specialist workshop. R Keep children at a safe distance. If you leave your vehicle parked your vehi- Children are not able to assess the cle longer than three weeks: dangers posed by batteries and - consult a qualified specialist workshop acid. or When handling batteries, observe - switch off the power supply using the the safety precautions and special battery main switch (Y page 137) or protective measures contained in - disconnect the batteries (Y page 260). this Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you need to check the battery's H Environmental note condition of charge every three weeks, since standby power consumption can Batteries contain dangerous drain the battery. If the battery voltage is substances. It is against the lower than 12.2 V, the battery must be law to dispose of them with charged. Otherwise, the battery may be the household rubbish. They damaged by exhaustive discharging. must be collected separately

Z 260 Battery

Be sure to observe the notes on charging X Remove floor covering :. the batteries (Y page 263). X To install: place floor covering : in the driver's footwell. Installation locations X Slide floor covering : underneath the carrier of the accelerator pedal and align it at Your vehicle may be equipped with three bat- the base of the driver's seat and at the door teries, depending on the equipment version: sill. Ra starter battery in the battery case in the Make sure that the floor covering does not driver's footwell obstruct the accelerator pedal. Radditional battery in the engine compart- X Put trim ; in place and screw screws = ment back in. Rauxiliary battery under the driver's seat Have the auxiliary battery removed at a qualified specialist workshop. Disconnecting/connecting the starter battery Important safety notes Installing/removing the floor covering (starter battery) G WARNING G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produ- ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is R jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the positive terminal of a Maintenance and care connected battery does not come into con- Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are tact with vehicle parts. stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter R the driver's footwell. Install the floormats Never place metal objects or tools on a bat- securely and as specified in order to ensure tery. sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use RIt is important that you observe the descri- loose floormats and do not place floormats on bed order of the battery terminals when top of one another. connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

Disconnecting the starter battery ! Switch off the engine and remove the key X Switch off all electrical consumers. from the ignition lock before you loosen or X To remove: remove screws = and take off disconnect the terminal clamps. You may trim ;. Battery 261

otherwise destroy electronic components such as the alternator. Always disconnect the starter battery in the battery case in the driver's footwell first. ! Always disconnect the battery in the order described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. If the vehicle is expected to be out of use for over 3 weeks, disconnect the batteries. This will prevent battery discharge caused by off- Starter battery in the driver's footwell load current consumption. X First loosen and remove the negative terminal clamp so that it is no longer in contact with the terminal. X Remove the cover from the positive terminal. X Loosen the positive terminal clamp and fold it up to the side together with the pre-fuse box.

Reconnecting the starter battery ! Always connect the battery in the order Battery cover in the driver's footwell

described below. Never swap the terminal Maintenance and care X Switch off all electrical consumers. clamps. You may otherwise damage the X Switch off the engine and remove the key vehicle electronics. from the ignition lock. X Fold the positive terminal clamp with the X Remove the floor covering in the driver's pre-fuse box down to the terminal. footwell (Y page 260). X Connect the positive terminal clamp. X Loosen screws ; and slide battery X Attach the cover to the positive terminal. cover : in the direction of the arrow. X Connect the negative terminal clamp. The screws must protrude beyond the X Position battery cover : so that screws ; larger recesses. are positioned over the large recesses. X Remove battery cover : upwards. X Slide battery cover : in the direction of travel into the smaller recesses. X Tighten screws ;. X Install the floor covering in the driver's footwell (Y page 260). Carry out the following work after connecting the battery: X Reset the side windows (Y page 79).

Z 262 Battery

Removing/installing the starter bat- X Pull retainer = upwards. tery X Slide the battery from its anchorage in the direction of travel. Removing the starter battery X Fold the bar of the battery upwards and remove the battery from the battery case.

Installing the starter battery X Insert the battery into the battery case. X Fold down the bar of the battery. X Slide the battery into its anchorage in the opposite direction to the direction of travel. X Insert retainer =. X Tighten the bolts on retainer = which holds the battery in place. X Disconnect the battery (Y page 260). X Attach breather hose with connector X Pull breather hose with connector bracket ; to connection : of the venti- bracket ; from connection : on the lation cover. degassing cover. X Connect the battery (Y page 260).

Disconnecting and connecting the additional battery (engine compart-

Maintenance and care ment) Important safety notes

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produ- ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or X Loosen the bolts holding retainer =, which sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can prevents the battery from moving around. ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. Battery 263

RIt is particularly important to observe the Connecting the additional battery described order when connecting and dis- ! Always connect the battery in the order connecting the jumper cables. described below. Never swap the terminal RNever connect or disconnect the battery clamps. You may otherwise damage the terminals while the engine is running. vehicle electronics. X Connect the positive terminal clamp. Disconnecting the additional battery X Attach the cover to the positive terminal. ! Switch off the engine and remove the key X Connect the negative terminal clamp. from the ignition lock before you loosen or X Close the hood. disconnect the terminal clamps. You may otherwise destroy electronic components Carry out the following work after connecting such as the alternator. the battery: Always disconnect the starter battery in the X Reset the side windows (Y page 79). battery case in the driver's footwell first. ! Always disconnect the battery in Installing and removing the additional the order described below. Never swap the battery (engine compartment) terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. Removing the additional battery X Disconnect the battery (Y page 262). X Loosen the bolts holding the retainer that prevents the battery from moving around. X Remove the battery holder and take out the battery. Maintenance and care

Installing the additional battery X Insert the battery into the battery case. X Insert the battery holder. Additional battery in the engine compartment X Tighten the bolts holding the retainer that X Switch off all electrical consumers. prevents the battery in the engine com- X Switch off the engine and remove the key partment from moving around. from the ignition lock. X Connect the battery (Y page 262). X Open the hood (Y page 248). X First loosen and remove the negative ter- Charging minal clamp so that it is no longer in contact with the terminal. G WARNING X Remove the cover from the positive termi- A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- nal. tures below freezing point. When jump-start- X Loosen and remove the positive terminal ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases clamp. can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

Z 264 Battery

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up the operating instructions for your charger in the instrument cluster when temperatures before charging the battery. are low, it is probably because the discharged The additional battery can not be charged battery has frozen. Should this be the case, do from the jump-starting connection point. not jump-start the vehicle or charge the bat- Recharge the battery more frequently if you tery. The service life of a thawed battery may use the vehicle mainly for short trips and/or be shorter. Start-up behavior may deterio- drive at low outside temperatures. rate, in particular at low temperatures. Have X the thawed battery checked at a qualified Charge the battery. Observe the notes in specialist workshop. the operating instructions for your battery charger. G WARNING X If necessary, install battery. Observe the During charging and jump-starting, explosive notes on reconnecting the battery. gases can escape from the battery. There is a i risk of an explosion. Recharge uninstalled, out of service bat- Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating teries every three months. This will counter sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient self-discharging and prevent battery dam- ventilation while charging and jump-starting. age. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING Care Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. ! Dirty battery clamps and battery surfaces Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do cause leak currents which lead to the bat- not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over teries discharging. the battery. Keep children away from batter- ! Maintenance and care Do not use cleaning agents containing ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with fuel. Cleaning agents containing fuel cor- plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- rode the battery housing. tion. ! If dirt gets into the battery cell, battery ! Only charge the installed battery with a self-discharge will increase and the battery battery charger that has been tested and may be damaged. approved by the distributor named on the The following points on battery care must be inside of the front cover. This device allows observed: the battery to be charged when it is instal- X led in the vehicle. The vehicle's electronics Regularly check the battery terminals and may otherwise be damaged. the fastening of the negative cable to the chassis to ensure that they are firmly A battery charger unit specially adapted for seated. Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and X Always keep the battery terminals and bat- approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an tery surfaces clean and dry. accessory. Only this device permits the X charging of the battery in its installed posi- Lightly grease the undersides of the battery tion. Only charge the installed battery with a terminals with acid-resistant grease. battery charger that has been tested and X Only clean the battery casing with a com- approved by Mercedes-Benz, using the jump- mercially available cleaning product. start connection point in the engine compartment. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information and availability. Read Care 265

Care H Environmental note Notes on care Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible man- G WARNING ner. If you use openings in the bodywork or Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for detachable parts as steps, you could: retaining the quality in the long term. R slip and/or fall Use care products and cleaning agents rec- Rdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to ommended and approved for Sprinter vehi- fall. cles. There is a risk of injury. Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suitable ladder. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any Automatic car wash of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths G WARNING Rabrasive cleaning agents Braking efficiency is reduced after washing Rsolvents the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Rcleaning agents containing solvents After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic Do not scrub. conditions until full braking power is restored. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless scraper. You could otherwise scratch or Automatic Car Wash as these use special Maintenance and care damage the surfaces and protective film. cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended damage the paintwork or plastic parts. period straight after cleaning it, particularly ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is after having cleaned the wheels with wheel suitable for the size of the vehicle. cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause Before washing the vehicle in an automatic increased corrosion of the brake discs and car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you remove any additional antennas. Other- should drive for a few minutes after clean- wise, the exterior mirror, antenna or the ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the vehicle itself could be damaged. brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Make sure that the exterior mirrors are fully folded out again and that any additional H Environmental note antennas are re-installed when you leave Only clean your vehicle at specially designed the automatic car wash. wash bays. Dispose of empty containers and ! Make sure that: used cleaning products in an environmentally R responsible manner. the side windows and the roof are completely closed Rthe climate control blower is switched off Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0

Z 266 Care

The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Power washers You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car G WARNING wash from the very start. The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehi- blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage cle in an automatic car wash. to the tires or chassis components. Compo- After putting the vehicle through an auto- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- matic car wash, wipe off wax from: edly. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe rear view camera lens (Y page 269) Do not use power washers with circular jet Rthe windshield nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged Rthe windshield wiper blades tires or chassis components replaced immediately. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the wind- ! Under no circumstances use power wash- shield. ers in the vehicle interior. The pressurized water and associated spray produced by Washing by hand the power washer could cause extensive In some countries, washing by hand is only damage to the vehicle. allowed at specially equipped washing bays. ! Observe the minimum distance to be Observe the legal requirements of the coun- maintained between the nozzle of the try you are currently in when washing by power washer and object to be cleaned, as hand. outlined below: X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rapproximately 2.2 ft(70 cm) when using vehicle in direct sunlight. round-jet nozzles

Maintenance and care X Use a soft car sponge. Rapproximately 1 ft (30 cm) when using X Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. a car sham- 25°flat-spray jets and dirt blasters poo approved for use with Sprinter vehi- Keep the water jet moving while cleaning. cles. To avoid causing damage, do not point the X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a water jet directly at: gentle jet of water. Rdoor joints X Do not point the water jet directly towards Rbrake hoses the air inlets. Relectrical components X Use plenty of water and rinse out the R sponge frequently. electrical connections R X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry seals thoroughly with a chamois. Rdrive train, especially not at the inter- X Do not let the cleaning agents dry on the mediate bearing of the propeller shaft paintwork. Rrear view camera (camera lens and microphone opening on the bottom) When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as Keep a minimum distance of soon as possible. 1.6 ft(50 cm). Cleaning the engine ! Water must not enter intake or ventilation openings. When cleaning with high pres- Care 267

sure water or steam cleaners, the spray Always switch off the windshield wipers and must not be aimed directly at electrical the ignition before cleaning the windshield or components or the terminals of electrical wiper blades. lines. Preserve the engine after the engine has ! Do not fold the windshield wipers away been cleaned. Protect the belt drive system from the windshield unless the hood is from exposure to the preservative agent. closed. Otherwise, you could damage the hood. Also observe the information under "Power washers" (Y page 266). ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if Cleaning the paintwork the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. ! Do not affix: ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- Rstickers vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do R films not touch the insides of the windows with Rmagnetic plates or similar items hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. to painted surfaces. You could otherwise There is otherwise a risk of damaging the damage the paintwork. windows. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected Before cleaning the windshield by corrosion and damage caused by inade- X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition quate care cannot always be completely lock or remove it. repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from cialist workshop. the windshield until you feel them engage. X Remove impurities immediately, where Before switching the ignition on again, fold Maintenance and care possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. the windshield wipers back into position. X Soak insect remains with insect remover Cleaning the windows and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse Clean the inside and outside of the win- off the treated areas afterwards. dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, for Sprinter vehicles. oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. Exterior X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use any acidic or alkaline cleaning Cleaning the windows agents. They can cause corrosion on the G WARNING wheel bolts (wheel nuts) or the retainer springs for the wheel-balancing weights. You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of period straight after cleaning it, particularly injury. after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and

Z 268 Care

brake pads/linings. For this reason, you Cleaning the exterior lighting should drive for a few minutes after clean- ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the cloths which are suitable for plastic light brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or vehicle can then be parked. cleaning cloths could scratch or damage If you clean the wheels with a power washer, the plastic light lenses. observe the safety notes for the power X Clean the plastic covers of the exterior washer (Y page 266). You could otherwise lighting with a damp sponge and a mild damage the tires. cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo for Cleaning the wiper blades Sprinter vehicles, or with cleaning cloths. G WARNING Cleaning the mirror turn signal You could become trapped by the windshield ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning wipers if they start moving while cleaning the cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning injury. cloths could scratch or damage the plastic Always switch off the windshield wipers and lenses of the mirror turn signals. the ignition before cleaning the windshield or X wiper blades. Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using ! Do not fold the windshield wipers away a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. from the windshield unless the hood is car shampoo or cleaning cloths. closed. Otherwise, you could damage the

Maintenance and care hood. Cleaning the sensors ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and the wiper blade could be damaged. do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and damage the sensors. do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the If you clean the sensors with a power graphite coating could be damaged. This washer or steam cleaner, observe the infor- could cause wiper noise. mation provided by the manufacturer regarding the distance to be maintained ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding between the vehicle and the nozzle of the back. The windshield could be damaged if power washer. the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield until you feel them engage. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold back the wiper arms before switching on the ignition.

PARKTRONIC sensors (example: front bumper, left side of vehicle) Care 269

X Clean all sensors : in the front and rear Do not oil or grease the contact plates and bumpers with water, shampoo and a soft contact pins. cloth. Steps Cleaning the rear view camera Cleaning the electrical step ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and Clean the electrical step at least once a do not scrub. Otherwise, you will scratch or month. Make sure that no dirt accumulates in damage the lens of the rear-view camera. the housing or on the step. If you clean the vehicle with a high-pressure X Extend the electrical step (Y page 73). or steam cleaner, maintain a distance of at X Close the sliding door until the door lock least 1.650 cm from the rear-view camera. engages. Do not aim directly at the rear-view camera The electrical step remains extended for or at the microphone opening on the under- cleaning. side of the rear-view camera. You could X otherwise damage the rear-view camera. Clean the electrical step and the housing with a power washer. X After cleaning, spray the step guides on each side with silicone spray when the housing and electrical step are dry. Do not use oil or grease as a lubricant. X Retract the electrical step. Access step in the bumper Maintenance and care

Rear view camera in the middle of the roof above the high-mounted brake lamp : Camera lens ; Microphone openings X Clean camera lens : with clean water and a soft cloth. Make sure that you do not apply any wax to camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If Example: access step in the bumper necessary, remove the wax using water, Pay attention to the important safety notes in shampoo and a soft cloth. the "Notes on care" (Y page 265) and "Power washers" (Y page 266) sections. Cleaning the sliding door Keep step in the bumper : free from dirt, X Remove foreign objects from the vicinity of such as: the contact surfaces and contact pins of Rmud the sliding door. R X clay Clean the contact surfaces and contact R pins with a mild cleaning agent and a soft snow cloth. Rice

Z 270 Care

X Clean access step in the bumper : with a X Switch off the audio equipment and let the power washer. display cool down. X Clean the display surface with a commer- Cleaning the trailer tow hitch cially available microfiber cloth and cleaner for TFT/LCD displays. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- power washer. Do not use solvents. fiber cloth. ! Observe the notes on care in the Opera- tor's Manual for the trailer tow hitch and Cleaning the plastic trim the ball coupling manufacturer. G WARNING You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch car- Care products and cleaning agents containing ried out by a qualified specialist workshop. solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deploy- Interior ment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning Cleaning with power washers agents to clean the cockpit. ! When using liquids to clean the vehicle ! interior, observe the following points: Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: RUnder no circumstances use power R washers. stickers R RMake sure that no fluids enter or remain films R

Maintenance and care in gaps and cavities. scented oil bottles or similar items REnsure sufficient ventilation when clean- You can otherwise damage the plastic. ing. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent RMake sure that the vehicle interior is or sunscreen to come into contact with the completely dry after cleaning. plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Cleaning the display X Wipe the plastic trim and the cockpit with a ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber lowing: cloth. X Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Heavy soiling: use a mild detergent or care products and cleaning agents recommen- Rabrasive cleaning agents ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents Cleaning the steering wheel and selec- These may damage the display surface. Do tor lever not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara- X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth. ble damage to the display. Cleaning the trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- Care 271

ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of Cleaning the headliner damaging the surface. X Use a soft brush or dry shampoo to remove X Wipe the trim elements with a damp, lint- heavy soiling. free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care products and Cleaning the curtains cleaning agents recommended and ! approved for Sprinter vehicles. The curtains must not be washed. Wash- ing could cause the curtains to shrink and Cleaning the seat covers lose their fire-retardant properties. Always have the curtains dry-cleaned. ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean arti- ficial leather covers. If used often, a microfiber cloth can damage the cover. ! Clean: Rartificial leather covers with a cloth mois- tened with a solution containing 1% detergent, e.g. dish washing liquid. Rcloth covers with a microfiber cloth mois- tened with a solution containing 1% detergent, e.g. dish washing liquid. Wipe entire seat sections carefully to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on

the type of dirt and how long it has been Maintenance and care there.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. Remove any stains or dirt immediately. This will avoid residue or damage. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Z 272 273

Useful information ...... 274 Where will I find...? ...... 274 Flat tire ...... 276 Jump-starting ...... 276 Tow-starting and towing away ...... 277 Electrical fuses ...... 280 Roadside Assistance 274 Where will I find...?

Useful information Unlocking and removing the cover X Turn quick-release fastener : counter- This Operator's Manual describes all models clockwise or clockwise 2. as well as standard and optional equipment of X Slightly raise and pull out the cover. your vehicle that were available at the time of going to print. Country-specific variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the described functions. This also applies to systems and functions relevant to safety. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 25).

Where will I find...? Vehicle tool kit Removing the vehicle tool kit and the jack General notes X Remove vehicle tool kit A. X Pull up quick-release lever = and unhook The vehicle tool kit is in the stowage com- the retaining strap of jack ?. partment in the footwell on the co-driver's X side. Lift jack ? upwards out of the holder. i The vehicle tool kit consists of: When stowing away the jack, place it in the holder as shown in the illustration. R a towing eye Make sure that the retaining strap of the Ra screwdriver with Torx, Phillips and slotted jack is hooked in and tensioned. bits Inserting and engaging the cover

Roadside Assistance If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel X bracket and a jack, the vehicle tool kit addi- Slide in the cover and fold it down. tionally contains: X Press down quick-release fastener : until it engages. Ra wheel wrench Ra spanner Ra pump lever rod

Stowage compartment in the co-driver's footwell Where will I find...? 275

Warning triangle and warning lamp Removing the warning triangle Removing the warning lamp

Warning triangles at the back of the driver's seat base X Lift warning triangle : up and out of the bracket.

First-aid kit Removing the first-aid kit

X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position 2.

The cover is unlocked. Roadside Assistance X Lift up the cover. X Take warning lamp = out of the retainer. X Fold the cover up and turn the quick- release fasteners to position 1. The cover is locked.

X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position 2. The cover is unlocked. X Lift up the cover. 276 Jump-starting

X Take first-aid kit = out of the retainer. Jump-starting X Fold the cover up and turn the quick- Important safety notes release fasteners to position 1. The cover is locked. G WARNING i Check the expiration date on the first-aid During charging and jump-starting, explosive kit at least once a year. Replace any expired gases can escape from the battery. There is a or missing contents. risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient Fire extinguisher ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Removing the fire extinguisher Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.

Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is dis- Fire extinguisher at the front of the base of the co- charged, the engine can be jump-started from driver's seat another vehicle or from a donor battery using jumper cables. For this purpose, the vehicle X Pull tabs ; upwards. has a jump-starting connection point in the X Take fire extinguisher : out of its holder.

Roadside Assistance engine compartment. Please read the instructions on fire extin- The additional battery in the engine compart- guisher : carefully and familiarize yourself ment is not suitable for jump-starting opera- with its operation. Have fire extinguisher : tions. If your vehicle requires jump-starting, refilled after each use and checked every one or if you use it to jump-start another vehicle, or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emer- use the jump-starting connection point in the gency. engine compartment. Observe the legal requirements for each indi- When jump-starting, observe the following vidual country. points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. Flat tire If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a donor battery or a jump-starting device. Information on breakdown assistance in the R case of a flat tire can be found in the chapter Do not start the engine if the battery is fro- "Wheels and tires" (Y page 305). zen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. Tow-starting and towing away 277

ROnly use jumper cables that have a suffi- Tow-starting and towing away cient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. Important safety notes RIf the battery is fully discharged, attach the G WARNING battery of another vehicle for a few minutes Functions relevant to safety are restricted or before attempting to start. This charges the no longer available if: empty battery a little. R RMake sure that the two vehicles do not the engine is not running. touch. Rthe brake system or the power steering is Make sure that: malfunctioning. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. or the vehicle's electrical system. Rbare parts of the terminal clamps do not If your vehicle is being towed, much more come into contact with other metal parts force may be necessary to steer or brake. while the jumper cables are connected to There is a risk of an accident. the battery. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, Rthe jumper cables cannot come into con- make sure that the steering moves freely. tact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine G WARNING is started and while it is running. You can no longer steer the vehicle if the i Jumper cables and further information steering wheel lock has been engaged. There regarding jump starting can be obtained at is a risk of an accident. any qualified specialist workshop. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

Before connecting the jumper cables G WARNING

On vehicles with a battery main switch, check When towing or tow-starting another vehicle Roadside Assistance whether the battery main switch is switched and its weight is greater than the permissible on (Y page 137). gross weight of your vehicle, the: X Apply the parking brake. Rthe towing eye could detach itself X Move the selector lever of the automatic Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- transmission to position P. over. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. There is a risk of an accident. audio equipment, blower. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition its weight should not be greater than the per- lock and remove it (Y page 138). missible gross weight of your vehicle. X Open the hood (Y page 248). Information on the gross vehicle weight can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 316). ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

Z 278 Tow-starting and towing away

! Observe the following points when towing Installing/removing the towing eye with a tow rope: RSecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. REnsure that the tow cable is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow cable in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road users aware that the vehicle is being towed. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing eye. R The fixture for the front towing eye is located in the Observe the brake lamps of the towing bumper. vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, Rear towing eye under the bumper, attached to the the vehicles could be damaged. chassis

Roadside Assistance When towing away, you must observe the Your vehicle may be equipped with rear tow- legal requirements for the country in which ing eye ;. If you tow or tow-start a vehicle, you are currently driving. attach the towing device to rear towing It is preferable to have the vehicle transpor- eye ;. ted on a transporter or trailer instead of tow- If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer tow ing it. hitch, attach the towing device to the trailer The automatic transmission selector lever tow hitch (Y page 173). must be in the N position when towing the Installing the front towing eye vehicle. X Take the towing eye and screwdriver from The battery must be connected and charged. the vehicle tool kit (Y page 274). Otherwise, you: X Press cover : and remove cover : from Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to the opening. position 2 You will see the fixture for the towing eye. Rcannot move the selector lever to position X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the N on vehicles with automatic transmission stop. Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the X Insert screwdriver into the towing eye and automatic locking feature (Y page 71). You tighten it. could otherwise lock yourself out of the vehicle when pushing or towing away the vehicle. Tow-starting and towing away 279

Removing the front towing eye If the front axle is damaged, raise the vehicle X Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle at the front axle and if the rear axle is dam- tool kit. aged, raise the vehicle at the rear axle. X Insert the screwdriver into the towing eye Towing and turn the screwdriver counter-clockwise. If the front axle is raised, the vehicle may be X Unscrew the towing eye. towed a maximum of 30 miles (50 km). For a X Insert cover : with the lug at the bottom towing distance of over 30 miles (50 km), the and press it in at the top until it engages. propeller shafts to the driven axles must be removed. X Place the towing eye and screwdriver back in the vehicle tool kit. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Towing away in the event of malfunc- depressed. tions X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. With transmission damage X Release the brake pedal. ! Always use new bolts when installing the X Release the parking brake. propeller shafts. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition i Only have the propeller shafts fitted/ lock and leave it in this position. removed by qualified, skilled personnel. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps If the vehicle has transmission damage, have (Y page 95). the propeller shaft removed before towing X If the front axle is raised, do not exceed the away. towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) and the towing distance of 30 miles (50 km). Roadside Assistance Towing with the front or rear axle raised Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground General notes Important safety notes ! The ignition must be switched off if the vehicle is being towed with the front or rear G WARNING ® axle raised. Otherwise, ESP may intervene You can no longer steer the vehicle if the and damage the brake system. steering wheel lock has been engaged. There ! Always use new bolts when installing the is a risk of an accident. propeller shafts. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. i Only have the propeller shafts fitted/ removed by qualified, skilled personnel. ! Do not exceed a towing speed of 31 mph Observe the following before towing a vehicle (50 km/h). You could otherwise damage with a raised front or rear axle: the transmission. Rthe information on towing in the event of ! Always use new bolts when installing the malfunctions (Y page 279) and propeller shafts. Rthe important safety notes (Y page 277).

Z 280 Electrical fuses

i Only have the propeller shafts fitted/ Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible, removed by qualified, skilled personnel. using the tracks it made when it became Before towing the vehicle, observe the fol- stuck. lowing: Rthe information on towing in the event of Transporting the vehicle malfunctions (Y page 279) and ! You may only secure the vehicle by the Rthe important safety notes (Y page 277). wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as Towing axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. You may only tow the vehicle a maximum distance of 30 miles (50 km). For a towing distance of over 30 miles (50 km), the propeller Tow-starting (emergency engine shafts to the driven axles must be removed. starting) X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Vehicles with automatic transmission lock. ! X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Vehicles with automatic transmission depressed. must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. You can find information on jump-starting Y X Release the brake pedal. under "Jump-starting“ ( page 276). X Release the parking brake. X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition Electrical fuses lock. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps G WARNING Y Roadside Assistance ( page 95). If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if X Do not exceed the towing speed of 30 mph you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- (50 km/h) and the towing distance of age, the electric cables could be overloaded. 30 miles (50 km). This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified Recovering a vehicle that is stuck new fuses having the correct amperage. ! When recovering a vehicle that has ! Only use fuses that have been approved become stuck, pull it as smoothly and for Sprinter vehicles and that have the evenly as possible. Excessive tractive required fuse rating for the systems con- power could damage the vehicles. cerned. Components or systems could oth- If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or erwise be damaged. muddy ground, recover the vehicle with the The fuses in your vehicle switch off defective utmost care. This is especially the case if the power circuits. If a fuse blows, all the com- vehicle is laden. ponents on the circuit and their functions will Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a cease to operate. trailer attached. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and fuse rating. Observe the infor- Electrical fuses 281 mation about fuse rating in the fuse allocation chart. If a new fuse blows again, have the cause determined and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop. The fuse allocation chart and other information on the fuses can be found in the "Fuse allocation chart" supplement. Roadside Assistance

Z 282 283

Useful information ...... 284 Important safety notes ...... 284 Operation ...... 284 Operation in winter ...... 286 Tire pressure ...... 288 Loading the vehicle ...... 295 What you should know about wheels and tires ...... 299 Flat tire ...... 305 Changing wheels ...... 305 Wheel and tire combination ...... 311 Spare wheel ...... 312 Wheels and tires 284 Operation

Useful information Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- This Operator's Manual describes all models shop and inquire about: as well as standard and optional equipment of Rsuitability your vehicle that were available at the time of Rlegal stipulations going to print. Country-specific variations are Rfactory recommendations possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the described functions. Contact an authorized Sprinter dealer if you This also applies to systems and functions require information on tested and recommen- relevant to safety. ded wheels and tires for summer and winter driving. Advice on purchasing and caring for Read the information on qualified specialist tires is also available there. workshops (Y page 25). Information on tire and wheel dimensions and types as well as the recommended tire pres- Important safety notes sure for your vehicle can be found in the "Tire pressure" section (Y page 294). G Warning This data can also be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. Modifications to the brake system or wheels There is a risk of an accident. are not permitted. The use of wheel spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This do not drive with a flat tire. Immediately invalidates the general operating permit for replace the flat tire with your spare wheel, or the vehicle. consult a qualified specialist workshop. i Further information on wheels and tires G WARNING can be obtained at any qualified specialist If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, workshop. the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Operation Wheels and tires Always replace wheels and tires with those Information for a journey that fulfill the specifications of the original part. If the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire When replacing wheels, make sure to use the pressures, and correct them, if necessary Y correct: ( page 288). R While driving, pay attention to vibrations, designation noises and unusual handling characteristics, Rmodel e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that When replacing tires, make sure to use the the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus- correct: pect that a tire is defective, reduce your Rdesignation speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for Rmanufacturer damage. Hidden tire damage could also be R model causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires Accessories that are not approved for your and wheels checked at a qualified specialist vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being workshop. used correctly can impair operating safety. Operation 285

When parking your vehicle, make sure that The service life of tires depends on various the tires do not get deformed by the curb or factors, including the following: other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over Rdriving style curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try Rtire pressure to do so slowly and not at a sharp angle. Oth- R erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, mileage can get damaged. Tire tread Regular wheel and tire checks G WARNING G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- Check the tires regularly for signs of damage ditions. There is a risk of accident. and replace any damaged tires immediately. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- damage regularly, i.e. at least every two ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you weeks, as well as after driving off-road or on should regularly check the tread depth and rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a the condition of the tread across the entire loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention width of all tires. to damage such as: Minimum tire tread depth for: Rcuts in the tires RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) Rpunctures RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm) Rtears in the tires For safety reasons, replace the tires before Rbulges on tires the legally prescribed limit for the minimum Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels tire tread depth is reached. Regularly check the tire tread depth and the Wheels and tires condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 285). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not install anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved for your vehicle by dealers listed on the inside of the front cover. Do not install any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure Marker : shows the location where the bar monitor systems. indicator (arrow) for tread wear is integrated Regularly check the pressure of all the tires, into the tire tread. particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire Tread wear indicators (TWIs) are required by pressure if necessary (Y page 288). law. Six indicators are positioned over the tire tread. They are visible once the tread depth is

Z 286 Operation in winter

approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the M+S tires case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. G WARNING Wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type of tire can vary between the spare wheel and Selecting, mounting and renewing the wheel to be replaced. When the spare tires wheel is mounted, driving characteristics may be severely affected. There is a risk of an acci- ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same dent. type and make. In order to reduce risks: ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. Ryou should therefore adapt your driving RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for style and drive carefully. the first 65 miles (100 km). Rnever mount more than one spare wheel RDo not drive with tires which have too little that differs from the wheel to be replaced. tread depth, as this significantly reduces Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from the the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). wheel to be replaced for a short time. RReplace the tires after 6 years at the latest, Rdo not deactivate ESP®. regardless of wear. This also applies to the Rhave a spare wheel that differs from the spare wheel. wheel that has been changed replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. You must observe the correct wheel and Operation in winter tire dimensions as well as the wheel type. General notes G WARNING Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than specialist workshop at the onset of winter. ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter Prior to the onset of winter, ensure that snow and do not provide sufficient traction. There is chains are stowed in the vehicle a risk of an accident. Y Wheels and tires ( page 287). M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in Also observe the notes in the "Changing a (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. wheel" section (Y page 305). Use winter tires or all-season tires at temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †). Both types of tire Driving with summer tires are identified by the M+S marking. i At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), summer Only winter tires bearing the snowflake tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro- braking power. Change the tires on your vehi- vide the best possible grip in wintry road con- cle to M+S tire. Using summer tires at very ditions. cold temperatures could cause tears to form, Only these tires will allow driving safety sys- thereby damaging the tires permanently. We tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti- cannot accept responsibility for this type of mally in winter. These tires have been devel- damage. oped specifically for driving in snow. For safe driving, use M+S tires of the same make and tread pattern on all wheels. Operation in winter 287

Always observe the maximum permissible Snow chains increase traction on roads in speed specified for the M+S tires you have wintry conditions. mounted. For reasons of safety we only recommend If you mount M+S tires that have a lower max- using snow chains or traction aids that are imum permissible speed than that of the vehi- approved for the Sprinter. The snow chains or cle, affix a corresponding warning label in the traction aids must be of class U or meet the driver's field of vision. You can obtain this at a SAE type U specification. Information on qualified specialist workshop. snow chains is available at any qualified spe- Once you have mounted the winter tires: cialist workshop. When mounting snow chains, please bear the X Check the tire pressure (Y page 288). following points in mind: X Reactivate the tire pressure moni- R tor* (Y page 293). Snow chains cannot be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. When mounting the snow chains, note the permissible tire Snow chains and snow chain dimensions. RMount snow chains only in pairs and only to G WARNING the rear wheels. On vehicles with twin tires, If you drive too fast with snow chains moun- mount the snow chains to the outer wheels. ted, they may snap. As a result, you could Observe the manufacturer's mounting injure others and damage the vehicle. There is instructions. a risk of an accident. ROnly use snow chains when the road is cov- Observe the maximum permissible speed for ered by a layer of snow. Remove the snow operation with snow chains. chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. When driving with snow chains installed, do RThe use of snow chains may be restricted not exceed the maximum permissible speed by local regulations. Observe the appropri- of 30 mph (50 km/h). Observe the country- ate regulations before mounting snow specific laws and regulations for operation chains. with snow chains. R

When driving with snow chains installed, do Wheels and tires ! Check the snow chains for damage before not exceed the maximum permissible mounting them. Damaged or worn snow speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). chains may snap and damage the following RCheck the tension of the chains after a dis- components: tance of approximately 0.5 miles (1.0 km). Rwheel You can deactivate ASR (Y page 58) when Rwheel housing pulling away with snow chains mounted. This allows the wheels to spin in a controlled man- Rwheel suspension ner, achieving an increased driving force (cut- For this reason, you must use only snow ting action). chains that are free of defects. Observe the manufacturer's mounting instructions. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mount snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before mounting the snow chains.

* optional Z 288 Tire pressure

Tire pressure General notes Tire pressure specifications You will find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-mounted tires on the Important safety notes plates described here. G WARNING You will find a table of recommended tire pressure on the Tire and Loading Information Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the placard5 or on the tire pressure table on the following risks: B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. R the tires may burst, especially as the load Further information on tire pressure can be and vehicle speed increase. obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire Tire and Loading Information placard traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least Rif the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. Tire and Loading Information placard5 off-road driving The Tire and Loading Information placard is If necessary, correct the tire pressure. on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 295). i The specifications shown on the sample The Tire and Loading Information placard con- Tire and Loading Information placard and Wheels and tires tains recommended tire pressures : for cold tire pressure table are examples. Tire pres- tires. Recommended tire pressures : are sure data are vehicle-specific and may devi- valid for the maximum permissible load and ate from the data illustrated here. The tire up to the maximum permissible speed of the pressure data applicable to your vehicle vehicle. can be found on the Tire & Loading Infor- mation placard or tire pressure plate of your vehicle. H Environmental note Check the tire pressure regularly, at least every 14 days.

5 Only for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg). Tire pressure 289

Tire pressure plate The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours without direct sunlight on the tires, and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) Tire pressure plate Tire temperature changes depending on the ambient temperature, driving speed and tire The tire pressure table is located on the load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approx- (Y page 295). imately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this The tire pressure table contains recommen- into account when checking the pressure of ded tire pressures : for cold tires. Recom- warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it mended tire pressures : apply to the maxi- is too low for the current operating condi- mum permissible load and up to the maxi- tions. If you check the tire pressure when the mum permissible speed of the vehicle. tires are warm, it results in a higher value than when the tires are cold. This is normal. Do not under any circumstances release the air in Important notes on tire pressure order to adjust the pressure to the prescribed G WARNING value for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire Observe the recommended tire pressures for pressure that is too low may result in a tire cold tires: R blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. on the Tire and Loading Information plac- Wheels and tires RCheck the tire for foreign objects. ard6 on the B-pillar on the driver's side or RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the tire pressure table on the B-pillar on valve is leaking. the driver's side of the vehicle If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Underinflated or overinflated tires Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the Underinflated tires: tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about G WARNING the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with Tires with pressure that is too low can over- the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, pressure can be checked using the on-board they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg- computer. ular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

6 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).

Z 290 Tire pressure

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the pressures always observe the recommended tires, including the spare wheel. tire pressure for your vehicle (Y page 288). i The actual values for tires are specific to Underinflated tires can: each vehicle and may deviate from the val- Rfail from being overheated ues in the illustration. Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Tire valve (snap-in valve) Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption G WARNING Overinflated tires Tire valve that are not approved for your vehi- G WARNING cle by the distributor named on the inside cover page may result in a loss of tire pres- Tires with excessively high pressure can burst sure. This may affect road safety. There is a because they are damaged more easily by risk of an accident. road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can Only use tire valve that are approved for your severely impair the braking properties and the vehicle by the distributor named on the inside driving characteristics. There is a risk of an cover page. Always make sure you have the accident. correct tire valve type for the tires on your vehicle. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. ! Do not screw additional weights (check valves, etc.) onto the tire valves. The elec- Overinflated tires can: tronic components could thus be damaged. Rincrease the braking distance Only for vehicles without a tire pressure mon- R adversely affect handling itor: R wear excessively and/or unevenly For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Radversely affect ride comfort mends that you only use tire valves that have Rbe more susceptible to damage been tested for use on your vehicle. Wheels and tires Maximum tire pressures Checking the tire pressure manually In order to determine and adjust the tire pressures, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire you wish to check. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the loading information table or the tire pressure table : Maximum permitted tire pressure (exam- (Y page 288). ple) X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to Never exceed the maximum permissible tire the recommended value. inflation pressure. When adjusting the tire Tire pressure 291

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by Your vehicle has also been equipped with a pressing down the metal pin in the valve. TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, system is not operating properly. The TPMS check the tire pressure again using the tire malfunction indicator is combined with the pressure gauge. low tire pressure telltale. When the system X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will X Repeat the steps for the other tires. flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehi- Tire pressure monitor cle is started as long as the malfunction exists. Important safety notes When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal G WARNING low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- Each tire, including the spare (if provided), tions may occur for a variety of reasons, should be checked at least once a month including the mounting of incompatible when cold and inflated to the pressure rec- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- the Tire and Loading Information placard on tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal- the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure function telltale after replacing one or more label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that vehicle has tires of a different size than the the replacement or alternate tires and wheels size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor- allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- mation placard or the tire pressure label, you erly. should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitor are As an added safety feature, your vehicle has equipped with sensors in the wheels that been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring monitor the tire pressure of all four tires. The system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- tire pressure monitor monitors the pressure sure telltale when one or more of your tires in all four tires; you set this pressure when you are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, activate the tire pressure monitor. The tire Wheels and tires when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, pressure monitor warns you when the pres- you should stop and check your tires as soon sure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure monitor only functions if the corre- pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- sponding sensors are installed on all wheels. flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can You should always adjust the tire pressure lead to tire failure. Underinflation also according to the vehicle load. Restart the tire reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and pressure monitor if you change the tire pres- may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- sure. ping ability. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you if Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute a tire pressure is incorrect. Observe the notes for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- on the recommended tire pressure er's responsibility to maintain correct tire (Y page 288). pressure, even if underinflation has not The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn reached the level to trigger illumination of the you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. follow- TPMS low tire pressure telltale. ing penetration by a foreign object. In this USA only: event, brake the vehicle until it comes to a

Z 292 Tire pressure

standstill. Do not carry out any sudden steer- Checking the tire pressure electroni- ing maneuvers. cally (vehicles with steering wheel but- The tire pressure monitor has a yellow h tons) warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) or pressure loss (Canada). Depending on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, an underinflated tire or a malfunction in the tire pressure monitor is displayed: Rif the h warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is Tire pressure display significantly too low. The tire pressure mon- Using the steering wheel buttons itor is not malfunctioning. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition R h USA only: if the warning lamp flashes lock. for 60 seconds and then remains lit con- X V U stantly, the tire pressure monitor is mal- Press the or button repeatedly functioning. until the standard display is shown (Y page 187). Only vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the X 9 : on-board computer displays information on Press the or button repeatedly tire pressure. After a few minutes of driving, until the current pressure of the individual the current tire pressure of each tire is shown tires is shown in the display. in the on-board computer. If the vehicle is parked for longer than USA only: if the tire pressure monitor is mal- 20 minutes or you then drive at less than functioning, it may be more than 10 minutes 18 mph (30 km/h), the Tire pres. dis‐ before the malfunction is shown. The h played after driving for several tire pressure warning lamp flashes for minutes message appears. 60 seconds and then remains lit. When the i The tire pressure value shown in the dis- malfunction has been rectified, the h tire play may differ from those measured at a pressure warning lamp goes out after a few gas station using a pressure gage. The on- Wheels and tires minutes of driving. board computer will generally give you a The tire pressure values indicated by the on- more exact value. board computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gage. Tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea Vehicles with steering wheel buttons level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val- If the tire pressure monitor detects a signifi- ues indicated by a pressure gage are higher cant pressure loss on one or more tires, the than those shown by the on-board computer. on-board computer displays a warning mes- In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. sage. The h tire pressure loss warning If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. wireless lamp in the instrument cluster (Y page 226) headphones, two-way radios) is operated lights up. inside the vehicle or in the vicinity of the vehi- The tire pressure is shown in 2 red rectangles. cle, this can interfere with the operation of the The pressure of the tire concerned is shown in tire pressure monitor. one of the two rectangles (Y page 197). Addi- tionally, a warning tone sounds. Tire pressure 293

Each tire that is affected by a significant loss the new reference values, provided that the of pressure is highlighted in the pressure dis- tire pressure monitor considers them to be play. plausible. If you wish to cancel the restart: Restarting the tire pressure monitor X Press the g button or the 4 menu button When you restart the tire pressure monitor, on the instrument cluster. the currently set tire pressure are taken as The activation process is canceled auto- reference values for monitoring. matically if 30 seconds elapse without In most cases, the tire pressure monitor input. detects the new reference values automati- Restarting the tire pressure monitor cally, e.g. after you have: (vehicles with steering wheel buttons): Rchanged the tire pressure X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition R changed wheels or tires lock. R installed new wheels or tires X Press the V or U button on the steer- However, you can also define reference val- ing wheel until the standard display ues manually as described here. (Y page 187) appears in the display. Before restarting the tire pressure moni- X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- tor: ing wheel repeatedly until the current pres- X Set the tire pressure to the value recom- sure of the individual tires is displayed or mended on the Tire and Loading Informa- the display shows the following message: tion placard or the tire pressure table on Tire pres. displayed after driving the B-pillar on the driver's side for several minutes (Y page 288). X Press the 9 reset button on the instru- Observe the notes on tire pressure when ment cluster. doing so (Y page 288). The display shows the following message: X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct Monitor current tire pressure? on all four wheels. X Press the W button on the steering

wheel. Wheels and tires Restarting the tire pressure monitor The display shows the following message: (vehicles without steering wheel buttons): Tire pres. monitor reactivated The tire pressure monitor activation proc- X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition ess has begun. The tire pressures meas- lock. ured for the individual wheels are stored as X Press the 4 menu button on the instru- the new reference values, provided that the ment cluster repeatedly until the display tire pressure monitor considers them to be shows the following message: plausible. +CAL- TPMS If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the f button on the instrument cluster. X Press the X button on the steering The display shows: wheel. OK TPMS The tire pressure monitor activation process has begun. The tire pressures measured for the individual wheels are stored as

Z 294 Tire pressure

Tire pressure table Front axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with a permissible front axle load of 3970 lbs(1801 kg), 4080 lbs (1851 kg) or 4410 lbs (2000 kg). Tires/disc wheel Front axle load 3970 lbs 4080 lbs 4410 lbs (1801 kg) (1851 kg) (2000 kg) 205/75 R 16 C 110/108R — 400 kPa 420 kPa 6.5Jx16 ET627 (4.0 bar/58 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi) LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N — 380 kPa 420 kPa 5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi) Half distance between centers: 4.94 in (125.5 mm) LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q — 380 kPa 420 kPa 5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi) Half distance between centers: 4.94 in (125.5 mm) LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N 320 kPa — — 6.5J x 16 (3.2 bar/47 psi) Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm) 235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R) — 380 kPa 420 kPa 6,5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi) Spare wheel, Vehicles with Super Single tires. Wheels and tires

7 Vehicles with Super Single tires. Loading the vehicle 295

Rear axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with a permissible rear axle load of 5360 lbs(2431 kg), 7060 lbs (3202 kg) or 7720 lbs (3502 kg). Tires/disc wheel Rear axle load 5360 lbs 7060 lbs 7720 lbs (2431 kg) (3202 kg) (3502 kg) LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N — 380 kPa 420 kPa 5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi) Half distance between centers: 4.94 in (125.5 mm) LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q — 380 kPa 420 kPa 5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi) Half distance between centers: 4.94 in (125.5 mm) LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N 480 kPa — — 6.5J x 16 (4.8 bar/ Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm) 70 psi) 285/65 R 16 C 128/126N (121 R) — 450 kPa — 285/65 R 16 C 128/126 N (123 (4.5 bar/65 psi) R)8 8.5J x 16 ET 63 235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R) — 520 kPa — 6,5Jx16 (5.2 bar/75 psi) Spare wheel, Vehicles with

Super Single tires. Wheels and tires

Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by The Tire and Loading Information placard on the exceeding the maximum load. driver’s door B-pillar

8 Super Single tires.

Z 296 Loading the vehicle

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show Maximum permissible gross vehicle the maximum possible load. weight rating (1) Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg): Tire and Loading Information placard : is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Tire and Loading Information placard : shows the permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible load of the vehicle. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is located : Maximum number of seats on the base of the driver's seat. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the ; Maximum permissible gross vehicle gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up weight rating of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- X Specification for maximum gross vehicle pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can weight ; is listed in the Tire and Loading also find information about the maximum Information placard: "The gross weight of Gross Axle Weight Rating on the front and occupants and luggage must not exceed rear axle. XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The maximum gross axle weight rating is The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, the maximum weight that can be carried cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if by one axle (front or rear axle). Do not applicable) must not exceed the specified exceed the maximum gross vehicle value. weight or the maximum gross axle weight i rating for the front or rear axle. The details on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard illustration are only an example. The maximum permissible gross

Wheels and tires Tire and Loading Information placard vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that which is illustrated. General notes You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your Only vehicles with a gross weight of less than vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and Loading placard. Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Loading the vehicle 297

Number of seats X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 pound passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs(1400 Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of : Maximum number of seats luggage and cargo being loaded on the ; Maximum permissible gross vehicle vehicle. For reasons of safety, that weight weight rating must not exceed the available cargo and Maximum number of seats : determines the luggage cargo capacity calculated in step maximum number of occupants allowed to 4. travel in the vehicle. This information can be X Step 6 (if applicable): If you intend to tow found on the Tire and Loading Information a trailer behind your vehicle, the load on the placard. trailer is transferred to your vehicle. Please consult the Tire and Loading Information i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor- placard, to determine how this reduces the mation placard illustration are only an available cargo and luggage load capacity example. The number of seats is vehicle- of your vehicle. specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard.

Determining the maximum load Wheels and tires Individual steps The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 in accordance with the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be traveling in your vehicle.

Z 298 Loading the vehicle

Example: Steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples of how to calculate total load and cargo capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard . Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Step 1 Combined maximum 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs weight of occupants (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg) and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Step 2 Number of people in 5 3 1 the vehicle (driver and occupants) Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1 occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2 Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1: pants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Wheels and tires Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) occupants What you should know about wheels and tires 299

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Step 3 Permissible cargo 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs and trailer load/ (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg) noseweight (maxi- Ò750 lbs Ò540 lbs Ò150 lbs (68 kg) mum gross vehicle (340 kg) = (245 kg) = = 1350 lbs weight rating from 750 lbs (340 kg) 960 lbs (435 kg) (612 kg) the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 177).

Vehicle identification plate trailer load/noseweight is usually approximately 10% of the gross weight of the trailer Even if you have calculated the total cargo and its load. carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details about What you should know about wheels this can be found on the vehicle identification and tires plate on the driver seat frame of your vehicle (Y page 316). Tire labeling Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of Overview the vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Wheels and tires Gross axle weight rating: the maximum permissible load that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweight The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross : DOT, Tire Identification Number weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, (Y page 302) the trailer load/noseweight is included in the ; Maximum tire load (Y page 301) load along with occupants and luggage. The

Z 300 What you should know about wheels and tires

= Maximum tire pressure (Y page 290) may not contain any letters or may contain ? Manufacturer one letter : that precedes the size descrip- A Tire material (Y page 302) tion B Tire size designation, load-bearing capa- If "LT" precedes the size description (as city and speed index (Y page 300) shown above): these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. C Tire name If "C" precedes the size description: these are The markings described above are on the tire commercial motor vehicle tires according to in addition to the tire name (sales designa- European manufacturing standards. tion) and the manufacturer's name. Tire width: tire width ; shows the nominal i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- tire width in millimeters. ate from the data in the example. Aspect ratio: aspect ratio = is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is Tire size designation, load bearing index shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu- and speed index lated by dividing the tire width by the tire G WARNING height. Tire code: tire code ? specifies the tire type. Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- "R" represents radial tires. "D" represents city and the approved maximum speed could diagonal tires, "B" represents diagonal radial lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There tires. is a risk of accident. Rim diameter: rim diameter A is the diam- Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the tire load rating and speed rating required for rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in your vehicle. inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index B is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the

Wheels and tires specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 295). Example: The load-bearing index 120 indicates a maximum load of 3,042 lb (1,380 kg) for the tire. : Design standard If two load-bearing capacity indices are speci- ; Tire width fied (as shown above), the first number states the load-bearing capacity for single tires, the = Nominal aspect ratio in % second number the load-bearing capacity for ? Tire code twin tires. For further information on the max- A Rim diameter imum tire load in kilograms and pounds, see B Load bearing index (Y page 301). C Speed index For further information on the load-bearing General: depending on the manufacturer's index, see "Load index" (Y page 301). standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall What you should know about wheels and tires 301

Speed rating: speed rating C specifies the Load index approved maximum speed of the tire. Regardless of the speed index always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Index Speed rating F up to 50 mph (80 km/h) G up to 56 mph (90 km/h) In addition to the load-bearing index, load rat- J up to 62 mph (100 km/h) ing : may be imprinted after the letters that K up to 68 mph (110 km/h) identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire (Y page 300). L up to 74 mph (120 km/h) RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the M up to 80 mph (130 km/h) example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire N up to 87 mph (140 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced P up to 93 mph (150 km/h) tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) RC, D, E: represents a load range that R over 106 mph (170 km/h) depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i Not all tires that have the M+S identifica- i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- tion offer the driving characteristics of win- ate from the data in the example. ter tires. In addition to the M+S marking,

winter tires also have the i snowflake Maximum tire load Wheels and tires symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. Further information on the reading of tire information can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and

Z 302 What you should know about wheels and tires

Loading Information placard on the B-pillaron Date of manufacture: date of manufacture the driver's side (Y page 295). A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent i The actual values for tires are specific to the week of manufacture, starting with "01" each vehicle and may deviate from the val- for the first calendar week. Positions three ues in the illustration. and four represent the year of manufacture. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in U.S. tire regulations stipulate that every tire 2008. manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retread- ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible This information describes the type of tire for the purchaser to easily identify the affec- cord and the number of layers in sidewall : ted tires. and under tire tread ;. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi- i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-

Wheels and tires cation code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? ate from the data in the example. and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definitions for tires and loading symbol : indicates that the tire complies Tire structure and characteristics with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Describes the number of layers or the number Manufacturer identification code: manu- of rubber-coated belts in the tire tread and facturer identification code ; provides the tire wall. These consist of steel, nylon, details on the tire manufacturer. New tires polyester, and other materials. have a code with two symbols. Retreaded Bar tires have a code with four symbols. Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds Further information about retreaded tires per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (Y page 284). (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. What you should know about wheels and tires 303

DOT (Department of Transportation) Gross Axle Weight Rating can be found on the DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of vehicle identification plate on the driver seat the United States Department of Transporta- frame (Y page 316). tion. Speed index Average weight of vehicle occupants The speed index is part of the tire identifica- The number of occupants for which the vehi- tion. It specifies the speed range for which the cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms tire is approved. (150 lbs). GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GTW is the total of weight of a trailer and the A uniform standard to grade the quality of weight of the load, accessories etc. on the tires with regard to tread quality, traction and trailer. temperature characteristics. The quality GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S The gross vehicle weight includes the weight government. The quality grade of a tire is of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight if applica- Recommended tire pressure ble. The gross vehicle weight may never The recommended tire pressures are the exceed the gross vehicle weight rating pressures specified for the tires mounted on (GVWR) specified on the vehicle identification the vehicle at the factory. plate at the base of the driver's seat (Y page 316). The tire and load information table9 contains the recommended tire pressures for cold GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) tires tires, the maximum permissible load and the The GVWR is the maximum permitted gross maximum permissible vehicle speed. weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the The tire pressure table contains the recom- vehicle including all accessories, occupants, els and mended tire pressure for cold tires under var- fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight if ious operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or applicable). The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating speed of the vehicle. is specified on the vehicle identification plate Whe Y Increased vehicle weight due to optional on the driver seat frame ( page 316). equipment Maximum weight of the laden vehicle The combined weight of all standard and The maximum weight is the sum of: optional equipment available for the vehicle, Rthe curb weight of the vehicle regardless of whether it is actually installed R on the vehicle or not. the weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Wheel rim Rthe weight of the factory installed optional The part of the wheel on which the tire is equipment mounted. Kilopascal (kPa) GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa are the GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rat- equivalent of 1 psi. Another tire pressure unit ing. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The

9 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4536 kg).

Z 304 What you should know about wheels and tires

is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva- Cold tire pressure lent of 1 bar. The tires are cold: Load index Rif the vehicle has been parked for at least In addition to the load bearing index, a load three hours without direct sunlight on the index can be stamped onto the sidewall of the tires, and tire. It specifies the load-bearing capacity of Rif the vehicle has not been driven further the tire more precisely. than 1 mile (1.6 km) Curb weight Tire tread The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- The part of the tire that comes into contact ment including the maximum filling capacity with the road. of fuel, oil, and coolant. It also includes the Tire bead air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed on the vehicle, but The tire bead ensures that the tire sits does not include passengers or luggage. securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from Maximum tire load coming loose from the wheel rim. The maximum tire load in kilograms or Sidewall pounds is the maximum weight for which a tire is approved. The part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Maximum permissible tire pressure Weight of optional extras Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard Maximum load on one tire parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated optional extras, such as high-performance by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle brakes, a roof rack or a high-performance by two. battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories.

Wheels and tires PSI (Pounds per square inch) Standard unit of measurement for tire pres- TIN (Tire Identification Number) sure. A unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, Aspect ratio for example for a product recall, and thus Relationship between tire height and width in identify the purchasers. The TIN is composed percent. of the manufacturer identification code, tire size, tire model code and manufacturing date. tire pressure Pressure inside the tire applying an outward Load bearing index force to every square inch of the tire's sur- The load bearing index (also load index) is a face. Tire pressure is specified in pounds per code that contains the maximum load bearing square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. capacity of a tire. Tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Changing wheels 305

TWR (permissible trailer drawbar load) Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels The TWR is the maximum permissible weight and tires are of the same dimensions. that may act on the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are loca- Wear indicator ted in the wheel. Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis- Tire-mounting tools should not be used tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is near the valve. This could damage the elec- level with the bars, the wear limit of á in tronic components. (1.6 mm) has been reached. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- Distribution of the vehicle occupants cialist workshop. The distribution of vehicle occupants over Always observe the instructions and safety designated seat positions in a vehicle. notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 306). Maximum permissible payload weight The wear patterns on the front and rear tires Nominal load and goods/luggage load plus differ, depending on the operating conditions. 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern seats in the vehicle. has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. Flat tire If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you General notes can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel, in your vehicle documents. If no warranty the spare wheel is under the rear of the vehi- book is available, the tires should be rotated Y cle ( page 312). every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to Information about installing a wheel can be 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do found in the "Wheel change" section not change the direction of rotation. Y ( page 306). Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and Wheels and tires When you replace a tire, we recommend that the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel you also replace the tire valve. Please observe is rotated. the safety-relevant information on tire valve Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tire Y ( page 290). pressure monitor if necessary.

Changing wheels Rotating the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Diagram showing tire rotation for single and dual tires

Z 306 Changing wheels

Single tires: if the tires are of identical X Turn the front wheels to the straight-ahead dimensions, you can rotate both wheels on position. both the front and rear axles so that the tires' X Move the selector lever of the automatic original direction of rotation is maintained. On transmission to position P. unidirectional tires, an arrow on the sidewall X Switch off the engine. shows the prescribed direction of rotation of X Passengers should leave the vehicle. Make the tire. sure that the passengers are not endan- Twin rear tires: if the tires are of identical gered as they do so. dimensions, you can rotate the wheels on the X Make sure that no one is near the danger front axle and the inner wheels on the rear area while the wheel is being changed. Any- axle in pairs such that the original direction of one who is not directly assisting in the tire rotation is retained. With unidirectional wheel change should, for example, stand tires, you may rotate the outside wheels at behind the barrier. the rear axle from one side to the other. X Place the warning triangle or warning lamp at a suitable distance. Direction of rotation Observe legal requirements. X Tires with a specified direction of rotation Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk away. of hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben- i Observe the safety notes on parking in the efits if the correct direction of rotation is section on "Driving and parking" observed. (Y page 149). An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates X On level terrain: place chocks or other its correct direction of rotation. suitable objects under the front and rear of You may mount a spare wheel against the the wheel that is diagonally opposite the direction of rotation. Observe the time wheel to be changed. restriction on use as well as the speed limi- X On slight inclines: place chocks or other tation specified on the spare wheel. suitable objects under the wheels on the front and rear axles opposite the wheel to Wheels and tires be changed. Storing wheels X Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack from Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, the footwell on the co-driver's side dry and preferably dark place. Protect the (Y page 274). tires from contact with oil, grease and fuel. X Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel bracket (Y page 313). Observe the safety notes in the "Spare wheel" section Mounting a wheel (Y page 312). Vehicle preparation X On wheels with wheel bolts, remove the hub caps. X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic and on a level, firm and non-slip surface. X If your vehicle poses a risk to approaching traffic, switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Apply the parking brake. Changing wheels 307

Observe the following when raising the vehicle: RWhen raising the vehicle, only use the jack which Mercedes-Benz has specifically approved for your vehicle. RThe vehicle's jack is intended only to raise the vehicle for a short time when changing a wheel. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and X Assemble the lug wrench extension using downhill slopes. the middle rod and the rod with the largest RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from diameter from the three-piece jack pump rolling away by applying the parking brake lever. and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen- X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug gage the parking brake while the vehicle is wrench extension as far as it will go onto raised. the lug wrench. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and X Using lug wrench :, loosen the wheel non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a bolts/wheel nuts on the wheel to be large, load-bearing underlay must be used. changed by about one full turn. Do not On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay unscrew the wheel bolts/nuts completely. must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RMake sure that the distance between the Raising the vehicle underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in(3 cm). G WARNING RNever place your hands or feet under the If you do not position the jack correctly at the raised vehicle. appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the RNever lie under the raised vehicle. jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RNever start the engine when the vehicle is

There is a risk of injury. raised. Wheels and tires Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- RNever open or close a door when the vehi- ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack cle is raised. must be positioned vertically, directly under RMake sure that no persons are present in the jacking point of the vehicle. the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. G WARNING ! Only use the jack pump lever middle rod On uphill and downhill slopes, the jack could and the rod with the largest diameter as a tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk lug wrench extension. Only slide the middle of injury. rod as far as it will go onto the lug wrench. Do not change wheels on uphill or downhill The rods may otherwise bend and be dis- gradients. Notify a qualified specialist work- torted to such an extent that they can no shop. longer be used as a pump lever for the jack. ! Do not place the jack on the leaf spring or ! Only position the jack on the jacking the differential case. points intended for this purpose. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.

Z 308 Changing wheels

Hydraulic jack Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type Preparing the hydraulic jack 2500) X Insert the third rod of jack pump lever : into the lug wrench extension. Jack pump lever : is assembled. X Close pressure release screw ;. X To do this, use the flattened section on pump lever : to turn pressure release screw ; clockwise to the stop. i Do not turn pressure release screw ; more than 1 or 2 full turns. Hydraulic fluid could otherwise escape. Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type X Insert pump lever : into the recess on the 3500) jack and secure by turning it clockwise. Jacking point at the rear axle on vehicle X Place the jack vertically beneath the jack- types 2500 and 3500 ing points described below. X Place the jack under the longitudinal mem- ber in front of the rear axle. Wheels and tires

Jacking point, front axle Jacking point at the front axle Jacking point, rear axle (example: Cab Chassis) Jacking point at the rear axle on chassis X Place the jack under the longitudinal mem- versions ber in front of the front axle. X Place the jack next to the front leaf spring support beneath the jacking point. Changing wheels 309

Removing a wheel The handling characteristics of your vehicle are affected when driving with a spare wheel ! Do not place the wheel bolts or the wheel installed. After changing a wheel, drive to the nuts in sand or dirt. The threads of the nearest specialist workshop and have the wheel bolts and wheel nuts could otherwise spare wheel replaced with a wheel and tire be damaged when being tightened. assembly that has a Super Single tire. X Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact X On front wheels with wheel nuts, remove surfaces. the wheel nut cover. X Unscrew the six adapter bolts on the spare X Remove the wheel. wheel and remove the adapter. X Tighten the adapter with the six adapter Installing the adapter bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern through the outer holes on the wheel hub. G WARNING X Tighten the six adapter bolts on the wheel If you tighten the adapter bolts when the vehi- hub to a tightening torque of 177 lb-ft cle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a (240 Nm). risk of injury. X Push the wheel onto the adapter and attach Make sure that the vehicle is properly pre- it. pared for a wheel change. Tighten the adapter bolts with particular care and attention. Mounting a new wheel Always observe the instructions and safety G WARNING notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 305). Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged G WARNING wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel If you do not tighten the bolts of the adapter to bolts to come loose. As a result, you could the specified tightening torque, the adapter lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of may come loose with the spare wheel. There accident. is a risk of an accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of Tighten the bolts of the adapter to the speci- damage to the threads, contact a qualified Wheels and tires fied tightening torque. Have the spare wheel specialist workshop immediately. Have the replaced with a complete wheel and an extra- damaged wheel bolts or hub threads wide tire at a qualified specialist workshop replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. immediately. G WARNING ! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts install the spare wheel, do not exceed the when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip maximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and over. There is a risk of injury. do not drive further than 65 miles(100 km). Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts The transmission could otherwise be dam- when the vehicle is on the ground. aged by the difference in wheel rotation speeds. Always observe the instructions and safety On vehicles with Super Single tires, you must notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 305). attach the narrow spare wheel to the rear axle Only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts that have by means of an adapter. The adapter is bolted been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. to the spare wheel using the adapter bolts for For safety reasons, we recommend that you transportation. only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts which have

Z 310 Changing wheels

been approved for Sprinter vehicles and the For wheels with wheel nuts: respective wheel. X Front wheels with wheel nut covers: press ! For a steel wheel, only use the short wheel the wheel nut covers onto the wheel nuts. bolts to mount the steel spare wheel. Using X Screw in the three wheel nuts over the fix- other wheel bolts to mount the steel spare ing discs of the wheel nut cover. wheel could damage the brake system. X Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure in the middle of the holes. monitor, electronic components are loca- X Screw on the rest of the wheel nuts. ted in the wheel. X Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the elec- Lowering the vehicle tronic components. G Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- WARNING cialist workshop. The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.

! Only use the jack pump lever middle rod and the rod with the largest diameter as a lug wrench extension. Only slide the middle rod as far as it will go onto the lug wrench. The rods may otherwise bend and be dis- : Wheel bolt for alloy wheel torted to such an extent that they can no ; Wheel bolt for steel wheel longer be used as a pump lever for the jack. ! X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you Wheels and tires surfaces. install the spare wheel, do not exceed the X Vehicles with Super Single tires: first attach maximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and the adapter for the narrow spare wheel to do not drive further than 65 miles(100 km). the wheel hub (Y page 309). The transmission could otherwise be dam- X Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub or aged by the difference in wheel rotation onto the adapter for the spare wheel and speeds. push it on. Wheels with centering by wheel bolts: X Vehicles with alloy wheels: take the short wheel bolts that secure the steel spare wheel out of the vehicle tool kit. X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly. Wheel and tire combination 311

X Wheel with hub cap: position the opening for the tire valve in the hub cap over the tire valve. X Push the edge of the hub cap with both hands against the wheel until it clicks into place. Make sure the hub cap retaining catches engage on the steel wheel. X Wheel with central hub cap: position the retaining lugs of the central hub cap over the wheel bolts. X Tightening torque pattern Hit the middle of the hub cap to engage it on :—B Wheel bolts or wheel nuts the wheel. X Using the pump lever, slowly turn the low- X Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel ering screw on the jack through approx- bracket (Y page 313). imately one revolution and carefully lower X Vehicles with Super Single tires: transport the vehicle (Y page 307). the defective rear wheel in the load area. X Put the jack aside. The rear wheel is too large for the spare X Pull the rod with the smallest diameter off wheel bracket. the pump lever. X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun- The shortened pump lever serves as a lug ted wheel and adjust it if necessary. wrench extension. Observe the recommended tire pressure X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug (Y page 288). wrench extension as far as it will go onto X Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to the lug wrench. the specified tightening torque after the X Using the extended lug wrench, tighten the vehicle has been driven for 30 miles wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in (50 km). the sequence indicated (: to B). When using a wheel/spare wheel with a new Tighten the wheel bolts to the following or newly painted wheel rim, have the wheel tightening torques: bolts/nuts retightened again after approx- Wheels and tires RSteel wheel 177 lb-ft (240 Nm) imately 600 to 3,000 miles (1,000 to 5,000 km). Observe the specified tightening R Alloy wheel 133 lb-ft (180 Nm) torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to a tightening tor- i que of 133 lb-ft (180 Nm). Vehicles with the tire pressure monitor X system: all mounted wheels must be equip- Push the piston on the hydraulic jack in ped with functioning sensors. again and close the pressure release screw. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle Wheel and tire combination tools in the vehicle again. General notes i You can now install the hub caps on steel wheels with wheel bolts. The installing pro- ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- cedure depends on whether the hub cap ommended for Sprinter vehicles, since pre- acts as a trim that covers the whole wheel, vious damage cannot always be detected or just covers the center. on retreaded tires. We can therefore not guarantee driving safety. Do not mount

Z 312 Spare wheel

used tires if you have no information about the wheel to be replaced. When the spare their previous usage. wheel is mounted, driving characteristics may The recommended tire pressures can be be severely affected. There is a risk of an acci- found: dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information plac- In order to reduce risks: ard10 on the B-pillar on the driver's side Ryou should therefore adapt your driving Ron the tire pressure table on the B-pillar on style and drive carefully. the driver's side Rnever mount more than one spare wheel The recommended tire pressure can also be that differs from the wheel to be replaced. found in the "Tire pressure table" section in Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from the this Operator's Manual (Y page 294). The wheel to be replaced for a short time. wheel/tire combination for your vehicle can Rdo not deactivate ESP®. be found on the tire pressure table. Further Rhave a spare wheel that differs from the information on wheel/tire combination can wheel that has been changed replaced at be obtained at any qualified specialist work- the nearest qualified specialist workshop. shop. You must observe the correct wheel and Check tire pressures regularly and only when tire dimensions as well as the wheel type. the tires are cold. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 288). When using a spare wheel of a different size, Follow the maintenance recommendations in do not exceed the maximum speed of the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your 80 km/h.

res vehicle documents. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always General notes equip the vehicle: ! Rwith tires of the same size across an axle Check the spare wheel regularly to see (left/right) that it is secure and has the prescribed tire Rwith the same type of tires on all wheels at pressure. a given time (summer tires, winter tires) The procedure for mounting the spare wheel Wheels and ti Tires that have been specially designed and is described in "Mounting a wheel" approved for your vehicle are marked with (Y page 306). MO or MO1 (Mercedes-Benz Original). You The following should be checked regularly, can find this identification on the tires them- particularly prior to long journeys: selves and in the following table. Rthe tire pressure of the spare wheel, which i Not all wheel/tire combinations can be should then be corrected if necessary installed at the factory in all countries. (Y page 288). Rthe fastenings of the spare wheel bracket. The spare wheel is located in a spare wheel Spare wheel bracket under the rear of the vehicle. Important safety notes Replace the tires after 6 years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the G WARNING spare wheel. Wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type of tire can vary between the spare wheel and

10 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg). Spare wheel 313 i If you have mounted a spare wheel, the X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket A and tire pressure monitor (Y page 291) will not unhook left-hand retaining hook =. function for this wheel. The spare wheel is X Assemble the pump lever for the jack and not equipped with a sensor for monitoring slide it into sleeve ? on spare wheel tire pressure. bracket A. X Raise spare wheel bracket A with the pump lever and unhook right-hand retain- Removing and installing the spare ing hook =. wheel X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket A down Cargo Van/Passenger Van to the ground. X Lift spare wheel bracket A slightly and pull the pump lever out of sleeve ?.

Bolt covers for the safety catches (example: Cargo Van) Removing Spare wheel in the spare wheel carrier X Open the rear doors. X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel X Place a screwdriver into recesses ; and beyond the rear edge of the spare wheel then pry off covers :. carrier. X X Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool Carefully remove the spare wheel from

kit (Y page 274), unscrew the now visible spare wheel bracket A. Wheels and tires bolts counter-clockwise by approximately The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare 20 turns. wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. Installing X Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare wheel bracket A. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto spare wheel bracket A, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. Spare wheel carrier under the vehicle X Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve ? on spare wheel bracket A.

Z 314 Spare wheel

X Raise spare wheel bracket A with the pump lever and attach right-hand retaining hook =. X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket A and attach left-hand retaining hook =. X Pull the pump lever out of sleeve ?. X Using the lug wrench, tighten the retaining hook bolts by turning them clockwise. X Replace and engage covers :. X Close the rear doors. X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel Cab Chassis version beyond the rear edge of spare wheel bracket ?. X Carefully remove the spare wheel from the bracket. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. Installing X Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare tires wheel bracket ?. Removing The spare wheel is heavy. When you place X Loosen fender nuts = manually and then the spare wheel onto spare wheel remove them. bracket ?, the center of gravity changes X Loosen nuts ; as far as the thread end. due to the weight of the wheel. The spare X ? wheel may slip down or tip over.

Wheels and Slightly raise spare wheel bracket and X unhook left-hand retaining hook :. Raise spare wheel bracket ? with the pump lever and attach right-hand retaining X Assemble the pump lever for the jack and hook :. slide it into the sleeve on the right-hand side of spare wheel bracket ?. X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket ? and attach left-hand retaining hook :. X Raise spare wheel bracket ? with the pump lever and unhook right-hand retain- X Pull the pump lever out. ing hook :. X Tighten nuts ;. X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket ? down X Put fender nuts = in place and tighten to the ground. them. X Lift spare wheel bracket ? slightly and pull the pump lever out of the sleeve. 315

Vehicle electronics ...... 316 Identification plates ...... 316 Service products and capacities ..... 318 Vehicle data ...... 327 Technical data 316 Identification plates

Vehicle electronics For operation of mobile phones and two-way radios, Mercedes Benz recommends connec- Tampering with the engine electron- tion to an approved exterior antenna. This is ics the only way to ensure optimum reception G WARNING quality inside the vehicle and to minimize mutual interference between the vehicle elec- Always have work on the engine electronics tronics, mobile phones and two-way radios. and related components carried out at a quali- The transmission output of the mobile phone fied specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehi- or two-way radio may not exceed the follow- cle's operating safety could be affected. ing maximum transmission output (PEAK): ! Only have engine electronics and the cor- Frequency range Maximum trans- responding parts, such as control units, mission output sensors or connector leads, serviced in a (PEAK) qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle parts may wear more quickly. Shortwave 100 W This can lead to loss of the New Vehicle (f < 50 MHz) Limited Warranty. 4 m waveband 30 W 2 m waveband 50 W Installing electrical or electronic equipment Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W G WARNING 70 cm waveband 35 W You and others may damage your health due GSM/UMTS/LTE 10 W to excessive electromagnetic radiation. By using an external antenna, the possible health risks of electromagnetic fields, which are Identification plates under discussion among the scientific com- munity, should be largely prevented. Vehicle identification plate with vehi- Therefore, only have the exterior antenna cle identification number (VIN) installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Technical data Electrical and electronic devices may have a detrimental effect on both the comfort and the operating safety of the vehicle. If equipment of this kind is installed, its electromagnetic compatibility must be checked and veri- fied. If these devices are linked to functions associated with resistance to interference, they must have type approval. This applies to the device or its interfaces to the vehicle elec- Vehicle identification plate for vehicles or chassis tronics, e.g. charging brackets. on the base of the driver's seat A telephone or two-way radio to be installed in X Open the driver’s door. the vehicle must be approved. Further infor- You will see vehicle identification plate : mation can be obtained from any Sprinter with the vehicle identification number Dealer. Identification plates 317

(VIN), the paint code and the permissible weight data.

Engine compartment ? VIN (stamped on the rear wall of the engine compartment) Example: vehicle identification plate (US vehicles) A Engine number (stamped on the crank- case) B Emission Control Information and engine oil11 instruction labels X Open the hood (Y page 248).

Example: chassis identification plate (US vehicles)

Example: Emission Control Information label

i Such data is vehicle-specific and may dif- Technical data fer from that shown. Always observe the specifications on your vehicle's identification plate.

Example: chassis identification plate (vehicles for Canada) Engine number ; VIN The engine number is stamped on the crank- = Paint code case. More information may be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

11 Also observe the notes on engine oil for diesel engines in the "Technical data" section.

Z 318 Service products and capacities

Service products and capacities cause engine damage and must therefore not be added to the service products. Important safety notes The use of additives is always the responsi- G WARNING bility of the vehicle operator. The use of additives may result in the restriction or loss of Service products may be poisonous and haz- your Limited Warranty entitlements. ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels Fuel of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original Important safety notes containers. Always keep service products out G of the reach of children. WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of H Environmental note fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion. Dispose of service products in an environ- Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating mentally responsible manner. sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating Service products include the following: before refueling. RFuels, e.g. diesel G WARNING RAdditives for the exhaust gas aftertreatment, e.g. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. RLubricants, e.g. engine oil, transmission oil You must make sure that fuel does not come RCoolant into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing R Brake fluid and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel RWasher fluid vapors. Keep fuel away from children. RClimate control system refrigerants If you or others come into contact with fuel, Approved service products comply with the observe the following: highest quality standards and are listed in the RWash away fuel from skin immediately MB Specifications for Service Products. Only using soap and water. use service products approved for the vehi- RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, Technical data cle. This is an important condition for the war- immediately rinse them thoroughly with ranty. clean water. Seek medical assistance with- You will recognize the approved service prod- out delay. ucts by the inscription on the container: MB RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- Approval (e.g. MB Approval 228.5) tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- Other identifications and recommendations ing. refer to quality level or a specification accord- RImmediately change out of clothing which ing to an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 228.5). has come into contact with fuel. They are therefore not necessarily approved. Further information can be obtained at any When handling, storing and disposing of fuels, qualified specialist workshop. please observe the relevant regulations. Additives for approved service products are neither required nor permitted. Approved fuel additives are the exception. Additives can Service products and capacities 319

Tank contents a diesel fuel with a sulfur content greater than 15 ppm. Depending on equipment, the total capacity of the fuel tank may vary. ! Do not use the following: R Total capacity Marine diesel RHeating oil 2500 Approx- RBio-diesel imately 3500 RVegetable oil 26.4 US gal R (100 l) Gasoline RParaffin RKerosene of which reserve fuel Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and Models with a total capacity Approx- do not use any special additives. This can of approximately imately otherwise lead to engine damage. This 26.4 US gal (100 l) 5.3 US gal does not include flow improver additives. (20 l) For further information, see "Flow improv- ers". Diesel You will generally find information about the fuel grade on the filling pump. If there is no Fuel grade identification on the filling pump, consult a G WARNING gas station attendant. If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash For more information about refueling point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. (Y page 145). When the engine is running, exhaust system Diesel at very low outside temperatures components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire. G WARNING Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline If you heat fuel system components, e.g. with with diesel fuel. a hot-air gun or open flame, these components could be damaged. This can cause fuel ! Filter the fuel before transferring it to the to escape and ignite. Depending on the type vehicle if you are refueling the vehicle from of damage, fuel may also not escape until the Technical data barrels or containers. engine is running. There is a risk of fire and This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel explosion. system due to contaminated fuel. Never heat fuel system components. Contact ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- a qualified specialist workshop to rectify the malfunction. ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with a high sulfur content is available, you will Refill only with commercially available need to carry out your vehicle's oil change ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maxi- at shorter intervals. Further information on mum sulfur content 15 ppm), which fulfills the oil change intervals can be obtained at a ASTM D975 standard. qualified specialist workshop. The flow properties of diesel may be inade- ! Sprinter diesel engine quate at low outside temperatures due to You will damage the diesel engine if you do paraffin separation. not refuel with ultra-low sulfur diesel or use

Z 320 Service products and capacities

i Malfunctions resulting from paraffin sep- Rthe operating conditions aration can only be rectified by heating the Rthe type or quality of the fuel used entire fuel system. Park the vehicle in a The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the heated garage, for example. following situations: To prevent operating problems, diesel with Rat very low outside temperatures better flow qualities is available during the Rin city traffic winter months. You can obtain information at R the gas station or from your fuel supplier. during short journeys R Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheat- on mountainous terrain ing system. This improves the flow properties Rwhen towing a trailer of the diesel by approximately 46 ‡ (8 †). To keep fuel consumption low, observe the ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be used advice in the "Protection of the environment" without risk of malfunction down to an out- section (Y page 23). side temperature of approximately 14 ‡ The following components of the different (Ò10 †). vehicle versions influence fuel consumption: Fuel additives Rtire sizes, tire tread, tire pressure, tire con- ! Do not add gasoline or kerosene to diesel dition fuel to improve its flow characteristics. Rbody Gasoline or kerosene impairs the lubricat- Rtransmission ratios for the drive assem- ing properties of the diesel fuel. This can blies result in damage to the fuel injection sys- Radditional equipment (e.g. air-conditioning tem, for example. system, auxiliary heating system) Information on fuel consumption For these reasons, the actual consumption figures for your vehicle may deviate from the H Environmental note consumption figures determined according to EU Directive 80/1268/EEC. CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien- tists believe to be principally responsible for Data concerning fuel consumption are recor- global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your ded in the on-board computer; use the steering wheel buttons to call up the Trip com- vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to Y fuel consumption and therefore depend on: puter menu ( page 195). Technical data Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as envi- General notes ronmental influences, road conditions or ! Only use DEF in accordance with traffic flow ISO 22241. The exhaust gas aftertreatment You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis- system may otherwise be damaged. sions by driving carefully and having it serv- Observe the MB Specifications for Service iced regularly. Products, Sheet No. 352.0. Damage caused by the use of other reduc- Fuel consumption depends on: ing agents will invalidate the New Vehicle Rthe vehicle version Limited Warranty. Rthe style of driving Service products and capacities 321

! If DEF comes into contact with a painted Only store DEF in containers made of high- or aluminum surface, wash the surface off alloy Cr‑Ni steel or Mo‑Cr‑Ni steel in accord- immediately with plenty of water. ance with DIN EN 10 088‑1/2/3 or plastic containers made of polypropylene or poly- High ambient temperatures ethylene. When opening the DEF tank filler cap at high outside temperatures, ammonia vapors may Purity escape. Ammonia vapors have a pungent ! Impurities in DEF (e.g. caused by other odor and are particularly irritating for your service products, cleaning agents, dust, skin, respiratory organs and eyes. This may etc.) result in increased emissions, mal- result in burning eyes, nose and throat, as functions, catalytic converter damage or well as coughing and watering eyes. Do not engine damage. inhale ammonia vapors. The purity of DEF is essential to prevent mal- If DEF heats up, e.g. in direct sunlight, in the functions in the exhaust gas aftertreatment. DEF supply reservoir for some time to over If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. 122 ‡ (50 †), ammonia vapor will develop. during repair work, the same liquid must not Low ambient temperatures be used to refill the tank. Its purity is no longer DEF freezes at a temperature of approx- guaranteed. imately 12 ‡(Ò11 †). The vehicle is equipped Disposal with a DEF preheating system at the factory. Observe country-specific laws and regula- Winter operation is therefore also guaranteed tions when disposing of DEF. at temperatures under 12 ‡ (Ò11 †). % Environmental note Additives and tap water Dispose of DEF in an environmentally respon- ! Do not mix DEF with any additives and do sible manner. not dilute DEF with tap water. Otherwise, the exhaust gas aftertreatment may be DEF supply reservoir content damaged. Depending on equipment, the DEF supply res- Observe the MB Specifications for Service ervoir content may vary. Products, Sheet No. 352.0. Tank contents Damage that arises through the use of addi- Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)12

tives or tap water will invalidate the New Technical data Vehicle Limited Warranty. Approximately 4.7 US gal (18.0 l) Storage DEF consumption ! Containers made of aluminum, copper, For vehicles with a 4-cylinder, in-line copper alloys as well as unalloyed or engine (OM 651), the DEF consumption of galvanized steel are not suitable for storing the vehicle is: DEF. If stored in these types of containers, DEF could cause constituents of these met- Ras a Cargo Van/Passenger Van, approx. als to dissolve and cause irreparable dam- 2322 MPG (0.2 l/100 km) age to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Ras a Cab Chassis, approx. 1720 MPG Damage caused by such impurities in the (0.35 l/100 km) DEF will invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

12 DEF according to ISO 22241. Observe MB Specifications for Service Products, Sheet 352.0.

Z 322 Service products and capacities

For vehicles with a 6-cylinder, in-line The MB Specifications for Service Products engine (OM 642), the DEF consumption of are valid for your vehicle13 the vehicle is: R228.51 R as a Cargo Van/Passenger Van, approx. R229.31 2322 MPG (0.10 l/100 km) R229.51 Ras a Cab Chassis approx. 1720 MPG These are high quality engine oils which have (0.14 l/100 km) a positive effect on: In each case, the stated consumption figure is R a mean value between urban and extra-urban engine wear driving cycles. The consumption figure does Rfuel consumption not refer to a specific vehicle, but is provided Rexhaust gas emissions for the purposes of comparison between dif- Multi-grade engine oils of the prescribed SAE ferent vehicle types. class (viscosity) may be used all year round, DEF consumption, like fuel consumption, is taking the outside temperatures into very dependent on the driving style and the account. operating conditions. This means that the real consumption figures during operation of your Engine oil viscosity vehicle may deviate from those stated. ! If the SAE viscosity class of the engine oil used does not cover the outside tempera- Engine oil ture range in which you are operating the vehicle, it must be changed in good time, in General notes particular before the cold season commences. Using an engine oil that does not have ! The bottles of the various engine oil types adequate temperature characteristics can are marked with ACEA (Association des lead to engine damage. Constructeurs Européens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) The temperature range information of the classifications. Only use approved engine SAE classification always refers to that of oils that conform to the following MB Spec- fresh oil. The temperature characteristics ifications for Service Products and the pre- of the engine oil may deteriorate signifi- scribed ACEA and/or API classifications. cantly due to aging in use, especially at low outside temperatures.

Technical data Using engine oils of another quality is not permitted and may invalidate the New Vehi- We recommend that you change the engine cle Limited Warranty. oil before the cold season commences. Use The use of other, non-approved engine oils an approved engine oil of the specified SAE for diesel engines can cause damage to the class. diesel particle filter (DPF). Use only engine oils that have been approved for your vehicle according to the MB Specifi- cations for Service Products.

13 If the quality grade is not available for diesel, you may also add engine oils meeting the requirements in MB Sheet No. 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be added is then limited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l). Service products and capacities 323

added is then limited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l). Engine oils are differentiated according to: Rengine oil brand Rquality grade (sheet number) RSAE class (viscosity) Subsequently have the engine oil changed at the earliest possible opportunity.

Interval for oil change Engine oil SAE classification Viscosity indicates the flow characteristics of The on-board computer automatically shows a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this the date for the next oil change as an event means that it is thick; a low viscosity means message in the display. that it is thin. Only by using engine oil with a particularly Depending on the respective outside temper- high quality grade, e.g. according to Sheet atures, select an engine oil according to SAE Number 228.51 of the Mercedes-Benz Spec- classification (viscosity). The table displays ifications for Service Products, can the maxi- the SAE classification to be used. The low mum interval for oil change be achieved. temperature characteristics of engine oils We recommend having the oil changed at a can noticeably deteriorate during operation, qualified specialist workshop. e.g. from aging, soot and fuel accretion. For Engine oil for diesel engines this reason, regular oil changes using an approved engine oil from the suitable SAE Product name/number classification are urgently recommended. See the Maintenance Booklet. MB Sheet Number 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. Capacities This could damage the engine. ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much Miscibility of engine oils engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have Technical data ! Mixing oils reduces the benefits of using excess engine oil siphoned off. high grade engine oils. Oil change including oil filter We recommend that you only add engine oil of the same quality grade and SAE class as used Vehicles Engine oil when the engine oil was last changed. 4-cylinder Approximately If, in exceptional cases, oil of the type in the 3 US gal (11.5 l) engine is not available, top up using another approved mineral or synthetic engine oil. 6-cylinder Approximately If the quality grade is not available for diesel 3.3 US gal (12.5 l) engines, you may also add engine oils meeting the requirements in MB Sheet Number 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be

Z 324 Service products and capacities

Information about oil consumption Further information can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. ! If the vehicle is predominantly used for short-distance driving, this could lead to a Rear axle malfunction in the automatic cleaning function for the diesel particle filter. As a result, Service product: transmission oil fuel may accumulate in the engine oil and cause engine failure. Product name/number Maintenance interval Therefore, if you mainly drive short distances, you should drive on a highway or on BP Energear Hypo DC — rural roads for 20 minutes every 310 miles 80W-90 (500 km). This ensures sufficient regener- MB Sheet No. 235.20 ation of the diesel particle filter. Depending on the driving style, the vehicle Mobil Delvac Synthetic consumes a maximum of 1.0 US qt (1.0 l) of Gear Oil 75W-90 engine oil over a distance of 620 miles MB Sheet No. 235.8 (1000 km). Oil consumption may be higher if: Further information can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Rthe vehicle is new. R you mainly operate the vehicle under ardu- Steering ous operating conditions. Ryou frequently drive at high engine speeds. Service product: power steering fluid Regular maintenance is one of the precondi- Product name/number Maintenance tions for moderate rates of consumption. interval You can only estimate the oil consumption after you have driven a considerable distance. Mobil ATF‑D, — Check the engine oil level on a regular basis, Exxon Mobil Corporation e.g. weekly or each time you refuel or equivalent (Y page 250). MB Sheet No. 236.3

The steering is maintenance-free. Further Technical data Transmission and power steering oil information can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Automatic transmission Service product: automatic transmission fluid Brake fluid

Product name/number Maintenance G WARNING interval Brake fluid is hazardous to health. Do not swallow brake fluid. See a doctor immediately Shell ATF 3403/M-115 — if you swallow brake fluid. MB Sheet No. 236.10 Make sure that brake fluid does not come into Fuchs/Shell ATF 3353 contact with skin, clothing or eyes. Rinse MB Sheet No. 236.12 affected areas with plenty of clean water and consult a doctor if necessary. Service products and capacities 325

Always wear gloves and eye protection when There is usually a notice in the engine com- topping up brake fluid. partment to remind you when the next Store brake fluid only in the original closed brake fluid change is due. container and keep it out of the reach of children. Comply with safety regulations when Coolant handling brake fluid. Important safety notes G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture G WARNING from the air. This lowers the boiling point of If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake ponents in the engine compartment, it may fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. brake system when the brakes are applied Let the engine cool down before you add anti- hard. This would impair braking efficiency. freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled There is a risk of an accident. next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the You should have the brake fluid renewed at antifreeze from components before starting the specified intervals. the engine.

! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and ! Take care not to spill any coolant on pain- rubber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come ted surfaces. You could otherwise damage into contact with brake fluid, rinse with the paintwork. water immediately. When handling, storing and disposing of cool- Only use brake fluids approved for Sprinter ant and antifreeze, please observe the rele- vehicles. Always check for the identification vant regulations and the safety notes in the DOT 4 plus. "Service products and capacities" section Information about approved brake fluids can (Y page 318). be found in the Maintenance Booklet or obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Coolant additive with antifreeze requirements Service product: brake fluid ! Use only approved antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor that complies with MB Specifica- Product name/ Intac B026E tion for Service Products, Sheet Number Technical data number RBoiling point: 500 ‡ 325. Using other, non-approved anti- (260 †) freeze/corrosion inhibitors may cause RWet boiling point: damage to the coolant system and reduce 356 ‡ (180 †) the engine's service life. Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/ MB Sheet No. 331.0 corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following Maintenance 2 years tasks: interval Rcorrosion protection Rantifreeze protection i Have the brake fluid renewed every 2 Rraises the boiling point years at a qualified specialist workshop. When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. Coolant

Z 326 Service products and capacities

must be used in the system all year round to Product name/number ensure anti-corrosion protection and a raised boiling point – even in countries with high Zerex G48, The Valvoline Company outside temperatures. MB Sheet No. 325.0 To prevent damage to the engine cooling system, use only approved corrosion inhibitor/ Glysantin G05, BASF AG antifreeze that comply with the Mercedes- MB Sheet No. 325.0 Benz Specifications for Service Products. We recommend corrosion inhibitor/anti- Capacities freeze that meets the requirements in MB Engine cooling system Specifications for Service Products Sheet Number 325. Coolant Approximately Check the antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con- 10.75 US qt (10.0 l) centration in the coolant every six months. The percentage of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze additive in the engine cooling system Refrigerant should: The air-conditioning system uses the refrig- Rbe at least 50%. This way, the engine cool- erant R‑134a. This refrigerant does not dam- ing system is protected against freezing age the ozone layer. down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Product name/number Maintenance Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection interval down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. Refrigerant R‑134a — If there has been coolant loss, do not refill MB Sheet No. 361.0 only with water. If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal parts water and corrosion inhibi- Further information can be obtained at any tor/antifreeze additive. The water used as qualified specialist workshop. part of the coolant mixture must fulfill certain requirements; these are usually fulfilled by drinking water. If the water quality is not suf- Washer fluid ficient, you must treat the water.

Technical data Important safety notes Service product: coolant G WARNING Product name/number Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine compo- EURO Peak Coolant/Antifreeze, nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of OLD WORLD INDUSTRIES fire and injury. MB Sheet No. 325.0 Make sure that no windshield washer con- Zerex G05, The Valvoline Company centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. MB Sheet No. 325.0 ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Vehicle data 327

When handling washer fluid, observe the Cargo tie down points and carrier sys- important safety notes on service products tems (Y page 318). Cargo tie down points Mixing ratio General notes Add windshield washer concentrate to the ! Observe the information on the maximum washer fluid all year round. Adapt the mixing loading capacity of the individual cargo tie- ratio to the ambient temperature. down points. At temperatures above freezing: If you use several cargo tie-down points to X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix- secure a load, you must always take the ture of water and windshield washer con- maximum loading capacity of the weakest centrate, e.g. Summerwash to prevent cargo tie-down point into account. smearing. If you brake hard, for example, the forces acting could be up to several times the At temperatures below freezing: weight force of the load. Always use multi- X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix- ple cargo tie-down points in order to dis- ture of water and windshield washer contribute the force absorption. Load the centrate, e.g. Winterwash if there is a dan- anchorages evenly. ger of frost. You will find further information about cargo This prevents washer fluid from freezing on tie down points and cargo tie-down rings in the windshield. the "Transporting" section (Y page 242). Capacities Cargo tie-down rings Windshield washer system with/without The maximum tensile load of the cargo tie- headlamp cleaning system down rings is: Cargo tie-down Permissible nomi- Washer fluid Approx. 6.3 US qt rings nal tensile load (6.0 l) Passenger Vans 786.5 lbf (3500 N) Vehicle data Cargo Van 1124.0 lbf Technical data General notes (5000 N) The following section contains important technical data for your vehicle. Your vehicle registration documents contain vehicle-specific and equipment-dependent technical data such as vehicle dimensions and vehicle weights.

Z 328 Vehicle data

Load rails The roof carrier supports must be mounted The maximum tensile loads of the cargo tie at equal distances. down points in the cargo compartment are: We recommend that you have a stabilizer installed on the front axle. Cargo tie down Permissible nomi- point nal tensile load ! For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use roof carrier systems that have Load rails on cargo 1124.0 lbf been tested and approved for the Sprinter. compartment floor (5000 N) This will help to avoid damage. Lower load rail on 562.0 lbf The data is valid for a load distributed evenly over the entire roof area. Maximum roof load sidewall (2500 N) and minimum number of pairs of roof carrier Upper load rail on 337.0 lbf supports on vehicles with: sidewall (1500 N) Maximum Minimum roof load number of The values specified apply only to loads pairs of placed on the cargo compartment floor if: supports Rthe load is secured to 2 cargo tie down Standard 660 lbs 6 points on the rail and roof (300 kg) Rthe distance to the nearest load-securing point on the same rail is approximately 3 ft High roof 330 lbs 3 (1 m). (150 kg)

Roof carrier Reduce the load on shorter roof carriers pro- portionately. The maximum load per pair of G WARNING roof carrier supports is 110 lbs (50 kg). When you load the roof, the center of gravity Loading directions and other information con- of the vehicle rises and the driving character- cerning load distribution and load securing istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof can be found in the "Transporting" section load, the driving characteristics, as well as (Y page 240). steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.

Technical data There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum roof load and Trailer tow hitch adjust your driving style. General notes G WARNING We recommend that you have the trailer tow If you distribute the load unevenly in the vehi- hitch mounted at an authorized Sprinter cle, the handling as well as the steering and Dealer. braking characteristics are severely affected. Use only a trailer tow hitch that has been tes- There is a risk of an accident. ted and approved specially for your vehicle by Distribute the load evenly in the vehicle. the distributor named on the inside of the Secure the load to prevent it from slipping. front cover. Only use a ball coupling that is ! approved for your vehicle and Sprinter trailer The weight of any load carried on the roof, tow hitch. You can also find information on including the roof carrier, must not exceed the permitted dimensions of the ball coupling the maximum permissible roof load. Vehicle data 329 on the identification plate of the trailer tow hitch. You can obtain advice from a qualified specialist workshop. Also observe the information on towing a trailer in the "Driving and parking" section (Y page 173). Technical data

Z 330 Vehicle data

Maximum permitted weights and loads ! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissible gross combination weight is less than the total of the permissible gross vehicle weight and the permissible trailer load. Exceeding the permissible gross combination weight can lead to damage to the drivetrain, to the transmission or to the trailer tow hitch. If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the relevant value for the permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible trailer load is therefore lower. In this case, the trailer or the vehicle may only be partially loaded. The permissible weights and loads which cannot be exceeded can also be found: Rin your vehicle documents and Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch, the trailer and the vehicle (Y page 316). You will find the basic values approved by the manufacturer in the following table. If the values differ, the lowest value applies. Make sure that you adhere to the weight restrictions by having the weight checked on a calibrated weighbridge. Vehicle Permissi- Gross Gross Maximum Trailer Maxi- type ble gross front axle rear axle permissi- load15 mum per- weight load load ble gross GTW missible GVWR GAWR GAWR weight of nose (FA) (RA) vehicle/ weight trailer TWR combina- tion14 GCWR 2500 8550 lbs 3970 lbs 5360 lbs 13550 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs (3878 kg) (1801 kg) (2431 kg) (6146 kg) (2268 kg) (227 kg) 3500 9900 lbs 4080 lbs 7060 lbs 14900 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs (4490 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6759 kg)16 (2268 kg)16 (227 kg)16 Canada Technical data only 4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs (2000 kg) (6917 kg)17 (3402 kg)17 (340 kg)17 9990 lbs 4080 lbs 7060 lbs 14990 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs (4531 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6799 kg)16 (2268 kg)16 (227 kg)16 USA only 4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs (2000 kg) (6917 kg)17 (3402 kg)17 (340 kg)17 10141 lbs 4080 lbs 7060 lbs 14990 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs (4600 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6799 kg)16 (2268 kg)16 (227 kg)16

14 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer 15 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer 16 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm). 17 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm). Vehicle data 331

Vehicle Permissi- Gross Gross Maximum Trailer Maxi- type ble gross front axle rear axle permissi- load15 mum per- weight load load ble gross GTW missible GVWR GAWR GAWR weight of nose (FA) (RA) vehicle/ weight trailer TWR combina- tion14 GCWR 4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs (2000 kg) (6917 kg)17 (3402 kg)17 (340 kg)17 11030 lbs 4080 lbs 7720 lbs 15250 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs (5003 kg) (1851 kg) (3502 kg) (6917 kg) (2268 kg)16 (227 kg)16 4410 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs (2000 kg) (3402 kg)17 (340 kg)17 Technical data

14 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer 15 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer 17 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm). 16 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).

Z 332